160.80-m1.pdf SERVICIO YS

ROTARY SCREW LIQUID CHILLERS
SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS Supersedes: 160.80-M1 (911) Form 160.80-M1 (114)
OPTIVIEW™ CONTROL CENTER

MODEL YS (STYLE E)
WITH OR WITHOUT HEAT PUMP OPTION
LD16159
371-02459-101 (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER - NEMA 1)

371-02579-101 (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER - CE)
371-02578-101 (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER - NEMA 4/12)
371-02459-102 (SOLID STATE STARTER - NEMA 1)
371-02578-102 (SOLID STATE STARTER - CE)
371-02448-102 (SOLID STATE STARTER - NEMA 4/12)
m Issue Date:
January 31, 2014
Metric Conversions
FORM 160.80-M1
ISSUE DATE: 1/31/2014
IMPORTANT!
READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES
dividuals may be exposed to certain components or This document is intended for use by owner-authorized
conditions including, but not limited to: refrigerants, operating/service personnel. It is expected that these
materials under pressure, rotating components, and individuals possess independent training that will en-
both high and low voltage. Each of these items has the able them to perform their assigned tasks properly and
potential, if misused or handled improperly, to cause safely. It is essential that, prior to performing any task
bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and respon- on this equipment, this individual shall have read and
sibility of operating/service personnel to identify and understood this document and any referenced mate-
recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves, rials. This individual shall also be familiar with and
and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure comply with all applicable governmental standards and
to comply with any of these requirements could result regulations pertaining to the task in question.
in serious damage to the equipment and the property in
which it is situated, as well as severe personal injury or
death to themselves and people at the site.
SAFETY SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to specific situations:
Indicates a possible hazardous situation Identifies a hazard which could lead to

which will result in death or serious injury damage to the machine, damage to other
if proper care is not taken. equipment and/or environmental pollu‑
tion if proper care is not taken or instruc‑
tions and are not followed.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situa‑ Highlights additional information useful

tion which will result in possible injuries to the technician in completing the work
or damage to equipment if proper care is being performed properly.
not taken.
External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product line, is not
to be connected inside the control cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches, transducers and controls
and any external wiring must not be installed inside the micro panel. All wiring must be in accor‑
dance with Johnson Controls’ published specifications and must be performed only by a qualified
electrician. Johnson Controls will NOT be responsible for damage/problems resulting from improper
connections to the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to follow this warn‑
ing will void the manufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property or personal injury.
2 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT

In complying with Johnson Controls’ policy for contin- these documents, the technician should verify whether
uous product improvement, the information contained the equipment has been modified and if current litera-
in this document is subject to change without notice. ture is available from the owner of the equipment prior
Johnson Controls makes no commitment to update or to performing any work on the chiller.
provide current information automatically to the man-
ual owner. Updated manuals, if applicable, can be ob- CHANGE BARS
tained by contacting the nearest Johnson Controls Ser- Revisions made to this document are indicated with a
vice office or accessing the Johnson Controls QuickLIT line along the left or right hand column in the area the
website at http://cgproducts.johnsoncontrols.com. revision was made. These revisions are to technical in-
Operating/service personnel maintain responsibility for formation and any other changes in spelling, grammar
the applicability of these documents to the equipment. or formatting are not included.
If there is any question regarding the applicability of
ASSOCIATED LITERATURE
MANUAL DESCRIPTION FORM NUMBER
Solid State Starter (Mod “A”) – Operation and Maintenance 160.46-OM3.1
Solid State Starter (Mod “B”) – Operation and Maintenance 160.00-O2
Unit Installation 160.80-N1
YS Mod E – Operation and Maintenance 160.80-O1
YS Mod E With Heat Pump – Operation and Maintenance 160.80-O2
Wiring Diagram – Unit With Electro-Mechanical Starter 160.80-PW1
Wiring Diagram – Unit With Mod “B” Solid State Starter 160.80-PW2
Wiring Diagram – Field Control Modifications 160.80-PW5
Renewal Parts – Unit 160.80-RP1
Renewal Parts – OptiView Control Center 160.80-RP3
JOHNSON CONTROLS 3
FORM 160.80-M1
NOMENCLATURE
YS CB CB S4 – CM E
DESIGN LEVEL (E)
MOTOR CODE
POWER SUPPLY 60 Hz 50 Hz
– for 60 Hz CF 5CC
5 for 50 Hz CG 5CD
CH 5CE
COMPRESSOR CODE CJ 5CF
S0, S1, S2, S3, S4, S5
CK 5CG
CL 5CH
CONDENSER CODE CM 5CI

BA, BB, CA, CB, DA, DB, EA, EB, FA, FB CN 5CJ
CP 5CK
CR 5CL
CS 5CM
EVAPORATOR CODE CT 5CN
BA, BB, CA, CB, DA, DB, DC
CU 5CO
EA, EB, EC, FA, FB, FC
CV
MODEL
4 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................................9
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE............................................................................................................... 11
SECTION 3 - MICROBOARD 031-01730-000.........................................................................................................19

Boot-up Step and Description......................................................................................................................... 20
LED Indicators................................................................................................................................................. 21
Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers............................................................................................... 28
Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Switches............................................................................................... 30
SECTION 4 - MICROBOARD 031-02430-000.........................................................................................................35

Downloading a Program from a Program Card............................................................................................... 42
Microboard 031-02430-000 Program Jumpers .............................................................................................. 44
Microboard 031-02430-000 Program Switches............................................................................................... 45
SECTION 5 - I/O BOARD........................................................................................................................................51

Relay Timing.................................................................................................................................................... 52
SECTION 6 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY.............................................................................................................61

Backlight Lamp Replacement.......................................................................................................................... 63
SECTION 7 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD.........................................................................................................69
SECTION 8 - DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD.....................................................................................73
SECTION 9 - KEYPAD.............................................................................................................................................77
SECTION 10 - POWER SUPPLY.............................................................................................................................79
SECTION 11 - CURRENT MODULE (CM-2)...........................................................................................................81
SECTION 12 - SOLID STATE STARTERS..............................................................................................................85
SECTION 13 - VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL.....................................................................................................93
SECTION 14 - E-LINK GATEWAY...........................................................................................................................95
SECTION 15 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS.........................................................................................................97
SECTION 16 - TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS.................................................................................................101
SECTION 17 - REMOTE SETPOINTS................................................................................................................... 119

Current Limit ................................................................................................................................................. 119
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature.............................................................................................................. 121
SECTION 18 - HOT GAS BYPASS.......................................................................................................................125
SECTION 19 - SMART FREEZE PROTECTION...................................................................................................127

Smart Freeze Disabled.................................................................................................................................. 128
Smart Freeze Enabled.................................................................................................................................. 128
JOHNSON CONTROLS 5
FORM 160.80-M1
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
SECTION 20 - STANDBY CHILLER FREEZE PROTECTION..............................................................................129
SECTION 21 - OIL RECOVERY FEATURE...........................................................................................................131
SECTION 22 - YS MOD E WITH HEAT PUMP......................................................................................................133

Operation Overview....................................................................................................................................... 133
Initial Setup Screen....................................................................................................................................... 133
Heat Pump Operational Modes..................................................................................................................... 135
Home Screen................................................................................................................................................ 136
System Screen.............................................................................................................................................. 136
Sensitivity Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 136
Evaporator Screen........................................................................................................................................ 138
Condenser Screen........................................................................................................................................ 138
Condenser Setup Screen.............................................................................................................................. 138
Refrigerant Level Control Screen ................................................................................................................. 138
Setpoints Screen........................................................................................................................................... 139
Setup Screen................................................................................................................................................. 139
Operations Screen........................................................................................................................................ 139
Service Information for YS Mod E Heat Pump Units..................................................................................... 140
ISN Communications..................................................................................................................................... 140
I/O Board....................................................................................................................................................... 140
Microboard.................................................................................................................................................... 140
Motor Overload Fault..................................................................................................................................... 140
Proportional Loading/Unloading.................................................................................................................... 141
Evaporator Pressure Transducer ................................................................................................................. 141
Refrigerant And Liquid Type Selection ......................................................................................................... 141
Extended Condenser Liquid Temperature Display Range For Heat Pump Units.......................................... 141
Extended Evaporator Liquid Temperature Display Range For Heat Pump Units.......................................... 142
Solid State Starter Cooling ........................................................................................................................... 144
Liquid Injection ............................................................................................................................................. 144
High Discharge Temperature Warning/Fault ................................................................................................ 144
Refrigerant Level Control ............................................................................................................................. 144
SECTION 23 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND RESET PROCEDURES........................ 145

Electro-Mechanical Starter Applications........................................................................................................ 145
Solid State Starter Applications..................................................................................................................... 146
Mod “B” Serial Data Interface Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter................................................................... 146
Mod “A” Multiplexed Data Interface Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter.......................................................... 147
Slide Valve Position....................................................................................................................................... 149
High Condenser Pressure Warning Threshold.............................................................................................. 149
Brine Low Evaporator Pressure Cutout......................................................................................................... 149
Smart Freeze Protection............................................................................................................................... 150
Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature............................................................................................................. 150
Variable Orifice Control ................................................................................................................................ 150
Hot Gas Bypass Control................................................................................................................................ 150
Transducer Auto Zero Enable/Disable........................................................................................................... 151
Seal Oil Pressure Transducer Enable/Disable.............................................................................................. 151
Maximum Load Limit..................................................................................................................................... 151
Minimum Load Control Source ..................................................................................................................... 151
Standby Chiller Freeze Protection................................................................................................................. 152
6 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Control Sensitivity................................................................................ 152

Ice Storage Mode.......................................................................................................................................... 152
Manual Slide Valve Control........................................................................................................................... 153
Service Phone Numbers............................................................................................................................... 153
Chiller Starts And Operating Hours Reset..................................................................................................... 153
Sales Order Data........................................................................................................................................... 154
Custom User Id And Passwords ................................................................................................................... 155
Record Setpoint Changes............................................................................................................................. 155
Microboard 031-02430-000 Setup/Configuration .........................................................................................156
High Condenser Pressure Fault While Shutdown – Reset Procedure ......................................................... 156
SECTION 24 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................................157

Main Diagnostics Screen............................................................................................................................... 158
Keypad Test Screen...................................................................................................................................... 159
Display Test Screen....................................................................................................................................... 160
Bit Patterns Test Screen................................................................................................................................ 162
Serial Inputs / Outputs Tests Screen............................................................................................................. 164
Digital Inputs / Outputs Tests Screen............................................................................................................ 166
Analog Inputs Test Screen............................................................................................................................ 169
SECTION 25 - SYSTEM COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST....................................................................................173
SECTION 26 - SERVICE INFORMATION LETTERS / BULLETINS.....................................................................177

SI0007 - Software Enhancements Effective May 2001................................................................................. 177
Si0024 - Software Enhancements Effective March 2002.............................................................................. 178
SI0091 - Software Enhancements Effective May 2004................................................................................. 179
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 - Boot-up LED Indicators��21

TABLE 2 - Addresses and Associated Data��22
TABLE 3 - Diagnostic Display Codes ��36
TABLE 4 - Multiplexer Channels��39
TABLE 5 - MUX Address Inputs Along With Respective Outputs ��82
TABLE 6 - Logic Board MUX��90
TABLE 7 - Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature��102
TABLE 8 - Return Chilled Liquid Temperature ��107
TABLE 9 - Return and Leaving Condensing Water Temperature�� 110
TABLE 10 - Oil and Discharge Temperature�� 113
TABLE 11 - Evaporator Refrigerant Sensor�� 118
TABLE 12 - Leaving and Return Condenser Liquid Temperature YS Mod E Heat Pump�� 142
TABLE 13 - Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature YS Mod E Heat Pump�� 143
TABLE 14 - Return Chilled Liquid Temperature YS Mod E Heat Pump�� 143
JOHNSON CONTROLS 7
FORM 160.80-M1
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 - Control Center - Electro-Mechanical Starter Applications�� 14
FIGURE 2 - Control Center - Mod “A” Solid State Starter Applications�� 15
FIGURE 3 - Control Center - Mod “B” Solid State Starter Applications�� 16
FIGURE 4 - Operation Sequence Timing Diagram (Electro-Mechanical And Solid State Starter Applications)�� 17
FIGURE 5 - Microboard 031-01730-000��25
FIGURE 6 - Flash Memory Card��26
FIGURE 7 - Microboard (031-01730-000) Power Supply Test Points�� 27
FIGURE 8 - Microboard Lamp Dimmer Circuit��31
FIGURE 9 - Microboard Serial Data Communications Ports��32
FIGURE 10 - Configurable Analog And Remote Setpoint Inputs��33
FIGURE 11 - Microboard 031-02430-000��46
FIGURE 12 - Program Card 031-02488-001��47
FIGURE 13 - Microboard (031-02430-000) DC Power Supply Test Points�� 47
FIGURE 14 - Microboard Lamp Dimmer Circuit��48
FIGURE 15 - Microboard Serial Data Communications Ports��49
FIGURE 16 - Configurable Analog And Remote Setpoint Inputs��50
FIGURE 17 - I/O Board��54
FIGURE 18 - I/O Board Digital Inputs��55
FIGURE 19 - I/O Board Typical Opto-Coupler Circuit��56
FIGURE 20 - I/O Board Typical Field Connections��56
FIGURE 21 - I/O Board Digital Outputs��57
FIGURE 22 - Display, Mounting��64
FIGURE 23 - Liquid Crystal Display Assembly – Sharp LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000) Display�� 65
FIGURE 24 - Liquid Crystal Display Assembly – Sharp LQ104V1DG61 (031-02866-000) Display�� 65
FIGURE 25 - Liquid Crystal Display Assembly – LG Semicon LP104V2-W (031-02046-000)�� 66
FIGURE 26 - Liquid Crystal Display Typical Control Signal Timing��66
FIGURE 27 - Display (Sharp LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000)) Lamp Replacement�� 67
FIGURE 28 - Display (Sharp LQ104V1DG61 (031-02886-000) and LG LP104V2-W (031-02046-000))�� 67
FIGURE 29 - Display Interface Board 031-01765-001 and 031-01765-002�� 70
FIGURE 30 - Display Backlight Inverter Board (Sharp LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000) and
LG Semicon LP104V2-W) (031-02046-000)��74
FIGURE 31 - Display Backlight Inverter Board Sharp LQ104V1DG61 Display 031-02886-000�� 75
FIGURE 32 - Keypad Panel��77
FIGURE 33 - Keypad��78
FIGURE 34 - Power Supply��79
FIGURE 35 - Power Supply – DC Power Distribution (Refer To Control Center Wiring
Diagram For Wire Connections)��80
FIGURE 36 - CM-2 Current Module (Electro-Mechanical Starter Application)�� 83
FIGURE 37 - CM-2 Current Module (Electro-Mechanical Starter Applications)�� 83
FIGURE 38 - CM-2 Current Module – Interface, Current Transformers And Variable Resistors�� 84
FIGURE 39 - Mod “B” Solid State Starter (LCSSS) - Interface��87
FIGURE 40 - Solid State Starter Logic Board ��88
FIGURE 41 - Mod “A” Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter (LCSSS) - Interface�� 91
FIGURE 42 - Mod “A” Solid State Starter Logic Board��92
FIGURE 43 - E-Link Gateway Interface Block Diagram��95
FIGURE 44 - Pressure Transducers��99
FIGURE 45 - Evaporator Transducer (YS Mod E Heat Pump)��141
FIGURE 46 - Main Diagnostics Screen��158
FIGURE 47 - Keypad Test Screen��159
FIGURE 48 - Display Test Screen��160
FIGURE 49 - BIT Patterns Test Screen��162
FIGURE 50 - Serial Inputs / Outputs Tests Screen��164
FIGURE 51 - Microboard - Com 5 Serial Data Port��165
FIGURE 52 - Digital Inputs / Outputs Tests Screen��166
FIGURE 53 - Analog Inputs Test Screen��169
8 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION 1
This document explains the operation of the printed the connections between the printed circuit boards and
circuit boards and major components of the Control components within the Control Center:
Center to a level that allows a Service Technician to
troubleshoot and locate the source of a problem. • YORK Form 160.80-PW1 – Chillers equipped
with Electro-Mechanical starter
The overall system architecture is described and illus-
trated with block diagrams. This describes the general • YORK Form 160.80-PW2 – Chillers equipped
function of each component and provides the system with Mod “B” YORK Solid State Starter
interface and signal flow. The function of each com-
ponent and signal flow between components must be When the chiller shuts down on a SAFETY or CY-
understood before effective troubleshooting can com- CLING shutdown or is being prevented from starting,
mence. a message is displayed providing the reason for the
shutdown. This message, along with all the chiller op-
The operation of each printed circuit board is described erating conditions at the instant of the event are stored
and illustrated with a block diagram that is a simplified in the Microboard battery-backed memory. This his-
representation of board circuitry. The expected voltage tory data can be displayed or printed using an optional
level at all inputs and outputs of each board for any printer. The YS Mod E – Operation and Maintenance
operating condition is provided. (Form 160.80-O1) provides a detailed description of
Included in this document are procedures that have to this message, including the conditions required to pro-
be performed at chiller commissioning or during ser- duce the message and conditions required to restart the
vice. They should not be performed by anyone other chiller.
than a Service Technician. For example, calibration Diagnostic Routines allow service analysis of the fol-
procedures have to be performed or verified at system lowing functions:
commissioning or when a component is replaced. Cer-
tain Safety shutdowns require special reset procedures • Display
to be performed before the chiller can be restarted. • Analog inputs
Since the operating program supplied in each Control
Center is universal to all applications, special setpoints, • Digital inputs
program jumpers and program switches are required to • Digital outputs
configure the chiller for local operating conditions.
• Serial Data ports
A System Commissioning Checklist is provided as ref-
Before beginning any troubleshooting, observe the
erence of items to be performed during chiller com-
shutdown message and retrieve the HISTORY data
missioning.
of that event. Refer to the Operations Manual for an
In addition to this document, several levels of support- explanation of the message. The conditions required
ing documentation are required while servicing the to produce the message must be clearly understood
system. Wiring Diagram – Field Control Modifica- before proceeding. (If this is not heeded, much time
tions (Form 160.80-PW5) provides details of the in- will be wasted). Armed with a knowledge of the over-
terface to remote devices. YS Mod E – Operation and all system architecture and the function of each printed
Maintenance (Form 160.80-O1) explains the operation circuit board and signal flow provided by this manual,
of the Control Center Keypad, how to enter Setpoints proceed with the appropriate Wiring Diagram listed
and explains all the messages displayed on the Control above to trace the problem through the system. Use the
Center display. The following wiring diagrams provide Diagnostic Routines where appropriate.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 9
FORM 160.80-M1
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
10 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The Control Center performs the following functions: 0.5 to 4.5VDC. These are analog inputs to the Control
Center.
• Controls chiller capacity to chill liquid to the
chilled liquid temperature setpoint. Digital Inputs are on/off inputs to the Control Center 2
in the form of switch and relay contacts. These inputs
• Controls chiller solenoid valves, relays, actuators
are 115VAC when the contacts are closed and 0VAC
and motor contactors per the operating program.
when open. These include flow switches, local start/
• Displays chiller operating conditions, alarms, stop switch, remote cycling and high pressure safety
shutdown messages and history data. device, etc.
• Accepts operator-programmed setpoints and con- Digital Outputs are on/off outputs from the Control
trols the chiller accordingly. Center in the form of relay contacts and triacs. The re-
lay contacts and triacs typically switch 115VAC. Relay
• Allows manual control of chiller motor contactors
outputs include status/alarm, chiller solenoid valves,
and actuators.
oil heater, and chilled and condenser water pump start-
• Monitors chiller operating conditions and shuts ers, etc. Triac outputs include slide valve control.
down chiller when Safety or Cycling thresholds
are exceeded. Serial Data is transmitted to and received from devic-
es in RS-232, RS-485 and TX/RX (opto-couple) form.
• Allows local manual start/stop and accepts start/
stop commands from remote devices, via contact The Control Center supports three types of starters;
closures or serial communications. Electro-Mechanical Starter, Mod “A” Solid State
Starter and Mod “B” Solid State Starter. However, all
• Allows setpoints to be changed from a remote Control Centers contain the following standard compo-
location via 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, 0-20mA, nents, regardless of the starter type applied:
4-20mA, contact closures or serial communica-
tions. • Microboard
• Provides chiller operating data and status to re- • I/O (input/output) Board
mote devices via serial communications and con- • Keypad
tact closures.
• Display
• Allows real-time data and history data to be print-
ed on an optional printer. • Power Supply
• Controls the compressor motor starter and con- In addition to the standard components, the Control
tains a printed circuit board logic that supports Center contains a printed circuit board that provides
Electro-Mechanical Starters, and Solid State certain control and interface functions for the starter
Starters. type applied. Each starter type requires a different
board as follows:
The Control Center is a microprocessor based control
system that receives analog, digital and serial data in- • Electro-Mechanical Starter - CM-2 Current Module
puts and controls analog, digital and serial data out-
• Solid State Starter (Mod “A” only) - Logic Board
puts per instructions in the operating program. A panel
mounted display and touch-sensitive keypad permit lo- Figures 1 through 3 are Control Center block diagrams
cal operation. of the three starter types. On each block diagram, the
standard components are shown, along with the printed
System pressures are sensed by pressure transducers circuit board that supports the applied starter type. Fig-
The output of each transducer is a DC voltage that is ure 4 on page 17 is an Operation Sequence timing
analogous to the pressure input. System temperatures diagram.
are sensed by thermistors. The output of each thermis-
tor is a DC voltage that is analogous to the temperature The microprocessor and all supporting logic circuits,
it is sensing. Typical output voltage range of both is along with the memory devices containing the oper-
JOHNSON CONTROLS 11
FORM 160.80-M1
ating program, reside on the Microboard. All chiller Throughout this manual, reference is made to functions
operating decisions are made here. It receives analog and features that are only available in certain Flash
and digital inputs from the chiller and remote devic- Memory Card revision levels (C.MLM.03.xx.xxx). To
es. The analog inputs are connected directly to the cross reference C.MLM software to C.OPT software,
Microboard. The digital inputs are received via the I/O refer to the controls revision level. Software version
Board (see description below). Under Program control, C.OPT.03.03A.xxx is of the same controls revision
the Microboard operates the relays and triacs that are level as C.MLM.03.03.xxx. From this starting point,
located on the I/O Board. both receive the same updates at each revision. Soft-
ware upgrades should only be performed by a Service
The control center could be equipped with either of the Technician.
following Microboards:
The I/O Board acts as an input/output device for the
• 031-01730-000 – Shipped in new production Microboard. It conditions the digital input signals for
chillers until March 2004. The program resides in the Microboard and contains relays and triacs that are
a replaceable Flash Memory Card. The software controlled by the Microboard to control solenoids,
version is C.MLM.03.xx.yzz. It is printed on a la- motor contactors and actuators. The 115VAC digital
bel adhered to the card. The Program can be up- inputs from switch and relay contacts are converted
graded by replacing the card. to logic level voltages by Opto-Couplers. The relays
• 031-02430-000 – Shipped in new production have +12VDC coils that are energized and de-ener-
chillers after March 2004. The program resides gized by the Microboard. The contacts of these relays
in non-removable onboard memory. The software control the 115VAC system solenoids, relays and mo-
version is C.OPT.03.xx.yzz, and is viewable on tor contactors. The triacs are turned on and off by the
the DIAGNOSTICS Screen in SERVICE access Microboard.
level. The Program can be upgraded by download-
A front panel-mounted Keypad allows Operator and
ing a new program from a Program Card. Program
Service Technician user interface. Membrane keys are
Cards are shirt-pocket-size portable memory stor-
used to display chiller and system parameters, enter
age devices available from YORK.
setpoints and perform chiller and Control Center diag-
Since the newer version Microboard is backward com- nostics. It also contains a START-RUN-STOP/RESET
patible to earlier vintage OptiView Control Centers, Switch that is used to locally start and stop the chiller
earlier vintage chillers could be equipped with a later and perform manual reset functions.
version Microboard due to service replacement.
A front panel mounted liquid crystal Display allows
The software versions (C.MLM.03.xx.yzz or graphic animated display of the chiller, chiller subsys-
C.OPT.03.xx.yzz) are alphanumeric codes that are tems and system parameters. The chiller and working
interpreted as follows. Each time the controls section components of the chiller are displayed, along with
or language section is revised, the respective revision chiller operating pressures and temperatures. The Key-
level increments. pad is used to select displays showing increasing levels
of detail of chiller working components.
• C – Commercial chiller
A self-contained Power Supply supplies the necessary
• MLM – Used on Microboard 031-01730-000
DC voltages for all the components within the Control
• OPT - Used on Microboard 031-02430-000 Center.
• 03 – YS chiller When the compressor motor is driven by an Electro-
Mechanical Starter, the Control center is equipped with
• xx - controls revision level (00, 01, etc)
a CM-2 Current Module. This printed circuit board
• y – language package (0=English only, 1=NEMA, provides current overload and power fault protection
2=CE, 3=NEMA/CE ) for the compressor motor. Current Transformers, locat-
ed in the compressor motor terminal box, along with
• zz – language package revision level (00, 01, etc)
rectifying and calibration circuitry, provide an analog
voltage representing compressor motor current to the
CM-2 Module. This signal is further conditioned and
provided to the Microboard.
12 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
When the compressor motor is driven by the YORK Logic Board that is installed inside the Control Center.
Solid State Starter, there could be either of two differ- The Logic Board interfaces the Microboard via a mul-
ent Solid State Starters applied. New production chill- tiplexed data interface.
ers are equipped with the Mod “B” Solid State Start-
er. This starter contains a combination Logic/Trigger Serial data interface to the YORK Building Automation
System (BAS) is through the optional E-Link Gateway,
Board that interfaces the Microboard via a serial com-
mounted inside the Control Center. This printed circuit
2
munications link. Earlier vintage chillers, such as those
encountered in Control Center retrofit applications, are board requests the required data from the Microboard
equipped with the Mod “A” Solid State Starter. This and makes it available for the BAS (ISN) network.
starter contains a Trigger Board that interfaces to a
JOHNSON CONTROLS 13
14
RS-232 / RS-485 SERIAL DATA
+12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER

CHILLER TEMPERATURES & PRESSURES
SUPPLY
SLIDE VALVE POSITION
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT LIMIT + 24 VDC

SETPOINTS (0-20 mA, 4-20mA, 0-10VDC, 2 - 10 VDC)
BACKLIGHT
LAMP LAMP COMPRESSOR
INVERTER ADDRESS
CONTROL MOTOR
BOARD
CURRENT
LIQUID CM-2
CRYSTAL CURRENT
DISPLAY DISPLAY DATA
DISPLAY MODULE
INTERFACE MICRO BOARD
BOARD MULTIPLEXED DATA
ROW IN
KEYPAD COLUMN OUT
MOTOR CONTROLLER
SHUTDOWN TO I/O BOARD
I / O BOARD
TO STARTER
DIGITAL TRIAC RELAY
IN OUT OUT
COMPRESSOR
MOTOR START
REMOTE CYCLING STATUS / ALARM

HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY CHILLER SOLENOID VALVES
Figure 1 - CONTROL CENTER - ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER APPLICATIONS

LOCAL START / STOP SWITCH
HOT GAS BYPASS (OPTIONAL)
CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER FLOW SWITCHES
VARIABLE ORIFICE
SEPARATOR OIL LEVEL SWITCH STATUS
MOTOR CONTROLLER SHUTDOWN OIL HEATER ON/OFF
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT CHILLED & CONDENSER WATER PUMP STARTERS
LIMIT SETPOINTS (PULSE WIDTH MODULATION)
SLIDE VALVE CONTROL
LD04954
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
FORM 160.80-M1
+12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER

SUPPLY
JOHNSON CONTROLS
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT LIMIT + 24 VDC

SETPOINTS ( -2 A 4-2 A -1 VDC 2 - 1 VDC)
COMPRESSOR
MOTOR
BACKLIGHT CURRENT
LAMP LAMP ADDRESS
INVERTER
CONTROL
BOARD
TRIGGER
SOLID
LIQUID BOARD
STATE
CRYSTAL STATUS
DISPLAY DISPLAY DATA STARTER
DISPLAY INTERFACE LOGIC
MICRO BOARD BOARD TRIGGER
BOARD MULTIPLEXED DATA BOARD
CONTROL
ROW IN
KEYPAD COLUMN OUT
MOTOR CONTROLLER
I / O BOARD
DIGITAL TRIAC RELAY
IN OUT OUT
COMPRESSOR
MOTOR START

Figure 2 - CONTROL CENTER - MOD “A” SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS

VARIABLE ORIFICE
SLIDE VALVE CONTROL
LD04955
15
2
16
+12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER

SUPPLY
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT LIMIT
SETPOINTS ( -2 A 4-2 A -1 VDC 2 - 1 VDC)
+ 24 VDC
BACKLIGHT
LAMP LAMP COMPRESSOR
INVERTER
CONTROL MOTOR
BOARD
CURRENT &
SOLID
LIQUID LINE VOLTAGE
STATE
CRYSTAL DISPLAY STARTER
DISPLAY DATA
DISPLAY INTERFACE LOGIC/TRIGGER
MICRO BOARD BOARD SCR
BOARD SERIAL DATA CONTROL
ROW IN
KEYPAD COLUMN OUT
MOTOR CONTROLLER
I / O BOARD
DIGITAL TRIAC RELAY
IN OUT OUT
COMPRESSOR
MOTOR START

Figure 3 - CONTROL CENTER - MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS

VARIABLE ORIFICE
SLIDE VALVE CONTROL
LD04956
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
FORM 160.80-M1
DISPLAY
MESSAGE
"SYSTEM RUN"
CHECK OIL
PRESSURE
"START SEQUENCE
INITIATED"
DISCHARGE
AUTO-ZEROING
SUPERHEAT
OIL FILTER
CHECK
AND DIFF. OIL
TRANSDUCERS
CHECK DIFFERENTIAL
OIL FILTER PRESS.
"SYSTEM SHUTDOWN"
2-MINUTE
FLOW SWITCH LOCKOUT
BYPASS DELAY
0 15 25 30 45 210 1800
START (0.25) (0.42) (0.5) (0.75) (3.5) (30)
RESTART
TIME IN SECONDS (MINUTES)
LD04957
Figure 4 - OPERATION SEQUENCE TIMING DIAGRAM (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AND SOLID STATE

STARTER APPLICATIONS)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 17
FORM 160.80-M1
18 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 3 - MICROBOARD 031-01730-000
Microboard 031-01730-000 is supplied in new produc- There are two Flash Memory Cards available. The dif-
tion chillers until March 2004. ference between them is the different languages that
can be displayed on the Display Screens. Language se-
The Microboard contains the operating software (Pro- lection is performed on the USER Screen following in-
gram), microprocessor (Micro), and supporting circuits structions in YS Mod E – Operation and Maintenance
for the Micro. (Form 160.80-O1). Not all languages are available. Re-
The Program is a set of instructions to control the fer to Renewal Parts – OptiView Control Center (Form
chiller, the display and peripheral devices. It also 160.80-RP3) for list of available Flash Memory Cards 3
contains the Safety and Cycling shutdown thresholds and display languages. IMPORTANT! – Not all ver-
(non changeable) and Display messages and screens. sions of Flash Memory Cards are compatible with revi-
It is stored in a memory device called a flash memory sion “E” (and later) Microboards or all BIOS Eproms.
card. This is a type of nonvolatile memory that can be If an incompatible version is used, the initialization
read from or written to, but requires the locations to be (boot-up) process will not complete and the chiller will
erased before they are written to. With the exception of not run! Refer to Renewal Parts – OptiView Control
a write/read sequence that occurs during the Boot-up Center (Form 160.80-RP3) and Service Replacement
process explained below, this device is used primarily on Page 24 in this section.
as read-only in this application. A write protect switch The Micro controls the chiller by reading and execut-
is located on the left edge of the card as shown in Fig- ing the Program instructions in a sequence determined
ure 6 on page 26. It must be placed in the “Write by the Program. Under Program control, the Micro
Enabled” position in order to allow successful Boot- reads the Analog and Digital Inputs to determine the
up. The card is located in socket location U46 (Refer operating conditions and controls Digital Outputs
to Figure 5 on page 25). It connects to the Board based upon these inputs. These inputs are compared to
via an Elastomeric connector that is a silicon rubber stored thresholds to determine if a Safety or Cycling
strip embedded with silver conductors. The Card can shutdown is required. If a threshold has been exceeded,
be removed from its socket by using the thumb to press a shutdown is performed and the appropriate message
down on the socket’s plastic tension spring. The card is retrieved from the Program and displayed on the
is installed by inserting it into the socket/holder and Liquid Crystal Display. As operating conditions re-
pressing on the surface of the Card until it snaps into quire, status messages are retrieved and displayed. The
place. The Memory card is a replaceable component. Keypad is read as Digital Inputs. When an operator
Refer to Renewal Parts – OptiView Control Center presses a key to request a display, the Micro interprets
(Form 160.80-RP3). The version of the Memory card the request, retrieves the display from the Program and
is an alphanumeric code that represents the application displays it. The Program assembles data in the correct
and revision level. The version is printed on a label ad- format for transmission through the Serial Data Ports
hered to the memory card’s surface. The version code to peripheral devices. The Program also instructs the
is as follows: Micro to respond to requests from peripheral devices
C.MLM.nn.nn.nnn for serial data transmissions.
Language Package Revision Level (00, 01, etc.)
Language Package* (0=English only, 1=NEMA 1-4,2=CE) The Watchdog circuit monitors the +5VDC supply
Controls Revision Level (00, 01, etc.) from the external Power Supply to determine when
Chiller Type (01=YK, 02=YT, 03=YS, 05=YR)
a power failure is occurring. Just prior to the supply
Millennium™ Chiller
Commercial Chiller decreasing to a level where the Micro and supporting
* Refer to Renewal Parts – OptiView Control Center (Form 160.80-
circuits can no longer operate, it applies a reset signal
RP3) for available languages.
to the Micro.
1=S
upplied in new NEMA 1-4 OptiView Control Centers but can
The Micro responds by de-energizing the run digital
be retrofit to any OptiView Control Center.
output, shutting down the chiller and retrieving the
2 = Supplied in new CE (European Community) OptiView Control
Power Failure message from the Program and sending
Centers but can be retrofit to any OptiView Control Center.
it to the Display Controller for display. Similarly, when
power is first applied after a power failure, it maintains
JOHNSON CONTROLS 19
FORM 160.80-M1
the Micro in a reset state until the +5VDC has returned has either 128K, 256K or 512K capacity. Microboard
to a sufficient level. The Watchdog circuit also assures Program Jumper JP38 must be positioned according to
that all the Program instructions are being performed the actual EPROM installed. Refer to Microboard 031-
and that the Program has not latched-up, bypassing im- 01730-000 Program Jumpers. There are 5 steps to the
portant safety thresholds. If the Program has latched- boot-up process. During the boot-up process, there is
up, The Micro initiates a Safety shutdown and displays a visual indication as each step is performed, followed
WATCHDOG – SOFTWARE REBOOT message. by a Pass/Fail status of the step. On the Microboard, a
green LED (CR17 - Pass) flashes to indicate the step
The BIOS EPROM (basic input/output system eras- was successful. If a step is unsuccessful, a red LED
able programmable read only memory) is a memory de- (CR18 - Fail) flashes and the Boot-up process termi-
vice that contains the bootstrap or power-up program. nates. The execution and Pass/Fail status of steps 3
It is located in socket location U45. This EPROM is through 5 are displayed on a white Keypad Display
replaceable. Refer to Renewal Parts – OptiView Con- Screen as they are performed. This white display
trol Center (Form 160.80-RP3). The EPROM version screen also lists the BIOS EPROM Version. The steps
is an alphanumeric code that represents the application of the Boot-up process are as follows. Also, below is
and revision level. The version is printed on a label ad- listed the LED activity associated with each step.
hered to the EPROM’s surface. The version code is as
follows: BOOT-UP STEP AND DESCRIPTION
C. MLM. 00. XX.
1. First initiate table complete.
Registers in the Micro are configured to allow it to
Revision level. Increments 01, 02 etc.
perform basic memory read/write functions.
YS Chiller BIOS EPROM
2. FPGA configuration.

Millennium™ Chiller
Commercial Chiller The Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) is
configured to process Digital Inputs and Outputs.
There are two different BIOS Eproms. Eprom 031- 3. Mini-card signature test.
01796-001 can only be used in revision “A” through
“D” Microboards. Eprom 031-01796-002, although it A location in the Flash Memory Card that contains
can be used in revision “A” through “D” Microboards, a code identifying the Manufacturer is compared
is required in revision “E” and later Microboards to to other locations that contain the manufacturer’s
support the use of either 65548 or 65550 Display Con- name. If these values are the same, it is pass. If
trollers (U29). IMPORTANT! Eprom 031-01796-002 they are different, it is fail.
is NOT compatible with all versions of Flash Memory 4. Mini-card checksum.
Cards. If an incompatible Flash Memory Card version
is used with this BIOS, the initialization (boot-up) pro- The Flash Memory Card checksum is calculated
cess will not complete and the chiller will not run! (re- and compared to the checksum value that is stored
fer to Renewal Parts – OptiView Control Center (Form in the Card at the time the Card was initially pro-
160.80-RP3) and Service Replacement on Page 24 grammed at the YORK Factory. If both values are
in this section. the same, it is considered pass. If the calculated
value is different than the stored value, it is con-
When power is applied to the Control Center follow- sidered fail.
ing a power failure, the Micro executes the instructions
in the BIOS EPROM program to initialize, configure 5. BRAM quick test.
and start operation of certain Microboard components Test data is written to and then read from several
before the main program (stored in the Flash Memory memory locations to verify BRAM operation.
Card) is started. Depending upon the application, the
Microboard could be equipped with an EPROM that
20 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
LED INDICATORS jumper and switch. The position of some jumpers can
be determined by the Service Technician to meet the
When power is applied to the Control Center, both the
desired operation. Others must be positioned according
red (CR18 - Fail) and green (CR17 - Pass) LEDs si-
to the requirements of the size, type or style of compo-
multaneously illuminate for 1 second, then the Boot-up
nents and thus are determined by the YORK Factory.
process begins in the following sequence.
Some jumpers are plastic sleeves with metal inserts
Table 1 - BOOT-UP LED INDICATORS that are inserted over 2-prong or 3-prong conductors.
Others are wire bridges that are either cut or left in
STEP PASS FAIL
place. The Program Switches are miniature switches
Watchdog will initiate
1 Green on, Red off that are placed in either the ON or OFF position.
a re-boot. 3
Boot-up process halts. Keypad Interface
2 Green flash once
One red flash repeating.
Boot-up process halts.
The Keypad is read via J18. The Keypad is a matrix
3 Green flash once
Two red flashes repeating. of conductors arranged in rows and columns (refer to
Figure 32 on page 77 and Figure 33 on page 78).
4 Green flash once
Three red flashes repeating. There are 4 rows and 8 columns. When a key is pressed,
the conductors are pressed together at that point, cre-
5 Green flash once
Four red flashes repeating.
ating continuity between the row conductor and the
column conductor. The keypad is read by applying a
When all steps have been completed, the LED's will logic low to a row while leaving +5VDC pullup on all
then illuminate or extinguish, as long as power is ap- other rows. The micro then reads the 8 columns. If any
plied, according to the settings of Microboard Pro- column has a logic low on it, the key corresponding
grams Switches 7 and 8 as follows: to that coordinate (row, column) is being pressed. The
micro reads the entire keypad by repeating this routine
Green (CR17) beginning with row 1 and ending with row 4. The en-
Program SW 7 set to ON - extinguishes tire keypad is continually read while the control cen-
OFF - illuminates ter is powered. Refer to SECTION 9 - KEYPAD of this
manual for details of the Keypad.
Red (CR18)
CM-2 Board or Style A Solid State Starter
Program SW 8 set to Standard - illuminates
Interface
Enhanced - extinguishes
The microboard retrieves certain operating parameters
The BRAM (battery backed random access memory) (via J10) from the compressor motor starter control
is a memory device that contains a battery that pre- board (CM-2 Current Board for Electromechanical
serves the data during power failures. It is a replace- starter or Style “A” Solid State Starter Logic Board).
able part. Refer to Renewal Parts – OptiView Control Refer to the appropriate section of this manual for
Center (Form 160.80-RP3). It is located in socket loca- detailed explanation of each board. Both boards con-
tion U52. The Micro stores the setpoints programmed tain an 8 channel multiplexer. The micro sequentially
by the Operator or Service Technician, History Data and continually reads channels 0 through 7. It reads
and other data that requires preservation, in this device. each channel by applying a 3-bit binary address to the
Also, the day of week, time of day and calendar date multiplexer. A 0-5VDC analog value is returned from
timekeeping are done here. each channel. The function of each is in the table be-
low. The micro determines which board, and therefore
Program Jumpers/Program Switches which starter is present, by the value returned from
The Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers channel 0. Since channels 0 through 6 are ground-
and Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Switches are ed, the CM-2 board returns a 0vdc value. The Solid
used to alter the program operation or configure the State Starter Logic Board returns a value >0.41VDC
Microboard hardware for specific operation. This al- to +5VDC. If the value is <0.4VDC, it indicates the
lows the Program and Microboard to be universal for starter is an Electro-mechanical (EM) starter and the
all standard applications. Refer to Microboard 031- micro then reads channel 7 to retrieve the peak motor
01730-000 Program Jumpers and Microboard 031- current value. A value >0.4VDC indicates the starter
01730-000 Program Switches for the function of each is an “A” style Solid State Starter and the micro reads
JOHNSON CONTROLS 21
FORM 160.80-M1
channels 1 through 7. In the Solid State Starter, channel E-Link Gateway Interface
0 indicates the starter size (model) and voltmeter range
An optional E-Link Gateway printed circuit board can
(300VAC or 600VAC). Channel 1 is a hardware gener-
be connected to the COM 4B RS-232 serial data port
ated 100% FLA (prevents pre-rotation vanes from fur-
(J2). J2-7 is TX data to the E-Link Gateway. J2-6 is RX
ther opening) or 104% FLA (closes pre-rotation vanes
data from the E-Link Gateway. Signal levels are stan-
until motor current is <102%) current limit override
dard RS-232. The E-Link Gateway polls system pres-
command that overrides normal Pro-rotation Vanes
sures, temperatures and status from the microboard. It
control. Channels 2 through 4 are analog voltages that
holds it for retrieval by third-party devices. Refer to
represent phase A, B and C motor current. The highest
SECTION 14 - E-LINK GATEWAY of this manual.
phase is Channels 5 through 7 are analog voltages that
represent phase A, B and C Line Voltage. The data for Digital Inputs
each channel is shown below:
The I/O Board converts the 115VAC inputs to logic
Table 2 - ADDRESSES AND ASSOCIATED DATA level inputs for the microboard at J19. A 115VAC input
MOD "A" SOLID STATE
to the I/O board is converted to a logic low (<1VDC).
CM-2 BOARD A 0VAC input to the I/O Board is converted to a logic
STARTER LOGIC BOARD
ADDRESS DATA ADDRESS DATA high (>4VDC). Refer to SECTION 5 - I/O BOARD of
Starter Model /
this manual for details of the I/O Board.
0
Voltmeter Range
0 thru 6
Grid Digital Outputs
Current Limit
1
Command The microboard controls 115VAC relays and solenoids
Phase C, B, A via the I/O Board (via J19). The I/O Board contains
2-4
Peak Motor Motor Current +12VDC relays that isolate the microboard low volt-
7
Current Phase A, B, C age circuits from the 115VAC device coils. Solid state
5-7 switching devices are used to control the relays. The
Line Voltage
microboard energizes the +12VDC relays by applying
Style B Solid State Starter Interface a ground to the coil input. They are de-energized by
If equipped with either of these drives, the drive is in- opening the ground path. The contacts of these relays
terfaced to the Microboard via the Opto-Coupled COM switch 115VAC to system relays and solenoids. The
5 serial data port (J15). The serial data is represented outputs that control the chilled liquid pump and com-
by +5VDC and 0VDC logic levels. J15-1 is TX data to pressor motor starter have anti-chatter (anti-recycle)
the drive and J15-2 is RX data from the drive. Refer to timers associated with them. The output that controls
SECTION 12 - SOLID STATE STARTERS for details of relay K0 is not allowed to change at a rate greater than
this interface. once every 10 seconds. The output that controls relay
K13 is not allowed to change at a rate greater than once
Printer Interface every 20 seconds.
An optional Printer can be connected to COM1 RS- The microboard controls Actuator motors via Triacs on
232 serial data port (J2). J2-4 is TX data to the printer. the I/O Board. Each actuator has an open winding and
J2-2 is the DSR (Data Set Ready or busy) signal from a close winding. Current flowing through a winding
the printer. Signal levels are standard RS-232. The mi- causes the actuator to rotate in the respective direc-
croboard sends data to the printer at the selected baud tion. Each winding is controlled by a Triac. The Triac
rate until the printer buffer becomes full, whereupon is turned on to allow current to flow through a winding.
the printer asserts its Busy signal. The microboard sus- The microboard turns on the Triac by applying a logic
pends data transmission until the printer can accept low (<1VDC) to the Triac driver on the I/O Board. It
more data. Each printer must be setup/configured to turns it off by applying a logic high (>4VDC). Refer to
operate properly with the microboard. The Baud, Data SECTION 5 - I/O BOARD of this manual for details of
Bits, Parity and Stop Bits must be programmed on the the I/O Board.
Comms Screen. Other printer setup is performed on the
PRINTER Screen. Refer to YS Mod E – Operation and Analog Inputs
Maintenance (Form 160.80-O1) for details of avail- System pressures, in the form of analog DC voltages,
able printers and printer setup instructions. are input from Pressure Transducers. Refer to SEC-
22 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
TION 15 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS of this man- • CR11 RX2 – COM2 serial port receive data.
ual. Formulas and graphs are included to calculate the
• CR16 TX2 – COM2 serial port transmit data.
expected transducer output voltage for a given pressure
input. • CR10 RX5 – COM5 serial port receive data.
System temperatures, in the form of analog DC volt- • CR9 TX5 – COM5 serial port transmit data.
ages, are input from Thermistors. Refer to SECTION
16 - TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS of this manual. Display Interface
Included are tables to convert the expected output volt- The graphic screens displayed on the liquid Crystal
age for any temperature applied to the thermistor. Display are created from the program downloaded
from the Program Card and stored in the flash memory 3
Serial Data Ports chip. The data to form these screens is output from J5.
The Microboard is equipped with 5 serial data ports This data is in the form of red, green and blue drive
(Refer to Figure 9 on page 32). Each port is dedi- signals applied to each of the 303,200 the display pix-
cated for a specific function as follows: els arranged in a matrix of 640 columns x 480 rows.
Each pixel consists of 3 windows; red, green and blue,
A. COM1 (J2) – RS-232. Printer through which a variable amount of light from the Dis-
B. COM2 (J13) – RS-232. Not used play Backlight, is permitted to pass to the front of the
display. The drive signals determine the amount of light
C. COM3 (J12) – RS-485. Optional I/O. permitted to pass through each window. The overall
D. C
OM4 (4A-J11), (4B-J2) – This port is actually pixel color is a result of the gradient of red, green and
two ports. However, they cannot be used simul- blue light allowed to pass. The drive signal for each
taneously. The position of program jumper JP27 pixel is an 18 bit binary word; 6 for each of the 3 col-
determines which port can be used. (refer to ors. The greater the binary value, the more light is per-
Microboard 031-02430-000 Program Jumpers). mitted to pass. The pixels are driven sequentially from
COM4A–RS485 Not used. COM4B – RS-232 E- left to right, beginning with the top row. To coordinate
Link Gateway. the drive signals and assure the pixels in each row are
driven from left to right and the columns are driven
E. C
OM5 (J15) – Opto-coupled transmit/receive. from top to bottom, the drive signals are accompanied
Style B Solid State Starter. by a clock and horizontal and vertical sync signals.
Each port is equipped with two LED’s. A red TX LED During the boot-up, the program in the BIOS eprom
illuminates as data is transmitted to or requested from reads wire jumpers PID0 through PID3 on the Display
another device. A green RX LED illuminates as data Interface Board to determine the manufacturer of the
is received from another device. The RS-232 voltages display. Each display manufacturer requires a slightly
are industry standard +5 to +25VDC and -5VDC to different control. The program in the BIOS eprom con-
-25VDC logic levels. The RS-485 voltages are indus- figures the microboard for correct operation for the ac-
try standard 0VDC and +1.5 to +5VDC logic levels. tual display installed.
COM5 logic levels are 0VDC and +5VDC. A diagnos-
tic test can be performed on each serial port to confirm Different display manufacturers require different sup-
proper operation. Refer to SECTION 24 - DIAGNOS- ply and control voltages for their displays and back-
TICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING of this manual. lights. Program Jumpers JP2 through JP5 and JP7 and
JP8 must be configured to provide the required supply
The LED’s and their functions are as follows: and control voltages to the display and backlight con-
• CR2 RX1 – COM1 serial port receive data. trol. Microboard 031-02430-000 Program Jumpers on
page 44 lists the required program jumper configu-
• CR3 TX1 – COM1 serial port transmit data. ration for each display. Also, a label attached to the dis-
play mounting plate lists the required program jumper
configuration for that display. The position of program
• CR13 RX4 – COM4 serial port receive data. jumper JP2 determines whether the supply voltage is
+5VDC or +3.3VDC.
• CR14 RX3 – COM3 serial port receive data. The microboard controls the Display Backlight via
J6. The Display Backlight is the light source for the
JOHNSON CONTROLS 23
FORM 160.80-M1
display. The Backlight Inverter Board provides a high “E” and later boards could be equipped with either a
voltage AC power source for the lamp. It converts low 65548 or 65550 Display Controller. To accommodate
voltage DC via J6-1 (+12VDC or +5VDC, depending the use of either device, BIOS Eprom part number
on position of Program Jumper JP5) to high voltage 031-01796-002 is required on revision “E” and later
AC (500 to 1500VAC). This high voltage AC is ap- Microboards. Also, Program Jumpers JP43 and JP44
plied to the lamp to cause it to illuminate. The Back- (refer to Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jump-
light is turned on and off with the “Backlight Enable” ers on page 28) must be configured according to
signal (J6-5). The position of Program Jumper JP4 de- the actual Display Controller installed on the board.
termines whether this is a +12VDC or +5VDC signal. These jumpers are positioned appropriately at the time
In some displays, the backlight turns on when this sig- the board is manufactured and should not require field
nal transitions from low to high; others turn o when it configuration.
transitions from high to low. The position of Program
Jumper JP3 determines the transition that will occur Remote Setpoints
when the Microboard outputs the Backlight Enable Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid temperature and Cur-
signal. JP3 must be positioned according to the display rent Limit setpoints can be input via the RS-232 E-Link
manufacturer’s requirement. Gateway interface at J2 or directly to the Microboard at
J22 (refer to Figure 18 on page 55). The inputs at J22
Under program control, the microboard controls the
are configured with Program Jumpers JP23 and JP24
backlight brightness via the Lamp Dimmer circuit out-
to accept these inputs in either 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC
put at J6-7. In order to extend the life of the Backlight
0-20Ma or 4-20Ma form. Refer to Microboard 031-
lamp, the brightness is driven to 50% after 10 minutes
02430-000 Program Jumpers for Program Jumper con-
of Keypad inactivity. At this brightness level, the graph-
figurations and SECTION 17 - REMOTE SETPOINTS
ics are still visible. When Keypad activity is detected (a
of this manual for details of the Remote Setpoints.
key is pressed), the lamp is driven back to full (100%)
brightness. Some display manufacturers require a vari- Power Supply
able voltage to vary the brightness; others require a
variable resistance. Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 must The Microboard receives 3 supply voltages
be configured to enable the appropriate technique. The (Microboard J1) from the Power Supply; +12VDC,
Lamp Dimmer is an integrated circuit that is the elec- -12VDC, +5VDC and Ground. The -12VDC and
trical equivalent of a 10K ohm potentiometer with 100 +12VDC are used directly by various circuits. The
positions or steps (refer to Figure 16 on page 50). The +12VDC and +5VDC are input to Voltage Regulators
Lamp Dimmer controls the position of the potentiometer. to derive other regulated voltages. The +5VDC (fused
The lamp Dimmer varies the brightness of the backlight by 5 Amp fuse F1 on rev “E” and later boards) is input
by applying a variable voltage (0-5.0VDC) or a vari- to a +3.3VDC regulator. The output is a 3.3VDC regu-
able resistance (0-10K ohms) to the Backlight Inverter lated voltage. The +12VDC (fused by 5 Amp F2 on
Board. If Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 are installed, rev “E” and later boards) is input to a 5VDC regulator.
the lamp Dimmer output is a variable voltage; if both are The output of this regulator powers only the Analog
removed, the output is a variable resistance. The Lamp circuits. This includes the MUX, A/D converter, CM-2
Dimmer outputs “Brightness Control Wiper” (J6-7) to module, Solid State Starter (Mod “A”) Logic Board,
the Backlight Inverter Board. If configured for variable Transducers and Thermistors. As depicted on Figure 5
voltage output, the voltage between J6-7 and J6-8 can be on page 25, these voltages can be monitored at Test
varied from 0VDC (100% brightness) to 5.0VDC (0% Posts TP1 through TP6.
brightness). If configured for variable resistance, the re-
Service Replacement
sistance between J6-6 and J6-7 varies from 0 ohms (0%
brightness) to 10K ohms (100% brightness). Replacement part number 331-02430-603 is supplied
as service replacement for microboard 031-01730-000.
Refer to SECTION 6 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY, Refer to SECTION 4 - MICROBOARD 031-02430-000
SECTION 7 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD and SEC- of this manual and Renewal Parts – OptiView Control
TION 8 - DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD Center (Form 160.80-RP3) Replacement part 331-
of this manual for details of the display interface. 01730-603 (microboard 031-01730-000) is no longer
Revision “A” through “D” Microboards are equipped available.
with Display Controller (U29) type 65548. Revision
24 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
LD07786
Figure 5 - MICROBOARD 031-01730-000
JOHNSON CONTROLS 25
FORM 160.80-M1
MEMORY CARD SOCKET

ELASTOMERIC
CONNECTOR
MEMORY CARD -
TOP SURFACE
R
AUGAT R
LD04958
PRESS DOWN MEMORY CARD
TO RELEASE CARD RETAINER CLIP
TOP SURFACE
LD04047
MEMORY CARD - BOTTOM SURFACE
WRITE PROTECT SWITCH (OPTIONAL)

(MUST BE IN "ENABLED POSITION")
PAD 60 PAD 31
PAD 30 PAD 1
VCC CINS GND

3V/5V ALIGNMENT
KEY NOTCH
LD04049
MEMORY CARD - SIDE VIEW
WRITE ENABLED
WRITE DISABLED
LD04050
Figure 6 - FLASH MEMORY CARD
26 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
TP4
Y + 12VDC
*
+ 12VDC F2 VOLTAGE
5A + 5VDC (ANALOG)
FROM REG
POWER TP3 Y + 5VDC (DIGITAL)
SUPPLY *
+ 5VDC F1 VOLTAGE TP2 Y
+ 3.3VDC
5A REG
TP1
GND Y
* Rev "E" and later boards only
LD09475
Figure 7 - MICROBOARD (031-01730-000) POWER SUPPLY TEST POINTS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 27
FORM 160.80-M1
MICROBOARD 031-01730-000 PROGRAM JP5 ‑ Display backlight power. Determines the

JUMPERS power supply voltage applied to the Display
Backlight Inverter Board.
JP1 - Watchdog enable/disable. The position of this
Pins 1‑2: +12VDC. SHARP LQ10D367 and
jumper, in conjunction with Program switch
LQ10D421, NEC NL6448AC33‑24 and LG
SW 1 position 12 enables or disables the pro-
Semicon LP104V2-W displays.
gram Watchdog protection.
Pins 2‑3: +5VDC. Not Used
Never disable the watchdog protection. Se‑ JP6 ‑ Display memory type. Jumper must be po-
vere compressor or chiller damage could sitioned according to type of RAM used for
result. The ability to disable the watchdog display memory devices (U25 and U27).
protection is provided for factory testing
IN ‑ EDO: (extended data out) type. Jumper
only!!!
should be IN.
OUT ‑ FPM: (fast page mode) type. Not used
IN ‑ Watchdog protection enabled. at this time.
OUT ‑ Permits Program switch SW1 position 12 to JP7, JP8 ‑ Display brightness control technique.
enable or disable the program Determines whether the display brightness is
controlled by a variable voltage or variable
Watchdog protection as follows: resistance.
Position 12 ON ‑ Watchdog protection enabled IN: Variable voltage (0‑5.0VDC). SHARP
LQ10D367, LQ10D421 and LG Semicon
OFF ‑ Watchdog protection disabled LP104V2-W displays.
JP2 ‑ Display power and logic levels. Determines OUT: Variable resistance. NEC
the power supply voltage applied to the dis-
NL6448AC33‑24 display.
play.
JP9 ‑ JP20 ‑ Not Used
Pins 1‑2: +5VDC SHARP LQ10D367 and
LQ10D421 displays. JP21 ‑ Configurable Analog input (J7‑2 and J7‑14)
type. Configures analog input for 0-10VDC,
Pins 2‑3: +3.3VDC NEC NL6448ACCC33‑24
4‑20mA, thermistor (temperature) or trans-
and LG Semicon LP104V2-W displays.
ducer (pressure) input.
JP3 ‑ Display backlight enable signal level polarity. OUT: Allows a 0‑10VDC input on J7‑2 or a
Jumper must be positioned according to the transducer input on J7‑14.
voltage level required to turn on the Display
Backlight. Pins 1‑2: Allows a 4‑20mA input on J7‑14.
Pins 1‑2: 0VDC SHARP LQ10D421 Display. Pins 2‑3: Allows a thermistor input on J7‑14.
JP22 ‑ Configurable Analog input (J7‑4 and J7‑16)
Pins 2‑3: +12VDC or +5VDC as determined
type. Configures analog input for 0‑10VDC,
by position of JP4. SHARP LQ10D367, NEC
4-20mA, thermistor (temperature) or trans-
NL6448AC33‑24 and LG Semicon LP104V2-
ducer (pressure) input.
W displays.
OUT: Allows a 0‑10VDC input on J7‑4 or a
JP4 ‑ Display backlight enable signal logic levels.
transducer input on J7‑16.
Determines the logic levels of the Backlight
enable signal. Pins 1‑2: Allows a 4‑20mA input on J7‑16.
Pins 1‑2: +12VDC/0VDC SHARP LQ10D421 Pins 2‑3: Allows a thermistor input on J7‑16.
display. JP23 ‑ Remote Current Limit Setpoint (J22) type.
Pins 2‑3: +5VDC/0VDC SHARP LQ10D367, Configures analog input for 0-10VDC,
NEC NL6448AC33‑24 and LG Semicon 2-10VDC, 0-20mA or 4‑20mA.
LP104V2-W displays. OUT: Allows a 0‑10VDC or 2-10VDC input
on J22‑1
Pins 1‑2: Allows a 0-20mA or 4‑20mA input
on J22‑2
Pins 2‑3: Not Used
28 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
JP24 ‑ Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Setpoint JP33 ‑ PC‑104 Port DMA acknowledge assignment.
(J22) type. Configures analog input for Assigns selected PC‑104 DMA acknowledge
0‑10VDC, 2-10VDC, 0-20mA or 4‑20mA. to PDACK1 on the microprocessor. DMA ac-
OUT: Allows a 0‑10VDC or 2-10VDC input knowledge selections are silk screened on the
on J22‑3 Microboard adjacent to the program jumper.
Not used on YS Chiller applications.
Pins 1‑2: Allows a 0-20mA or 4‑20mA input
on J22‑4 JP34 ‑ Refrigerant type. Jumper must be positioned
according to the refrigerant type installed in
Pins 2‑3: Not Used
the chiller.
JP25, JP26 ‑ Not Used
IN: R22 3
JP27 ‑ COM 4 serial communications port. Con-
OUT: R134a
figures COM 4 port to be either RS‑485 for
Multi‑Unit Communications (COM 4A) or JP35 ‑ Water/Brine application. Jumper must be
RS‑232 for GPIC board (COM 4B). positioned according to whether the chiller is
cooling water or a brine solution.
Pins 1‑2: Enables port 4A. Allows an RS‑485
connection to Microboard J11 for Multi-Unit IN: Water. Leaving chilled liquid temperature
Communications. setpoint range 38°F (36°F if Smart Freeze is
enabled) to 70°F.
Pins 2‑3: Enables port 4B. Allows an RS‑232
connection to Microboard J2 for GPIC com- OUT: Brine. Leaving chilled liquid tempera-
munications. ture setpoint range 20°F to 70°F.
JP28 ‑ PC‑104 Port interrupt assignment. Assigns JP36, JP37 ‑ Not Used
selected PC‑104 interrupt request to PIRQ7 on JP38 ‑ BIOS EPROM U45 size. Jumper must be
the microprocessor. Interrupt request selec- positioned according to size of U45. Jumper is
tions are silk screened on the Microboard a 10 Ohm resistor that is soldered to board. It
adjacent to the program jumper. Not used on is not a shunt jumper.
YS chiller applications. IN: 256K
JP29 ‑ PC‑104 Port interrupt assignment. Assigns OUT: 64K or 128K. Should be OUT for YS
selected PC‑104 interrupt request to PIRQ6 on chiller applications.
the microprocessor. Interrupt request selec-
JP39 ‑ Solid State Starter style.
tions are silk screened on the Microboard ad-
jacent to the program jumper. Future modem IN: Mod “A” Starter - Old style with Logic
application. Board mounted in Control Center.
JP30 ‑ PC‑104 Port DMA assignment. Assigns se- OUT: Mod “B” Starter - New style with inte-
lected PC‑104 DMA request to PIRQ0 on the grated Logic/Trigger Board mounted Starter
microprocessor. DMA request selections are cabinet.
silk screened on the Microboard adjacent to JP40, JP41, JP42 ‑ Not Used
the program jumper. Not used on YS Chiller JP43, JP44 - Display Controller (U29) type (rev “E”
applications. and later boards only). Must be positioned
JP31 ‑ PC‑104 Port DMA assignment. Assigns se- according to the Display Controller type in-
lected PC‑104 DMA request to PIRQ1 on the stalled on Microboard. Configured at the time
microprocessor. DMA request selections are the board is manufactured and should not
silk screened on the Microboard adjacent to require field configuration.
the program jumper. Not used on YS Chiller Pins 1-2: Type 65548
applications.
Pins 2-3: Type 65550
JP32 ‑ PC‑104 Port DMA acknowledge assignment.
Assigns selected PC‑104 DMA acknowledge
to PDACK0 on the microprocessor. DMA ac-
knowledge selections are silk screened on the
Microboard adjacent to the program jumper.
Not used on YS Chiller applications.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 29
FORM 160.80-M1
MICROBOARD 031-01730-000 PROGRAM 7- Not Used

SWITCHES 8- Chilled Water Pump operation ‑ Determines
Chilled Water Pump control contacts (I/O
Sw1
Board TB2‑44/45) operation when chiller
1- Not Used shuts down on various CYCLING shutdowns.
2- Not Used ON: Enhanced operation. Contacts open at
3- Not Used completion of System Lockout Delay after
all shutdowns except when it shuts down
4- Diagnostics ‑ Enables or disables software
on LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID - LOW
diagnostics
TEMPERATURE, MULTI-UNIT CYCLING
ON: Enables software diagnostics. Disables - CONTACTS OPEN AND SYSTEM CY-
normal chiller operation CLING - CONTACTS OPEN.
OFF: Disables software diagnostics. Enables OFF: Standard operation. Contacts open at
normal chiller operation. completion of System Lockout Delay after all
5- Auto‑restart ‑ Determines the course of action shutdowns except when chiller shuts down on
required to restart the chiller, if a power failure LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID - LOW TEM-
occurs while the chiller is running. PERATURE. On Low Water temp shutdowns,
ON: Chiller will automatically restart when they remain closed, causing the pump to con-
power is restored. tinue to run while the chiller is shutdown.
OFF: Requires a manual reset after power is 9- Not Used

restored. The chiller will not start until the op- 10 - Not Used
erator moves the keypad START‑RUN‑STOP/ 11 - Not Used
RESET rocker switch to the STOP/RESET
12 - Watchdog Protection ‑Used in conjunction
position. If in LOCAL mode, the chiller can
with Program Jumper JP1 (see above) to en-
then be restarted by initiating a local start. If in
able/disable the program watchdog protection.
REMOTE mode, the chiller will restart upon
With JP1 IN, this switch setting has no effect.
receipt of a remote start signal.
With JP1 OUT, this switch setting determines
6- Anti‑recycle ‑ Enables or disables the anti‑re- whether the watchdog protection is enabled or
cycle timer. disabled.
The anti‑recycle timer must NEVER be NEVER disable the watchdog protection!
disabled unless it is absolutely necessary Severe compressor or chiller damage
to do so during troubleshooting. could result. The ability to disable the
watchdog protection is provided for YORK
Factory testing only.
ON: Enables anti‑recycle timer. Solid State ON: Watchdog protection enabled.
Starter and Electro-Mechanical starter applica-
OFF: Watchdog protection disabled.
tions ‑ Chiller cannot be started at intervals
shorter than once every 30 minutes.
OFF: Disables anti‑recycle timer. Chiller
can be started at the completion of SYSTEM
LOCKOUT DELAY, regardless of how long
the chiller had been running.
30 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
5.0 VDC
J6
JP8
6 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (+) OR (N.C.)
TO
10 K 7 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (WIPER)
BACKLIGHT
INVERTER
BOARD
8 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (-)
JP7 LD04054
NOTES:
1. J6-6 not connected (N.C.) to Backlight Inverter Board when display is manufactured by Sharp or NEC.
2. The position of Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 determine the output at J6-7; In = Variable Voltage; Out = Variable Resistance.
Refer to Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers for applications.
3. Potentiometer is actually an integrated circuit that is the electrical equivalent of a 10K potentiometer.
Figure 8 - MICROBOARD LAMP DIMMER CIRCUIT
JOHNSON CONTROLS 31
FORM 160.80-M1
CR3 CR2
R G
TX1 RX1
RS-232 J2
TX 4
RX 3 PRINTER
MICRO COM 1 DTR 5
DSR 2
COM 4B GTX 7
(NOTE 1) GRX E-LINK GATEWAY
6
8
CR12 CR13 9
R G
TX4 RX4
RS-485
J11
+ 3
3
JP27 COM 4A
-- 2 NOT USED
2 1 (NOTE 1)
+ 5VDC 1
GND
4
SHIELD
CR16 CR11 5
R G
TX2 RX2
RS-232 J13
DCD 1
DSR 2
RX 3
RTS NOT USED
4
COM 2 TX 5
CTS 6
DTR 7
CR15 CR14 GND 9

R G
UART TX3 RX3
RS-485 J12
+ 3
-- 2 OPTIONAL I/O
COM 3 + 5VDC 1
GND 4
SHIELD 5
CR9 CR1
R G
TX5 RX5
OPTO-COUPLE
J15
TX
1
RX MOD "B"
2
COM 5 COMMON
3
SOLID STATE
NOTE 2 STARTER
4
NOTE 2
5
6
LD07788
NOTES:
1. M
icroboard Program Jumper JP27 determines whether COM 4A or 4B can be used. 1 and 2 - 4A, 2 and 3, 4B.
Refer to Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers.
2. J15-4 Loop-Around Test IN. J15-5 Loop-Around Test OUT. Refer to FIGURE 51 for details.
Figure 9 - MICROBOARD SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
32 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
J7
71.5 K
TRANSDUCER 0 10 VDC 2
OR THERMISTOR
NOT USED 2
4 - 20 MA 14 1 47K
1 JP21
+5V 3
13
7.5 K 200 3
TRANSDUCER 0-10 VDC 4

OR THERMISTOR
NOT USED 2
16 1
4 - 20 MA
15 JP22
+5V 3
MUX
J22
REMOTE CURRENT 0-10 VDC / 1
LIMIT SETPOINT 2-10 VDC
2 2 1
0 - 20 MA /
4 - 20 MA
3 JP23
REMOTE LEAVING 0-10 VDC / 3

CHILLED LIQUID 2-10 VDC
TEMP SETPOINT
0 - 20 MA / 4 2 1
4 - 20 MA
3 JP24
REMOTE SETPOINT 5
GND CONNECTIONS
LD04636
NOTE:
1. P
rogram Jumpers JP21 – JP24 must be positioned on pins 1-2 or 3-4 according to input signal type.
Refer to Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers.
Figure 10 - CONFIGURABLE ANALOG AND REMOTE SETPOINT INPUTS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 33
FORM 160.80-M1
34 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
Beginning March 2004, new production YS chillers Boot-up Program

will be supplied with Microboard part number 031- The BIOS (Basic Input Output System) Eprom (U37)
02430-000 (refer to Figure 11 on page 46). Al- contains the boot-up program. It is a replaceable part.
though this board uses a different microprocessor and The YORK part number is 031-02429-001. It is avail-
supporting components, chiller control and operator able from the Baltimore Parts Distribution Center as a
interface are the same as the previous 031-01730-000 replacement part. The version is an alphanumeric code
Microboard. It uses the same mounting hole pattern that identifies the application and the program revi-
and has the same interface connectors as the previous sion level. The part number and version are printed on
board, making it backward compatible to all previous a label adhered to the surface of the Eprom. It is also
YS OptiView Control Centers equipped with the 031- displayed on the DIAGNOSTICS Screen in Service
01730-000 Microboard. Access Level.
The board is supplied with +12VDC (J1-3), -12VDC The version is as follows:
4
(J1-4), +5VDC (J1-1) and ground (J1-2) from the
C. OPT. 00. nn.
Power Supply (refer to Figure 15 on page 49). The
-12VDC is not used. The +5VDC (fused by F1) can be
monitored at TP3. It is applied to a +3.3VDC regula- Revision level. Increments 01, 02 etc.
tor, +2.5VDC regulator and used directly by the mi- BIOS EPROM
croboard circuits as the VCC voltage. The outputs of
OptiView Control Center
these regulators are applied to microboard circuits and
can be monitored at TP2 and TP5 respectively. The Commercial chiller
+12VDC (fused by F2) can be monitored at TP4. It
is applied to a +5VDC regulator and used directly by When power is first applied to the OptiView Control
microboard circuits. The output of the regulator is the Center, a white screen is displayed while the boot-up
+5VDC (analog) supply that powers all analog circuits is performed. During the boot-up, the program in the
and is the source voltage for all transducers and therm- BIOS Eprom configures the microprocessor and relat-
istors. It can be monitored at TP10 as a 2.5VDC value ed components and performs testing of certain compo-
created by 1K Ohm resistors voltage divider circuit as nents to assure those components are operational.
shown. The sequence of events in the boot-up process are list-
ed in the table below. The progress and pass/fail status
Test Points
of each step is displayed on the microboard 7-segment
The power supply voltages can be measured at follow- LED Display (U22 ). Due to the speed at which the
ing test points: (refer to Figure 13 on page 47) boot-up proceeds, not all steps will be visible during
the process. Not all pass/fail status is displayed on the
TP1 Gnd
white screen.
TP2 +3.3VDC
TP3 +5VDC
TP4 +12VDC
TP5 +2.5VDC
TP10 +2.5VDC
JOHNSON CONTROLS 35
FORM 160.80-M1
Table 3 - DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY CODES
PASS DISPLAY ON WHITE

TEST FAIL ACTION
CODE SCREEN
First init table complete 00 watchdog will cause reboot No

SDRAM regs. Configured 01 watchdog will cause reboot No
Switch to Protected Mode 02 watchdog will cause reboot No
Jump to 32-bit code 03 watchdog will cause reboot No
Low memory test start 04 watchdog will cause reboot No
Low memory test complete P1 “F1” on display and halt No
Full memory test complete P2 “F2” on display and halt No
FPGA configuration 05 “P2” will remain on LED display No
Display Cont. configured 06 “05” will remain on LED display No
Flash Checksum Test P3 “F3” will remain on LED display Yes
BRAM test P4 “F4” will remain on LED display Yes
Flash Query Test “passed” “failed” and halt Yes
Flash checksum “passed” “failed”,halt and display code = F3 Yes
BRAM Test “passed” “failed” and halt Yes
MISCELLANEOUS CODES
LED DISPLAY CODE DESCRIPTION
FF FPGA Configuration Failed, trying again
CH Flash Checksum Test in progress
AP Application setup in progress
CRITICAL CODES
LED DISPLAY CODE DESCRIPTION
Ni NMI handler invoked (should never occur)
[] GPF has occurred (should never occur)
Chiller Operating Program Program Card

The Chiller Operating Program is a set of instructions The on-board program can be upgraded by download-
to control the chiller. It contains the Safety and Cycling ing the latest program version from a Program Card.
shutdown thresholds (non-changeable) and display This is a 2 1/8 x 3 3/8 x 1/8 inch plastic card weigh-
screen messages and graphics. ing 1.1oz (refer to Figure 12 on page 47). It is a
portable memory storage device that is programmed
The chiller operating program is stored in a non-remov- with the chiller operating program. The Program Card
able Flash Memory chip (U35) that is soldered to the part number for YS chillers is 031-02488-001 and is
Microboard. New chillers are supplied programmed available from the Baltimore Parts Distribution Center
with the latest program available at the time of manu- (PDC). There is a Program Card for each chiller type
facture. The program version that is currently residing (YT, YK, YS, YR, YD, etc) and each has a unique part
in the Microboard Flash Memory chip is displayed on number. A label affixed to the Program Card contains
the DIAGNOSTICS Screen in Service Access Level. the part number and version. The version is an alpha-
The on-board program can be upgraded by download- numeric code that identifies the chiller model applica-
ing the latest version from a Program Card using the bility, language package, language package revision
procedure in the Program Card Service Replacement level and chiller operating program revision level.
on Page 42 of this manual.
36 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
The Program Card is applicable to both NEMA and Program Download Connector U33
CE applications. The Program Card for YS chillers has A Program Card is inserted into connector U33 to
English, Simplified and Traditional Chinese, French, download a program. A protective cover prevents dirt
Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, German and Hungarian from entering this connector. IMPORTANT! The pro-
languages. tective cover must be in place at all times when not
The program version that is currently residing in the performing a program download. If dirt accumulates
Microboard Flash memory chip is displayed on the DI- inside this connector, re-programming will not be suc-
AGNOSTICS Screen in Service Access Level. cessful.
The Program Card obtained from the PDC is pro- Parallel Port Connector
grammed with the latest version of the chiller operating Parallel port connector J4 is for future use. It is pres-
program. Program Cards can be reprogrammed. ently not supported.
A Program Card for a particular chiller type can be
BRAM (U38)
used to re-program other chillers of the same type. For 4
example, it is not necessary to have more than one YS The BRAM (battery backed random access memo-
Program Card. A single YS card can be carried to dif- ry) memory device contains a battery that preserves
ferent locations to re-program other YS OptiView Con- the stored data during power failures. All of the pro-
trol Centers. grammed Setpoints, Sales Order Data, History Data,
time of day and calendar data is stored here. It is a re-
A Write Protect Switch on the edge of the Program placeable part. The YORK Part number is 031-02431-
Card prevents inadvertent writing to the Card during 000 and is printed on a label adhered to the surface
program downloading. of the BRAM. It is available from the Baltimore Parts
Handling precautions for the Program Card include: Distribution Center as a replacement part.
• Do not allow dirt to enter connector Watchdog Circuit
• Carry in protective sleeve The Watchdog circuit performs two functions as fol-
lows:
• Storage temperature range is -20 to 65ºC (-4 to
149ºF) • Power failure detection
A label adhered to the Program Card contains the ver- • Program latch-up detection/prevention
sion and YORK part number. The version is an alpha- The Watchdog circuit monitors the +5VDC from the
numeric code that identifies the chiller model applica- power supply and the +3.3VDC from the onboard reg-
bility, language package, language revision level and ulator to determine when a power failure is occurring.
chiller control revision level. The version is as follows: If the +5VDC decreases to the threshold of (+4.75VDC
C.OPT.nn.nn.nnn to 4.5VDC) or the +3.3VDC decreases to the thresh-
old of (3.04 to 2.8VDC), a reset is issued to the mi-
Language Package revision level
(00,01,etc)
croprocessor and the chiller shuts down. When power
is restored, the white screen is displayed and the boot-
Language Package (0=English
only,1=NEMA,2=CE,3=NEMA/ up is performed as described above. When the graphic
CE) screen is displayed, the message CONTROL PANEL
Controls Revision Level (00, 01, – POWER FAILURE is displayed.
02, etc)
The Watchdog Circuit also assures that the entire pro-
Chiller Model (01=YK, 02=YT,
03=YS, 05=YR, 11=YD)
gram is being executed and that the program has not
latched-up, bypassing important safety checks. The
OptiView Control Center
Watchdog circuit is a timer that times-out if not given
Commercial Chiller
a reset pulse within its time-out period (1 - 2.25 sec-
onds). To prevent a time-out, the microprocessor sends
The Program card is inserted into connector U33 to a reset pulse to the Watchdog circuit every time the
download a program. Refer to instructions under Ser- complete program has been executed. Since it takes
vice Replacement below. less than 1 second to perform the entire program, the
JOHNSON CONTROLS 37
FORM 160.80-M1
Watchdog circuit doesn’t time-out under normal opera- ating continuity between the row conductor and the
tion. However, if the entire program is not executed or column conductor. The keypad is read by applying a
something prevents the microprocessor from sending logic low to a row while leaving +5VDC pullup on all
the reset pulse as described below, the Watchdog cir- other rows. The micro then reads the 8 columns. If any
cuit times-out and sends a reset to the microprocessor, column has a logic low on it, the key corresponding
initiating a re-boot. If running, the chiller shuts down. to that coordinate (row, column) is being pressed. The
The display momentarily blanks and white screen is micro reads the entire keypad by repeating this routine
displayed while the boot-up program executes as de- beginning with row 1 and ending with row 4. The en-
scribed above. When the graphic screen is displayed, tire keypad is continually read while the control cen-
either of two messages is displayed depending on the ter is powered. Refer to SECTION 9 - KEYPAD of this
type of Watchdog shutdown as explained below. manual for details of the Keypad.
There are two different watchdog initiated shutdowns; CM-2 Board or Style "A" Solid State Starter
a “hardware” watchdog initiated shutdown and a “soft- Interface
ware” watchdog initiated shutdown.
The microboard retrieves certain operating param-
In the “hardware” watchdog initiated shutdown, a pro- eters (via J10) from the compressor motor starter con-
gram problem, on-board noise or hardware problem trol board (CM-2 Current Board for Electromechanical
could prevent the watchdog time-out. If this occurs, a re- starter or Style “A” Solid State Starter Logic Board).
boot is initiated and when the graphic screen is displayed, Refer to the appropriate section of this manual for de-
CONTROL PANEL – POWER FAILURE is displayed. tailed explanation of each board. Both boards contain an
8 channel multiplexer. The micro sequentially and con-
In the “software” watchdog initiated shutdown, the tinually reads channels 0 through 7. It reads each channel
program intentionally initiates the reboot because it by applying a 3-bit binary address to the multiplexer. A
has detected program interruption. After the re-boot, 0-5VDC analog value is returned from each channel. The
WATCHDOG – SOFTWARE REBOOT is displayed function of each is in the table below. The micro deter-
on the graphic screen. mines which board, and therefore which starter is pres-
ent, by the value returned from channel 0. Since chan-
Program Jumpers/Program Switches
nels 0 through 6 are grounded, the CM-2 board returns a
The Program Jumpers and Program Switches are 0VDC value. The Solid State Starter Logic Board returns
used to alter the program operation or configure the a value >0.41VDC to +5VDC. If the value is <0.4VDC,
Microboard hardware for specific operation. This al- it indicates the starter is an Electro-mechanical (EM)
lows the Program and Microboard to be universal starter and the micro then reads channel 7 to retrieve the
for all standard applications. Refer to Microboard peak motor current value. A value >0.4VDC indicates
031-02430-000 Program Jumpers on page 44 and the starter is an “A” style Solid State Starter and the mi-
Microboard 031-02430-000 Program Switches on cro reads channels 1 through 7. In the Solid State Starter,
page 45 for the function of each jumper and switch. channel 0 indicates the starter size (model) and voltme-
The position of some jumpers can be determined by ter range (300VAC or 600VAC). Channel 1 is a hard-
the Service Technician to meet the desired operation. ware generated 100% FLA (prevents Pre-rotation Vanes
Others must be positioned according to the require- from further opening) or 104% FLA (closes Pre-rotation
ments of the size, type or style of components and thus Vanes until motor current is <102%) current limit over-
are determined by the YORK Factory. The jumpers are ride command that overrides normal Pro-rotation Vanes
plastic sleeves with metal inserts that are inserted over control. Channels 2 through 4 are analog voltages that
2-prong or 3-prong conductors. The Program Switches represent phase A, B and C motor current. The highest
are miniature switches that are placed in either the ON phase is Channels 5 through 7 are analog voltages that
or OFF position. represent phase A, B and C Line Voltage. The data for
each channel is shown on the following table:
Keypad Interface
The Keypad is read via J18. The Keypad is a matrix Style B Solid State Starter
of conductors arranged in rows and columns (refer to If equipped with either of these drives, the drive is in-
Figure 32 on page 77 and Figure 33 on page 78). terfaced to the Microboard via the Opto-Coupled COM
There are 4 rows and 8 columns. When a key is pressed, 5 serial data port (J15). The serial data is represented
the conductors are pressed together at that point, cre- by +5VDC and 0VDC logic levels. J15-1 is TX data to
38 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
Table 4 - MULTIPLEXER CHANNELS

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Peak
CM-2 Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Motor Current
(%FLA)
STYLE A
Starter model/ Current Phase C Phase B Phase A Phase A Phase B
Solid Phase C
voltmeter limit motor motor motor line line
State line voltage
range command current current current voltage voltage
Starter
the drive and J15-2 is RX data from the drive. Refer to Digital Outputs
SECTION 12 - SOLID STATE STARTERS for details of
4
The microboard controls 115VAC relays and solenoids
this interface. via the I/O Board (via J19). The I/O Board contains
+12VDC relays that isolate the microboard low volt-
Printer Interface
age circuits from the 115VAC device coils. Solid state
An optional Printer can be connected to COM1 RS-232 switching devices are used to control the relays. The
serial data port (J2). J2-4 is TX data to the printer. J2-2 is microboard energizes the +12VDC relays by applying
the DSR (Data Set Ready or busy) signal from the print- a ground to the coil input. They are de-energized by
er. Signal levels are standard RS-232. The microboard opening the ground path. The contacts of these relays
sends data to the printer at the selected baud rate until switch 115VAC to system relays and solenoids. The
the printer buffer becomes full, whereupon the printer outputs that control the chilled liquid pump and com-
asserts its Busy signal. The microboard suspends data pressor motor starter have anti-chatter (anti-recycle)
transmission until the printer can accept more data. Each timers associated with them. The output that controls
printer must be setup/configured to operate properly with relay K0 is not allowed to change at a rate greater than
the microboard. The Baud, Data Bits, Parity and Stop once every 10 seconds. The output that controls relay
Bits must be programmed on the Comms Screen. Other K13 is not allowed to change at a rate greater than once
printer setup is performed on the PRINTER Screen. Re- every 20 seconds.
fer to YS Mod E – Operation and Maintenance (Form
160.80-O1) for details of available printers and printer The microboard controls Actuator motors via Triacs on
setup instructions. the I/O Board. Each actuator has an open winding and
a close winding. Current flowing through a winding
E-Link Gateway Interface causes the actuator to rotate in the respective direc-
An optional E-Link Gateway printed circuit board can tion. Each winding is controlled by a Triac. The Triac
be connected to the COM 4B RS-232 serial data port is turned on to allow current to flow through a winding.
(J2). J2-7 is TX data to the E-Link Gateway. J2-6 is RX The microboard turns on the Triac by applying a logic
data from the E-Link Gateway. Signal levels are stan- low (<1VDC) to the Triac driver on the I/O Board. It
dard RS-232. The E-Link Gateway polls system pres- turns it off by applying a logic high (>4VDC). Refer to
sures, temperatures and status from the microboard. It SECTION 5 - I/O BOARD of this manual for details of
holds it for retrieval by third-party devices. Refer to the I/O Board.
SECTION 14 - E-LINK GATEWAY of this manual.
Analog Inputs
Digital Inputs System pressures, in the form of analog DC voltages,
The I/O Board converts the 115VAC inputs to logic are input from Pressure Transducers. Refer to SEC-
level inputs for the microboard at J19. A 115VAC input TION 15 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS of this man-
to the I/O board is converted to a logic low (<1VDC). ual. Formulas and graphs are included to calculate the
A 0VAC input to the I/O Board is converted to a logic expected transducer output voltage for a given pressure
high (>4VDC). Refer to SECTION 5 - I/O BOARD of input.
this manual for details of the I/O Board.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 39
FORM 160.80-M1
System temperatures, in the form of analog DC volt- • CR19 RX5 – COM5 serial port receive data.
ages, are input from Thermistors. Refer to SECTION • CR20 TX5 – COM5 serial port transmit data.
16 - TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS of this manual.
Included are tables to convert the expected output volt- Display Interface
age for any temperature applied to the thermistor. The graphic screens displayed on the liquid Crystal Dis-
play are created from the program downloaded from the
Serial Data Ports
Program Card and stored in the flash memory chip. The
The Microboard is equipped with 5 serial data ports data to form these screens is output from J5. This data
(refer to Figure 15 on page 49). Each port is dedi- is in the form of red, green and blue drive signals ap-
cated for a specific function as follows: plied to each of the 303,200 the display pixels arranged
in a matrix of 640 columns x 480 rows. Each pixel con-
A. COM1 (J2) – RS-232. Printer
sists of 3 windows; red, green and blue, through which
B. COM2 (J13) – RS-232. Not used a variable amount of light from the Display Backlight,
C. COM3 (J12) – RS-485. Optional I/O. is permitted to pass to the front of the display. The drive
signals determine the amount of light permitted to pass
D. COM4 (4A-J11), (4B-J2) – This port is actually through each window. The overall pixel color is a result
two ports. However, they cannot be used simul- of the gradient of red, green and blue light allowed to
taneously. The position of program jumper JP27 pass. The drive signal for each pixel is an 18 bit binary
determines which port can be used. (refer to word; 6 for each of the 3 colors. The greater the binary
Microboard 031-02430-000 Program Jumpers on value, the more light is permitted to pass. The pixels are
page 44). COM4A – RS485 Not used. COM4B driven sequentially from left to right, beginning with the
– RS-232 E-Link Gateway. top row. To coordinate the drive signals and assure the
E. COM5 (J15) – Opto-coupled transmit/receive. pixels in each row are driven from left to right and the
Style B Solid State Starter. columns are driven from top to bottom, the drive signals
are accompanied by a clock and horizontal and vertical
Each port is equipped with two LED’s. A red TX LED
sync signals.
illuminates as data is transmitted to or requested from
another device. A green RX LED illuminates as data During the boot-up, the program in the BIOS eprom
is received from another device. The RS-232 voltages reads wire jumpers PID0 through PID3 on the Display
are industry standard +5 to +25VDC and -5VDC to Interface Board to determine the manufacturer of the
-25VDC logic levels. The RS-485 voltages are indus- display. Each display manufacturer requires a slightly
try standard 0VDC and +1.5 to +5VDC logic levels. different control. The program in the BIOS eprom con-
COM5 logic levels are 0VDC and +5VDC. A diagnos- figures the microboard for correct operation for the ac-
tic test can be performed on each serial port to confirm tual display installed.
proper operation. Refer to SECTION 24 - DIAGNOS-
TICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING of this manual. Different display manufacturers require different sup-
ply and control voltages for their displays and back-
The LED’s and their functions are as follows: lights. Program Jumpers JP2 through JP5 and JP7 and
JP8 must be configured to provide the required supply
• CR2 RX6 – Not used. Future COM6 serial port
and control voltages to the display and backlight con-
receive data.
trol. Microboard 031-02430-000 Program Jumpers on
• CR3 TX6 – Not used. Future COM6 serial port page 44 lists the required program jumper configu-
transmit data. ration for each display. Also, a label attached to the dis-
• CR4 RX1 – COM1 serial port receive data. play mounting plate lists the required program jumper
• CR5 TX1 – COM1 serial port transmit data. configuration for that display. The position of program
jumper JP2 determines whether the supply voltage is
+5VDC or +3.3VDC.
• CR14 RX4 – COM4 serial port receive data.
• CR15 TX3 – COM3 serial port transmit data. The microboard controls the Display Backlight via
J6. The Display Backlight is the light source for the
• CR16 RX3 – COM3 serial port receive data.
display. The Backlight Inverter Board provides a high
• CR17 RX2 – COM2 serial port receive data. voltage AC power source for the lamp. It converts low
• CR18 TX2 – COM2 serial port transmit data. voltage DC via J6-1 (+12VDC or +5VDC, depending
40 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
on position of Program Jumper JP5) to high voltage Gateway interface at J2 or directly to the Microboard at
AC (500 to 1500VAC). This high voltage AC is ap- J22 (refer to Figure 16 on page 50). The inputs at J22
plied to the lamp to cause it to illuminate. The Back- are configured with Program Jumpers JP23 and JP24
light is turned on and off with the “Backlight Enable” to accept these inputs in either 0-10VDC, 2-10VDC
signal (J6-5). The position of Program Jumper JP4 de- 0-20Ma or 4-20Ma form. Refer to Microboard 031-
termines whether this is a +12VDC or +5VDC signal. 02430-000 Program Jumpers on page 44 for Pro-
In some displays, the backlight turns on when this sig- gram Jumper configurations and SECTION 17 - RE-
nal transitions from low to high; others turn o when it MOTE SETPOINTS of this manual for details of the
transitions from high to low. The position of Program Remote Setpoints.
Jumper JP3 determines the transition that will occur
when the Microboard outputs the Backlight Enable Configuration/Setup
signal. JP3 must be positioned according to the display The following functions are entered as setpoints on the
manufacturer’s requirement. SETUP Screen. Refer to entry instructions in of this
manual.
Under program control, the microboard controls the
backlight brightness via the Lamp Dimmer circuit 4
• Chilled Liquid Pump Operation – Determines
output at J6-7. In order to extend the life of the Back- Chilled Liquid Pump control contacts (I/O Board
light lamp, the brightness is driven to 50% after 10 TB2-44/45) operation when chiller shuts down on
minutes of Keypad inactivity. At this brightness level, cycling shutdowns. Selections are:
the graphics are still visible. When Keypad activity is
detected (a key is pressed), the lamp is driven back to 1. Standard – Contacts open at completion of
full (100%) brightness. Some display manufacturers “System Lockout Delay” after all shutdowns
require a variable voltage to vary the brightness; others except LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID –
require a variable resistance. Program Jumpers JP7 and LOW TEMPERATURE. On this shutdown,
JP8 must be configured to enable the appropriate tech- they remain closed, causing the pump to con-
nique. The Lamp Dimmer is an integrated circuit that tinue to run while the chiller is shutdown.
is the electrical equivalent of a 10K ohm potentiometer 2. Enhanced – Contacts open at completion of
with 100 positions or steps (refer to Figure 14 on page “System Lockout Delay” after all shutdowns
48 ). The Lamp Dimmer controls the position of the except LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID –
potentiometer. The lamp Dimmer varies the brightness LOW TEMPERATURE, MULTI-UNIT CY-
of the backlight by applying a variable voltage (0- CLING- CONTACTS OPEN and SYSTEM
5.0VDC) or a variable resistance (0-10K ohms) to the CYCLING – CONTACTS OPEN. On these
Backlight Inverter Board. If Program Jumpers JP7 and shutdowns, they remain closed, causing the
JP8 are installed, the lamp Dimmer output is a variable pumps to continue to run while the chiller is
voltage; if both are removed, the output is a variable shutdown.
resistance. The Lamp Dimmer outputs “Brightness
Control Wiper” (J6-7) to the Backlight Inverter Board. • Motor Drive Type – Configures the program for
If configured for variable voltage output, the voltage the applicable compressor motor drive type. Se-
between J6-7 and J6-8 can be varied from 0Vdc (100% lections are:
brightness) to 5.0VDC (0% brightness). If configured 1. 1EM – Electromechanical Starter
for variable resistance, the resistance between J6-6 and
J6-7 varies from 0 ohms (0% brightness) to 10K ohms 2. SSS-Mod A – Style A Solid State Starter
(100% brightness). 3. SSS-Mod B – Style B Solid State Starter
Refer to SECTION 6 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY, • Anti-recycle – Enables or Disables the Anti-re-
SECTION 7 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD and cycle timer. CAUTION! The Anti-recycle timer
SECTION 8 - DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER must never be disabled unless advised by YORK
BOARD of this manual for details of the display inter- Factory. Selections are:
face.
1. Enabled – Enables the anti-recycle timer.
Remote Setpoints Solid state Starters and electromechanical
starter applications cannot be started at inter-
Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid temperature and Cur-
vals shorter than once every 30 minutes.
rent Limit setpoints can be input via the RS-232 E-Link
JOHNSON CONTROLS 41
FORM 160.80-M1
2. Disabled – Disables the anti-recycle timer.

Microboard BRAM BIOS Eprom
Chiller can be started at the completion of
“System Lockout Delay”, regardless of how 031-02430-000 031-02431-000 031-02429-001
long the chiller had been running. 031-01730-000 031-02028-000 031-01796-002
• Power Failure Restart – Determines the course
of action required to restart the chiller, if a power Program Card Service Replacement
failure occurs while the chiller is running. Selec- Since one YS Program Card can be used to re-program
tions are: other YS chillers, it is not necessary for an individual
Service Technician to have more than one YS Program
1. Manual – Requires a manual reset after pow-
Card. Program Cards can be shared among Service
er is restored. The chiller cannot be started
Technicians where appropriate.
until the operator moves the keypad Start-
Run-Stop/Reset rocker switch to the stop/ However, since chiller operating programs are occa-
reset position. sionally revised, the Service Technician could have a
2. Auto – Chiller will automatically restart Program Card that does not contain the latest program.
when power is restored. Program Cards (031-02488-001) for YS chillers are
available from the Baltimore Parts Distribution Center
Microboard Service Replacement (PDC). The card received from the PDC is programmed
If the microboard is replaced within the warranty pe- with the latest version of the chiller operating program.
riod, the defective board must be returned to YORK Program Cards can be re-programmed with the latest
per the warranty return procedure. Use the return in- program version.
structions and return address label provided with the
replacement board. DOWNLOADING A PROGRAM FROM A
PROGRAM CARD
To order a replacement Microboard for a YS Chiller,
order part number 331-02430-603. This part number The Program Card Write Protect Switch
provides an 031-02430-000 Microboard that has been must be in the “Write Protect” position!
programmed with the latest version of the YS “Con-
trols” software. It comes equipped with a BRAM (U38)
and BIOS Eprom (U37). (Replacement Microboards
cannot be ordered by the basic board part number of
031-02430-000) There are 3 steps to the re-programming
process: Erase, Program and Verification.
The Microboard is shipped with a label on the outside Once the re-programming process is initi‑
of the shipping box that lists the part number of the pre- ated, it automatically proceeds through
programmed Microboard (331-02430-603), the basic these steps to completion. It cannot be
Microboard part number (031-02430-000) and the ver- manually terminated before completion.
sion of the pre-programmed “Controls” software (for Therefore, once the process is initiated,
example, C.OPT.03.04.301 or later). the existing on-board program will be
erased and replaced by the program in
If replacing a 2430 microboard with a 2430 microboard, the Program Card. Before proceeding,
the BRAM can be transferred from the defective board be absolutely certain the Program Card
to the replacement board to avoid re-programming the is applicable to your chiller model. For
Sales Order Data. example, if your chiller is a YS chiller, the
BIOS Eproms and BRAMS cannot be Program Card used MUST be for a YS
interchanged between the 031-01730-000 chiller. If a YK chiller program is down‑
and 031-02430-000 microboards. The loaded into a YS chiller, for example, the
boards will not function with an incorrect chiller will be rendered inoperable until
component. Refer to the following table this procedure is repeated using the cor‑
for applicability: rect Program Card!
42 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
A label affixed to the Program Card contains the card 8. Press  key. The following steps will be per-
version. The version is an alpha-numeric code that formed:
identifies the chiller model applicability, language
A. E
rasing. During this procedure, the program
package and program revision level. The version is as
in the Microboard Flash Memory will be
follows:
erased. A green bar reflects the progress of
C.OPT.nn.nn.nnn this procedure. The red LED next to this bar
Language Package revision level illuminates while this procedure is in prog-
(00,01,etc) ress.
Language Package (0=English
B. P
rogramming. During this procedure, the
only,1=NEMA,2=CE,3=NEMA/
CE) program in the Program Card is downloaded
Controls Revision Level (00, 01,
into the Microboard Flash memory. A green
02, etc) bar reflects the progress of this procedure.
Chiller Model (01=YK, 02=YT, The red LED next to this bar illuminates
03=YS, 05=YR, 11=YD) while this procedure is in progress. 4
OptiView Control Center C. V
erifying. During this procedure, a check-
Commercial Chiller sum test is performed on the new program in
the Microboard Flash Memory. A green bar
Download the program as follows: reflects the progress of this procedure. The
red LED next to this bar illuminates while
1. Remove power to OptiView Control Center. this procedure is in progress.
2. R
emove protective cover from Microboard con- The Microboard 7-segment LED Display (U22)
nector U33. displays the steps of the programming process
3. R
eposition Microboard Program Jumper JP6 to while they are in effect. During the Erasing proce-
pins 2 and 3 (left-hand pins). dure, “ER” is displayed. During the Programming
procedure, “PR” is displayed. During the Verify-
4. Insert Program Card into Microboard connector ing procedure, “CH” is displayed.
U33.
At the completion of the re-programming process,
5. R
estore power to OptiView Control Center. A if it is successful, FLASH HAS BEEN SUC-
white screen appears displaying “Flash Check- CESSFULLY PROGRAMMED is displayed and
sum Test:” and Microboard 7-segment LED “Operation Successful” is displayed in the Status
(U22) displays “Ch”. While this is displayed, the Code box. Otherwise, a message in the status box
Microboard is performing a checksum test on the indicates the step that failed.
Program Card. This assures the integrity of the
card before the download procedure can begin. 9. Remove power from OptiView control center.
If the checksum test fails, the card is defective or 10. R
emove Program Card from Microboard connec-
corrupted and the download procedure cannot be tor U33.
performed. If the checksum test passes, the “Op-
tiView Flash Programmer” Screen is displayed. 11. I nstall protective cover on Microboard connector
U33.
6. P
ress START key to start the downloading pro-
cess. A dialog box appears asking if you want to 12. R
eposition Microboard Program Jumper JP6 to
“Erase Onboard Flash and Re-Program from Pc- pins 1 and 2 (right-hand pins) pins.
Card?”. Do not proceed until you understand 13. A
pply power to Optiview Control Center. The re-
the above caution! programming procedure is now complete.
7. Use the ► key to scroll to YES.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 43
FORM 160.80-M1
MICROBOARD 031-02430-000 PROGRAM JP7, JP8 – Display brightness control technique.

JUMPERS Determines whether the display brightness is
controlled by a variable resistance or a vari-
JP1 – Not used.
able voltage.
JP2 – Display power and logic levels determines the
IN: Variable voltage (0-5.0VDC). SHARP
power supply voltage applied to the display.
LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000) and SHARP
Pins 1-2: +5VDC SHARP LQ10D367/368 LQ104V1DG61 (031-02886-000), and LG
(031-01774-000) displays. Semicon LP104V2-W (031-02046-000) dis-
Pins 2-3: +3.3VDC SHARP LQ104V1DG61 plays.
(031-02886-000) and LG Semicon LP104V2- OUT: Variable resistance. Not used.
W (031-02046-000) displays.
JP9 – Not Used.
JP3 – Display backlight enable signal level polarity.
JP10 – Not used.
Jumper must be positioned according to the
voltage level required to turn on the Display JP11 – Not used.
Backlight. JP12 – Not used.
Pins 1-2: 0VDC Not used. JP13 – W
atchdog Enable/Disable. Soldered wire
Pins 2-3: +12VDC or +5VDC as determined jumper.
by position of JP4. SHARP LQ10D367/368
Never disable the watchdog protection. Se‑
(031-01774-000), SHARP LQ104V1DG61
vere compressor or chiller damage could
(031-02886-000) and LG Semicon LP104V2-
result. The ability to disable the watchdog
W (031-02046-000) displays.
protection is provided for factory testing
JP4 – Display Backlight enable signal logic levels. only!!!
Determines the logic levels of the Backlight
Enable signal.
In – Watchdog enabled
Pins 1-2: +12VDC/0VDC Not used.
Out – Watchdog disabled
Pins 2-3: +5VDC/0VDC SHARP
LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000), SHARP JP14 – B
RAM size. Soldered wire jumper. Cannot
LQ104V1DG61 (031-02886-000) and LG be re-positioned by field personnel. Factory
Semicon LP104V2-W (031-02046-000) dis- positioned according to size of the on-board
plays. BRAM (U38).
JP5 – Display Backlight power. Determines the In – 32K x 8. Installed for present production.
power supply voltage applied to the Display Out – 128K x 8
Backlight Inverter Board. JP16 – COM 2 Serial Port modem selection. Config-
Pins 1-2: +12VDC. SHARP LQ10D367/368 ures port to accept either an external modem
(031-01774-000) and SHARP LQ104V1DG61 connected to J13 or an onboard modem
(031-02886-000) and LG Semicon LP104V2- mounted in socket SK1. If either modem is
W (031-02046-000) displays. used, JP17 must be configured for modem
Pins 2-3: +5VDC. Not used. interface. This function is for future use. It is
presently not supported.
JP6 – Boot-up source. Determines whether the boot-
up is performed from the Program Card or In – Use external modem
Eprom U37. Out – Use on-board modem
Pins 1-2: Boots-up from Eprom U37. Must be JP17 – COM 2 Serial Port configuration. Configures
in this position unless re-programming from port for either RS-232 modem interface or
the Program Card. RS-485 interface. This port is for future use. It
Pins 2-3: Boots-up from the Program Card. is presently not supported.
Must be in this position when re-programming Pins 1-2 – RS-485
from the Program Card. Pins 2-3 – RS-232 (modem)
44 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
JP21 – Not Used MICROBOARD 031-02430-000 PROGRAM

JP22 – Not Used SWITCHES
JP23 – Remote Current Limit Setpoint (J22) type. SW1-1 – Refrigerant Selection. Must be set according
Configures analog input for 0-10VDC, to the refrigerant type installed in chiller.
2-10Vdc, 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
ON – R134a
OUT: Allows 0-10VDC or 2-10VDC input on J22-1
OFF – R22
Pins 1-2: Allows a 0-20mA or 4-20mA input
SW1-2 – Liquid Type. Must be set according to
on J22-2
whether the chiller is cooling water or brine
Pins 3-4: Not used. solution.
JP24 – Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature ON – Brine. Leaving Chilled Setpoint range is
Setpoint (J22) type. Configures analog input 20ºF to 70ºF.
for 0-10VDC, 2-10Vdc, 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
OFF – Water. Leaving Chilled Setpoint range
OUT: Allows 0-10VDC or 2-10VDC input on J22-1 38ºF (36ºF if Smart Freeze enabled) to 70ºF. 4
Pins 1-2: Allows a 0-20mA or 4-20mA input SW1-3 – Diagnostics. Enables or Disables the soft-
on J22-2 ware diagnostics. Refer to SECTION 24
Pins 3-4: Not used. - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOT-
JP27 – COM 4 serial communications port. Con- ING of this manual.
figures COM 4 port for either RS-485 (COM ON – Enables diagnostics. Disables normal
4A) or RS-232 for E-Link Gateway board chiller operation.
(COM4B). OFF – Disables diagnostics. Enables normal
Pins 1-2: Enables port 4A. Allows an RS-485 chiller operation.
connection to microboard J11. Not used. SW1-4 – Not used.
Pins 2-3: Enables port 4B. Allows an RS-232
connection to microboard J2 for E-Link Gate-
way communications.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 45
FORM 160.80-M1
BRAM
BIOS
PROGRAM EPROM
SWITCHES
PROGRAM
DOWNLOAD
CONNECTOR
BOOT-UP
LED STATUS
DISPLAY
LD09254
Figure 11 - MICROBOARD 031-02430-000
46 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SWITCH IN "WRITE" POSITION

END OF CARD
031-02488-001
SWITCH IN "WRITE PROTECT" POSITION
Figure 12 - PROGRAM CARD 031-02488-001
J1-8
Not Used
- 12 VDC
J1-4
+ 12 VDC
TP10
TP4 2.5 VDC
J1-3
+ 12 VDC F2 5 VDC + 5 VDC (Analog)(For Transducer
5A VOLTAGE and Thermistors)
REG
+ 5 VDC (VCC)
TP5
2.5 VDC
VOLTAGE 2.5 VDC
REG
TP3
TP2
J1-1
+ 5 VDC F1 3.3 VDC 3.3 VDC
5A VOLTAGE
REG TP1
GND
J1-2
LD09255
Figure 13 - MICROBOARD (031-02430-000) DC POWER SUPPLY TEST POINTS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 47
FORM 160.80-M1
5.0 VDC
J6
JP8
6 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (+) OR (N.C.)
TO
10 K 7 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (WIPER)
BACKLIGHT
INVERTER
BOARD
8 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (-)
JP7
LD04054
NOTES:
1. J6-6 not connected (N.C.) to Backlight Inverter Board when display is manufactured by Sharp or NEC.
2. T
he position of Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 determine the output at J6-7; In = Variable Voltage; Out = Variable Resistance. Refer to
Program Jumper Listing for applications.
3. Potentiometer is actually an integrated circuit that is the electrical equivalent of a 10K potentiometer.
Figure 14 - MICROBOARD LAMP DIMMER CIRCUIT
48 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
CR3 CR2
R G
TX1 RX1
RS-232 J2
TX 4
RX 3 PRINTER
MICRO COM 1 DTR 5
DSR 2
COM 4B GTX 7
(NOTE 1) GRX E-LINK GATEWAY
6
8
CR12 CR13 9
R G
TX4 RX4
RS-485
J11
+ 3
3
JP27 COM 4A
-- 2 NOT USED
2 1 (NOTE 1)
+ 5VDC 1 4
GND
4
SHIELD
CR16 CR11 5
R G
TX2 RX2
RS-232 J13
DCD 1
DSR 2
RX 3
RTS NOT USED
4
COM 2 TX 5
CTS 6
DTR 7
CR15 CR14 GND 9

R G
UART TX3 RX3
RS-485 J12
+ 3
-- 2 OPTIONAL I/O
COM 3 + 5VDC 1
GND 4
SHIELD 5
CR9 CR1
R G
TX5 RX5
OPTO-COUPLE
J15
TX
1
RX MOD "B"
2
COM 5 COMMON
3
SOLID STATE
NOTE 2 STARTER
4
NOTE 2
5
6
LD07788
NOTES:
1. Microboard Program Jumper JP27 determines whether COM 4A or 4B can be used. 1 and 2 - 4A, 2 and 3, 4B.
2. J15-4 Loop-Around Test IN. J15-5 Loop-Around Test OUT. Refer to Figure 55 for details.
Figure 15 - MICROBOARD SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 49
FORM 160.80-M1
J7
71.5 K
TRANSDUCER 0 10 VDC 2
OR THERMISTOR
NOT USED 14 2
4 - 20 MA 1 47K
1 JP21
+5V 3
13
7.5 K 200
TRANSDUCER 0-10 VDC 4

OR THERMISTOR
NOT USED 2
16 1
4 - 20 MA
15 JP22
+5V 3
MUX
J22
REMOTE CURRENT 0-10 VDC / 1
LIMIT SETPOINT 2-10 VDC
2 2 1
0 - 20 MA /
4 - 20 MA
3 JP23
REMOTE LEAVING 0-10 VDC / 3

CHILLED LIQUID 2-10 VDC
TEMP SETPOINT
0 - 20 MA / 4 2 1
4 - 20 MA
3 JP24
REMOTE SETPOINT 5
GND CONNECTIONS
LD04636
NOTE:
1.Program Jumpers JP21 – JP24 must be positioned on pins 1-2 or 3-4 according to input signal type.
Figure 16 - CONFIGURABLE ANALOG AND REMOTE SETPOINT INPUTS
50 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 5 - I/O BOARD
The I/O (input/output) Board conditions the Digi- tor J19. The Microboard energizes each relay by driv-
tal Inputs for the Microboard and conditions the Mi- ing the appropriate input at J19 to logic low voltage
croboard’s Digital Outputs for application to other level (ground potential). The DC voltage at the appro-
components and devices. The left side of the I/O Board priate input pin at J19 will be a logic high (>+10VDC)
performs the Digital Inputs function; the right side per- when the Microboard is commanding a relay to de-
forms the Digital Outputs function (refer to Figure 17 energize; logic low (<+1VDC) when commanding a
on page 54). relay to energize.
Digital Inputs are on/off inputs to the Microboard Relay K18 is different from all other relays on the
from relay and switch contacts, such as flow switches, I/O Board; it has a 115VAC coil. It provides the start/
start/stop switch, and remote cycling/safety devices stop signal to the Compressor Motor Starter and pro-
(refer to Figure 18 on page 55). The Micro reads the vides Compressor Run status to remote devices (refer
state of these contacts and reacts per the Program in- to Figure 21 on page 57). Relay K18 is controlled
structions. The contact voltage is 115VAC when closed by DC relays K13 (start) and K14 (stop). To start the
and 0VAC when open. These voltages are not suitable compressor motor, the Microboard energizes K13 and
for direct input to the Microboard. Therefore, the I/O K14 simultaneously. The 115VAC at TB1-6 is applied
Board converts the 115VAC/0VAC contact voltages to to the coil of K18 via K13 contacts, energizing K18.
5
0VDC/+5VDC logic level inputs for the Microboard. Approximately 0.2 seconds later, K13 is de-energized.
Individual Opto-coupler circuits (refer to Figure 19 K18 remains energized through K14 contacts and
on page 56) perform the conversion for each Digi- holding contacts of K18. To stop the compressor mo-
tal Input. When the input is 115VAC, the output will tor, the Microboard de-energizes K14. To prevent sags
be 0VDC; when the input is 0VAC, the output will be in Utility Power from chattering K18, the holding con-
+5VDC. tact of K18, along with the contact of K13, creates an
anti-chatter circuit for relay K18. Once energized, K18
Field connected Digital Inputs, such as those from ex- cannot be reenergized until K13 is again energized;
ternal devices that cycle the chiller, are connected to this will not occur until after a controlled shutdown has
terminal strip TB4 (refer to Figure 18 on page 55). occurred and another start sequence has been initiated.
These inputs are in the form of dry contacts connected
as shown in Figure 20 on page 56. The 115VAC There are conditions external to the I/O Board required
power source that is switched by the remote contacts to energize relay K18. The 115VAC will be present at
is supplied by the I/O Board TB4-1. There are mul- TB1-16 only if the motor controller contacts “CM” are
tiple TB4-1 terminals located adjacent to the field input closed and the circuit between external Terminal Strip
connections, as shown in Figure 17 on page 54 and TB6-1 and TB6-53 is closed. The “CM” are located on
Figure 18 on page 55. the CM-2 Board (relay K1), Electro-Mechanical starter
applications, the Solid State Starter Logic Board (relay
Digital Outputs are on/off outputs from the Microboard K1), Solid State Starter applications. The High Pres-
that control solenoid valves, motor contactors, actua- sure safety switch “HP”, must be closed and the RUN
tors, system relays and provide operating status to ex- Switch “1SS” must be in the RUN position.
ternal devices (refer to Figure 21 on page 57). Per
Program instructions, the Microboard energizes and Triacs are used to control the Slide Valve 4-way solenoid
de-energizes these devices. The coils of these devices valve. This Solenoid Valve is controlled by 115VAC
operate on 115VAC and therefore cannot be directly power. It has a Load coil and an Unload coil that are
connected to the Microboard. The Digital Outputs sec- energized by current flow through them. The Load triac
tion of the I/O Board contains +12VDC coil relays that is turned on to allow current flow through the Load coil.
are driven by the Microboard’s logic level outputs. The This diverts high pressure oil through the solenoid valve
contacts of these +12VDC relays operate the external and into the load side of the Slide Valve cylinder, mov-
115VAC coil devices. On the I/O Board, one side of ing it in the Load direction. The Unload Triac is turned
the each of the relay coils is permanently connected to on to allow current flow through the Unload side of the
+12VDC at J19-26/27. The other side of each relay coil Slide Valve cylinder, moving it in the Unload direc-
is connected to the Microboard via I/O Board connection. Under Program control, the Microboard turns the
JOHNSON CONTROLS 51
FORM 160.80-M1
Triacs on and off to control the Leaving Chilled Liquid remain closed for the duration of the shutdown
Temperature to the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature or until the Keypad COMPRESSOR switch is
Setpoint or limit compressor motor current. At appropri- placed in the Stop‑Reset (O) position, whereupon
ate intervals, a Triac is turned on for up to 3 seconds, as they open.
required, to move the Slide Valve in the desired direction.
The magnitude of Slide Valve movement for each Load K1 ‑ Anticipatory Alarm (TB2‑55/56)
or Unload pulse is determined by the oil pressure and the Dry closure contacts. Contacts close when one of the
duration of time the Triac is turned on. The Microboard following Warning messages is Displayed. On most
turns the Triacs on and off by applying control signals to warnings, the contacts automatically open when the
the respective Triac Driver. The Triac Driver is an opto- warning condition is no longer present. On those warn-
coupler device that isolates the Microboard low voltage ings marked with an asterisk, the contacts will open
circuits from the higher actuator voltages. To turn on the only after the warning condition is no longer pres-
Triac, the Microboard drives the Triac Driver input to ent and the WARNING RESET key is pressed when
logic low (<+1VDC) level. The Triac driver responds logged in at OPERATOR access level or higher.
by shorting the Triac GATE to Triac terminal 2. To turn
the Triac off, the Microboard opens its input to the Triac Freeze Threat From Operating Chiller, Low Dis-
Driver and allows the input to pull up to +12VDC. The charge Superheat Detected*, Low Discharge superheat
Triac Driver responds by opening the short from triac limit, Oil-Dirty Filter, Oil High Temperature, Real
Gate to Triac terminal 2. A voltmeter can be used to de- Time Clock failure, Setpoint Override*, Slide Valve
termine if a Triac is turned on or off. Measure across the Uncalibrated, External I/O – Serial Communications,
Triac; from Triac terminal 1 to Triac terminal 2. When Condenser – High Pressure Limit, Evaporator – Low
the Triac is turned off, the voltage will be approximately Pressure Limit.
115VAC; when turned on, it will be <10VAC.
K2 ‑ Remote Mode Ready to Start (only
RELAY TIMING operational in Digital, Analog or BAS (ISN)
Remote mode)(TB2‑26/27)
Under Program control, the relays are energized and
Dry closure status contacts that are closed to indicate to
de‑energized producing contact operation as follows.
a Remote device that the chiller will start upon receipt
Unless otherwise noted, contact rating is 5 amps resis-
of a remote start signal. The contacts open coincident
tive or 2 Amps inductive at 250VAC.
with any Cycling or Safety shutdown or anytime the
K0 ‑ Chilled Water Pump Starter (TB2‑44/45) Keypad COMPRESSOR switch is placed in the Stop-
-Reset (O) position. On Cycling shutdowns, the con-
Dry closure contacts. When the chiller is started, the tacts will close when the cycling condition clears. On
Contacts close 4 seconds after the start of “Start Se- safety shutdowns, the contacts will close only after the
quence Initiated”. Normally, they open coincident with Safety condition clears, a manual reset is performed by
the completion of SYSTEM LOCKOUT DELAY with placing the COMPRESSOR switch in the Stop‑Reset
the following exceptions: (O) position and then back to the RUN (I) position.
A. If a LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID ‑ LOW TEM-
PERATURE cycling shutdown occurs, they do K3 ‑ Safety Shutdown Status (TB2‑42/43)
not open at the completion of SYSTEM LOCK- Dry closure status contacts. They close coincident with
OUT DELAY. They remain closed for the dura- a Safety shutdown. They remain closed until the safety
tion of the shutdown or until the Keypad COM- condition clears and a manual reset is performed by
PRESSOR switch is placed in the Stop‑Reset (O) placing the COMPRESSOR switch in the Stop‑Reset
position, whereupon they open. (O) position, whereupon they open.
B. If Microboard Program Switch SW1‑8 is in the K4 ‑ Cycling Shutdown Status (TB2‑40/41)
ON position, they do not open at the comple-
tion of SYSTEM LOCKOUT DELAY when the Dry closure status contacts. They close coincident with
chiller shuts down on a MULTI-UNIT CYCLING a Cycling shutdown. They remain closed until the cy-
‑ CONTACTS OPEN or SYSTEM CYCLING cling condition clears, whereupon they open.
‑ CONTACTS OPEN cycling shutdown. They
52 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
K5 – Condenser Pump Starter (TB2-151) K11 – Refrigerant Level Solenoid (TB1-29)

Contacts close to start the condenser pump coincident Contacts control the Refrigerant Level Solenoid valve
with the beginning of “System Run”. They remain for variable orifice control, per description in SEC-
closed as long as the chillers running. They open co- TION 13 - VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL of this
incident with the beginning of “System Lockout de- manual.
lay”. If equipped with Flash Memory Card version
C.MLM.03.01 or later and Mod “B” Solid State Starter, K12 – Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid (TB1-61)
the contacts remain closed at shutdown until all SCR Contacts control the optional Hot Gas Bypass valve per
Heatsink temperatures are ≤ 105°F or a maximum of description in I/O Board Digital Inputs of this manual.
45 minutes.
K13 ‑ Compressor Motor Starter (start) -
If the Freeze Warning feature has been enabled, the
contacts will be controlled per the condenser saturation (TB1‑6/16) Contacts close coincident with the begin-
temperature while the chiller is shutdown as follows: ning of “System Run”. They remain closed for 0.2 sec-
onds and then open.
A. At chiller shutdown, the contacts remain closed
until the condenser saturation temperature in- K14 ‑ Compressor Motor Stop (stop) (TB 1‑6/16)
creases to >35.0°F, whereupon they open. Contacts close coincident with the beginning of “Sys-
B. During shutdown, if the condenser saturation tem Run”. They remain closed for the duration of “Sys-
temperature decreases to <30.0°F, the contacts tem Run”. They open coincident with the beginning of 5
are closed until the temperature rises to >35.0°F, “System Coastdown”.
whereupon they open.
K15 ‑ Not Used
If it is desired to supply the dry contacts with 115VAC
power from the OptiView Control Center to control the K16 ‑ Oil Line Solenoid (TB1-62)
Condenser Pump Motor Starter, a field installed wire 125 - 400 TR chillers only. Contacts close for the first
must be connected from TB5-22 to I/O Board TB2- 15 seconds and open for the last 15 seconds of “Start
150. Then connect I/O Board TB2-151 to the Condens- Sequence Initiated”. They then close coincident with
er Pump Motor Starter. the beginning of “System Run” and remain closed until
the chiller is shutdown, whereupon they open coinci-
K6-K9 – Not Used dent with the beginning of “System Lockout delay”.
They remain open while the chiller is shutdown.
K10 – Oil Heater (TB1-64)
Contacts close coincident with the beginning of “Sys- K17 ‑ Not Used
tem Lockout Delay”. They remain closed as long as
the chiller is shutdown unless the Separator Oil Level K18 ‑ Compressor Motor Starter (TB5‑22/25)
Switch is open, indicating insufficient oil level in the Run Status (TB2‑35/36)
Separator. This allows the oil heater thermostat to con- Contacts operate the same as K14.
trol the oil heater while the chiller is shutdown. The
contacts open coincident with the beginning of “Sys-
tem Run”. They remain open as long as the chiller is
running. This prevents the oil heater from being turned
on during compressor run.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 53
FORM 160.80-M1
LD04055
Figure 17 - I/O BOARD
54 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
TB3 - 32 OPTO-
HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY J1 -1
COUPLER
J2 - 1
MOTOR CONTROLLER SHUTDOWN J1 -2
TB3 - 30
STOP SWITCH (LOCAL) J1 -3
FACTORY CONNECTIONS
TB3 - 28
START SWITCH (LOCAL) J1 -4
TB3 - 71
NOT USED J1 -5
TB3 - 70
NOT USED J1 -6
TB3 - 18
SEPARATOR OIL LEVEL J1 -7
TB3 - 80 J1 -8
NOT USED
TB3 - 81
NOT USED J1 -9
5
TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB4 - 7
REMOTE START J1 -10
TB4 - 8
REMOTE STOP J1 -11
TB4 - 1
115VAC
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED LI UID TB4 - 19

J1 -12
TEMP SETPOINT (PWM)
REMOTE CURRENT LIMIT TB4 - 20
J1 -13
SETPOINT (PWM)
FIELD CONNECTIONS
TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB4 - 12
CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH J1 -14
TB4 - 13
REMOTE LOCALCYCLING J1 -15
TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB4 - 9
MULTI-UNIT SE UENCE J1 -16
TB4 - 31
AU ILIARY SAFETY SHUTDOWN J1 -17
TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB4 - 11
CONDENSER WATER FLOW SWITCH J1 -18
TB4 - 82
NOT USED J1 -19
TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB4 - 95
NOT USED J1 -20
TB4 - 1
115VAC
TB3 - 1
115VAC
LD04961
Figure 18 - I/O BOARD DIGITAL INPUTS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 55
FORM 160.80-M1
OPTO-COUPLER +5VDC
TYPICAL (20 CKTS) J19 - 21
TB4 - X
TB3 - X
JI - Y
NEUTRAL
TB3 - 2
JI - 22/23
LD04057
Figure 19 - I/O BOARD TYPICAL OPTO-COUPLER CIRCUIT
TB4 - X
OPTO-
COUPLER J1 - Y
115VAC
FIELD SUPPLIED TB4 - 1 TB3 - 1
DRY CONTACTS
(RATED 5MA @ 115VAC)
LD04058
Figure 20 - I/O BOARD TYPICAL FIELD CONNECTIONS
56 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
1
+ 12 VDC
26
27
+ 12 VDC
T 2 44
50
CHILLED WATER PUMP STARTER K0 K0
T 2 45
T 2 55
49
A TICIPAT R ALARM K1 K1
T 2 56
T 2 26
48
REM TE M DE READ T START K2 K2
T 2 27
T 2 42
47
SA ET SHUTD W K3 K3
T 2 43 5
T 2 40
46
C CLI SHUTD W K4 K4
T 2 41
T 2 150
45
C DE SER PUMP STARTER K5 K5
T 2 151
T 2 152
44
T USED K6 K6
T 2 153
T 2 154
43
T USED K7 K7
T 2 155
T 2 156
42
T USED K8 K8
T 2 157
T 1 165
41
T USED K9 K9
T 1 1
T 1 64
40
IL HEATER K10 K10
T 1 17
T 1 29
39
RE RI ERA T LEVEL K11 K11
S LE ID VALVE T 1 1
T 1 61
38
H T AS S LE ID VALVE K12 K12
PTI AL T 1 1
LD04962
Figure 21 - I/O BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUTS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 57
FORM 160.80-M1
J1
K13
COMPRESSOR MOTOR 37
K13
STARTER (START)
START
K14 K18 HP
COMPRESSOR MOTOR 36 TB1-6 RUN
K14
STARTER (STOP)
TB1-16
STOP
TB1-34
35 K15 16 TO I O
NOT USED K15
TB1-1 BOARD J2-1
CM (NOTE 2)
TB1-62
OIL LINE SOLENOID VALVE 34 53
K16 K16
(125 - 400 TR CHILLER ONLY) TB1-1
1
TB1-164
NOT USED K17 K17 115VAC
TB2-164
TB1-33 TB5-23
COMPRESSOR MOTOR NOT USED
STARTER K18 TB5-22
K18 115 VAC
TB1-2 K18 TB5-25
115VAC NEUTRAL COMPRESSOR MOTOR STARTER
TB2-35
K18 RUN STATUS

TB2-36
SLIDE VALVE
ACTUATOR 2
TB1-3
2 LOAD
J1-33 TRIAC
SLIDE VALVE 1
LOAD DRIVER
1
TB1-5
1 115 VAC
1
J1-32 TRIAC 2
SLIDE VALVE
DRIVER
UNLOAD 2 TB1-58
UNLOAD
NOTES:
1.– – – – – – – indicates wiring external to I/O Board.
2.“CM” – Contacts of Relay K1 on Current Module (EM Starter Applications) or Solid State Starter Logic
Board (Solid State Starter Applications).
LD04963
FIGURE 21 – I/O BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUTS (CONT’D)
58 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
TB1-158
2
J1-31 TRIAC
NOT USED Q3
DRIVER
G 1
TB1-169
1
G
J1-30 TRIAC Q4
NOT USED
DRIVER
2 TB1-160
TB1-161
2
J1-29 TRIAC
NOT USED Q5
DRIVER
G 1
TB1-162
1
G
J1-28 TRIAC Q6
NOT USED
DRIVER
2 TB1-163
LD04964
FIGURE 21 – I/O BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUTS (CONT’D)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 59
FORM 160.80-M1
60 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 6 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
A 10.4 inch color Liquid Crystal Display, along with that will pass through the window. The conduction of
supporting components Display Interface Board and each transistor is controlled by a signal from the Dis-
Backlight Inverter Board are mounted on a plate play Controller on the Microboard. The overall pixel
that is attached to the OptiView Control Center door. color is a result of the gradient of red, green and blue
A clear plexiglass faceplate prevents display surface light allowed to pass.
damage. System operating parameters are displayed
on various color graphic screens. The various display Under Program control, the Display Controller on the
screens are selected for display using the Keypad keys. Microboard sends a drive signal for each pixel to create
the image on the display. Each pixel’s drive signal is an
The Display provided in the new chiller or from John- 18 bit binary word; 6 bits for each of the 3 colors, red
son Controls as a service replacement part, could be green and blue. The greater the binary value, the great-
manufactured by any of several approved manufacturer the amount of light permitted to pass. The columns
ers. Each Display requires a specific Display Interface of pixels are driven from left to right and the rows are
Board, Backlight Inverter Board, Inverter Board in- driven top to bottom. To coordinate the drive signals
terface cable and Program command set. Therefore, and assure the columns are driven from left to right
Service replacement Displays or supporting compo- and the rows are driven from top to bottom, each drive
nents cannot be arbitrarily selected!!! As explained signal contains a horizontal and vertical sync signal.
below, replacement Displays are provided from John- The Display Interface Board receives these display
son Controls as kits to assure compatibility of all drive signals from the Microboard J5 and applies them
components. Non-compatibility of components will to the Display at connector J1 (refer to Figure 29 on
result in incorrect operation!!! Refer to SECTION page 70).
7 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD and SECTION 8 6
- DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD that fol- Although there are variations in control signal timing
low this section. Displays that could be provided from between different display manufacturers, Figure 26 on
Johnson Controls in YORK chillers or as replacement page 66 depicts typical control signals. Since these
parts are: control signals occur at rates greater than can be read
with a Voltmeter, the following description is for infor-
• SHARP LQ104V1DG61 (031-02886-000) mation only. There are 480 horizontal rows of pixels.
Each row contains 640 3-window pixels. Beginning
• SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000)
with the top row, the drive signals are applied within
• LG SEMICON LP104V2-W (031-02046-000) each row, sequentially left to right, beginning with the
left most pixel and ending with the right most pixel.
The YORK part numbers of the Display Interface
The rows are driven from top to bottom. The Vertical
Board, Backlight Inverter Board and Inverter ribbon
Sync (VSYNC) pulse starts the scan in the upper left
cable provided, are listed on a label attached to the Dis-
corner. The first Horizontal Sync (HSYNC) pulse initi-
play mounting plate. These are the part numbers of the
ates the sequential application of RGB drive signals to
supporting components that are compatible with the
the 640 pixels in row 1. Upon receipt of the ENABLE
installed display. These supporting components can be
signal, an RGB drive signal is applied to the first pixel.
individually replaced. However, if the Liquid Crystal
As long as the ENABLE signal is present, RGB drive
Display fails, Display replacement kit 331-01771-000
signals are then applied to the remaining 639 pixels at
must be ordered as detailed below. This kit contains
the CLK rate of 25.18MHz, or one every 39.72 nano-
a replacement Display and all compatible supporting
seconds. Typically it takes 31 microseconds to address
components.
all 640 pixels. Similarly, the next HSYNC pulse ap-
The Display has 307,200 pixels arranged in a 640 col- plies drive signals to row 2. This continues until all
umns X 480 rows matrix configuration. Each pixel con- 480 rows have been addressed. Total elapsed time to
sists of 3 windows; red, green and blue, through which address all 480 rows is approximately 16 milliseconds.
a variable amount of light from the Display Backlight The next VSYNC pulse causes the above cycle to re-
is permitted to pass through the front of the display. peat. Displays can be operated in FIXED mode or DIS-
Imbedded in each window of the pixel is a transistor, PLAY ENABLE mode. In FIXED mode, the first pixel
the conduction of which determines the amount of light drive signal is applied a fixed number (48) of clock
JOHNSON CONTROLS 61
FORM 160.80-M1
(CLK) cycles from the end of the HSYNC pulse and The DC power source to operate the Display is provid-
the drive signals are terminated a fixed number (16) of ed by the Microboard J5. Some Display manufacturers
CLK cycles prior to the next HSYNC pulse. In DIS- require +5VDC; others require +3.3VDC. The position
PLAY ENABLE mode, the pixel drive signals are ap- of Microboard Program Jumper JP2 determines which
plied to the pixels only while ENABLE signal is pres- of these power sources is supplied to the Display. JP2
ent. This signal is typically present 4-48 CLKS after must be positioned according to the Display manufac-
the end of the HSYNC pulse and 2-16 CLKS prior to turers requirements. Refer to Microboard 031-01730-
the next HSYNC pulse. All YORK applications oper- 000 Program Jumpers on page 28.
ate in the DISPLAY ENABLE mode. The state of the
ENABLE (Display Interface Board J1-27) signal from The Backlight Lamp provides the illumination for the
the Microboard places the Display in the desired mode display. Average lamp life is 25000 hours (2.9 years).
as follows: Some displays use one lamp. Others use two lamps.
Lamps are replaceable, but not interchangeable be-
• SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000) and tween different displays. Each Display manufacturer
SHARP LQ104V1DG61 (031-02886-000) Dis- specifies the required lamp for their display. Refer
plays - When ENABLE maintained “low”, dis- to replacement parts list for appropriate replacement
play operates in fixed mode. lamp. Service replacement lamps are stocked in the
Baltimore Parts Center.
• LG SEMICON Display (031-02046-000) does
not have the fixed mode feature. The lamp is illuminated by applying a high voltage
As described above, in OptiView Control Center appli- AC (500 to 1500VAC) to it. This illumination voltage
cations, the Display scan is left to right, beginning with is created from a low level DC voltage (+12VDC or
the top row and continuing sequentially through the +5VDC as required by the Display manufacturer) by
rows to the last row. However, in Display applications the Backlight Inverter Board. Lamp brightness is
other than OptiView Control Centers, image reversal is controlled by varying the high voltage AC. The greater
sometimes required. In image reversal applications, the the voltage the brighter the illumination. The lamp is
scan is reversed; the scan is right to left, beginning with controlled by on/off commands and brightness control
the last row and proceeding to the top row. The scan signals applied to the Backlight Inverter Board from
mode is determined by the configuration of wire jump- the Microboard. The Microboard Program determines
ers on the Display Interface Board (refer to SECTION when the lamp is turned on and off and the lamp bright-
7 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD). ness. Each Display manufacturer specifies the Back-
light Inverter Board to be used. Therefore, it will vary
Displays by different manufacturers can require differ- according to the Display manufacturer. The ribbon ca-
ent timing and control signals. The Microboard must ble that connects the Microboard to the Backlight In-
know which Display is present in order provide the verter Board also varies according to the Display man-
correct signals. Therefore, when AC control power is ufacturer’s requirements. Refer to Figure 27 on page
first applied to the OptiView Control Center, as part of 67 and Figure 28 on page 67. Microboard Pro-
the power-up sequence, the Microboard reads the Pan- gram Jumpers JP3, 4, 5, 7 and 8 determine the voltage
el ID wire jumpers P1D0 - P1D3 on the Display In- levels of the control signals sent to the Backlight In-
terface Board and determines which Display is pres- verter Board and must be configured per the Display
ent. It can then provide the correct timing and control manufacturer’s requirements as listed in Microboard
signals to produce the graphic image, as required by 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers on page 28. A de-
the Display manufacturer. Since the Display Interface tailed description of the operation of this board is in
Board identifies the Display for the Microboard, there the SECTION 8 - DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER
is a different Display Interface Board required for BOARD that follows. Also refer to the preceding SEC-
each Display application and each has a unique jumper TION 3 - MICROBOARD 031-01730-000 and SEC-
configuration that identifies the Display. A complete TION 4 - MICROBOARD 031-02430-000 for a de-
explanation of this process is included in the preced- tailed description of the Lamp Dimmer circuit.
ing SECTION 3 - MICROBOARD 031-01730-000,
SECTION 4 - MICROBOARD 031-02430-000 and the The actual Display that is installed in the OptiView
SECTION 7 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD that fol- Control Center of the new chiller is determined by the
lows. Display manufacturer contractual agreement in place
during the time of OptiView Control Center produc-
62 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
tion. Displays stocked for Service replacement are a Always remove control power from the
result of that same agreement. Therefore, the Display OptiView control center before connect‑
received for service replacement may be by a differ- ing or disconnecting wires to the display.
ent manufacturer than the one in the OptiView Con- Connecting or disconnecting wires to the
trol Center. Since each Display manufacturer requires display with power applied will damage
a specific Display Interface Board, Backlight Inverter the display!!!
Board and Inverter Ribbon Cable, replacement Dis-
plays are ordered and supplied as a Display Replace- BACKLIGHT LAMP REPLACEMENT
ment Kit (YORK Part Number 331-01771-000) to as-
sure component compatibility. The items supplied in SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000)
the kit are compatible with the supplied Display. The Display
kit consists of the following items mounted on a Dis- Removal
play mounting plate:
The Lamp slides into the Display from left to right and
Display Replacement Kit 331-01771-000 is secured with a locking tab.
1. Liquid Crystal Display with Lamp 1. Remove Control Power from the OptiView Con-
2. Appropriate Display Interface Board for item 1 trol Center.
3. Appropriate Backlight Inverter Board for item 1 2. Remove protective cover from rear of Display.
4. Appropriate ribbon cable (Backlight Inverter 3. Disconnect Lamp AC power connector from
Board to Microboard) for item 1 Backlight Inverter Board.
5. Ribbon cable (Display Interface Board to 4. Using fingernail or thin flat blade screwdriver,
Microboard) bend the locking tab outward slightly to clear the 6
Lamp housing protrusion.
6. All mounting hardware
5. Grasp Lamp AC power connector and gently pull
7. Installation instructions. A label attached to the until Lamp housing clears locking tab.
Display mounting plate lists the YORK part
numbers of the Display supporting components 6. Grasp Lamp housing and pull until Lamp housing
mounted on the Display mounting plate and the re- is completely removed from the Display.
quired Microboard Program Jumper (JP2 through Installation
8) configurations. Microboard Program Jumpers
JP2 - JP8 will have to be configured appropriately 1. Slide new Lamp into Display from left to right
for the replacement display. until Lamp housing protrusion locks into Display
locking tab.
Display Handling
2. Connect Lamp AC power connector to Backlight
1. The display is made of glass. It could break if Inverter Board.
dropped.
3. Apply Control Power to OptiView Control Center.
2. The display front surface is easily scratched. If
soiled, wipe with a dry cotton cloth. Use no water LG Semicon LP104V2-W (031-02046-000)
or chemicals. Display
3. The display is static sensitive. Electrostatic dis- Removal
charges may damage the display. The Lamp slides into the Display from left to right and
4. A laminated film is adhered to the display front is secured with a screw.
glass surface to prevent it from being scratched. 1. Remove Control Power from the OptiView Con-
Peel off very slowly to prevent static damage. trol Center.
2. Remove protective cover from rear of Display.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 63
FORM 160.80-M1
3. Disconnect Lamp AC power connector from Installation

Backlight Inverter Board. 1. Slide new Lamp into Display from left to right
4. Using small Phillips screwdriver, remove lamp until Lamp housing is fully inserted.
retaining screw. 2. Secure Lamp with Lamp retaining screw.
5. Grasp Lamp AC power connector and gently pull 3. Connect Lamp AC power connector to Backlight
until Lamp housing is completely removed from Inverter Board.
the Display.
4. Apply AC power to OptiView Control Center.
LD04062
Figure 22 - DISPLAY, MOUNTING
64 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
BACKLIGHT BULB DISPLAY INTERFACE MOUNTING

NOTE 2
025-33752-000 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY PLATE
BOARD 031-01765-002
SHARP LQ10D367
LABEL
NOTE 2
BACKLIGHT
INVERTER
BOARD
031-01789-000
DISPLAY CABLE
INVERTER CABLE 031-01769-000
NOTE: 031-01770-003
1. Configure Microboard Program Jumpers per label.
2. 025-33752-000 (displays prior to October 2002) LD05563 6
025-40317-000 (displays after October 2002)
Figure 23 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY – SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000) DISPLAY
NOTE:
1. Configure Microboard Program Jumpers per label. LD14074
Figure 24 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY – SHARP LQ104V1DG61 (031-02866-000) DISPLAY
JOHNSON CONTROLS 65
FORM 160.80-M1
BACKLIGHT BULB DISPLAY INTERFACE MOUNTING

025-34564-000 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY BOARD 031-01765-001 PLATE
LG SEMICON LP104V2-W
LABEL
4564
4
BACKLIGHT
INVERTER
BOARD
031-01789-000
DISPLAY CABLE
031-01770-003
NOTE: LD05525
1.Configure Microboard Program Jumpers per label.
Figure 25 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ASSEMBLY – LG SEMICON LP104V2-W (031-02046-000)
480 ROWS
16MS
VSYNC
31US
HSYNC
ROW 1 ROW 2 ROW 480
BP FP
640
COLUMNS
ENABLE DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY

PERIOD PERIOD PERIOD
39.72 NS
640 CLKS
CLK NOTES:
(25.18
MHz) 1. BP = Back Porch = 4-48 CLKS
2. FP = Front Porch = 2-16 CLKS
RGB LD04066
Figure 26 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY TYPICAL CONTROL SIGNAL TIMING
66 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
BEZEL
LAMP HOLDER
WIRE PROTRUSION
(white/GND side)
HOLE
LOCKING TAB
WIRE
(pink/HOT side)
DIRECTION A
DIRECTION B
6
LD04067
DIRECTION C
Figure 27 - DISPLAY (SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000)) LAMP REPLACEMENT
SCREW FOR
LAMP REMOVAL
LD14075
Figure 28 - DISPLAY (SHARP LQ104V1DG61 (031-02886-000) AND LG LP104V2-W (031-02046-000))
JOHNSON CONTROLS 67
FORM 160.80-M1
68 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 7 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD
The Display Interface Board is located on the Liq- Display Interface Board 031-02887-000
uid Crystal Display mounting plate and is part of the Display Applicability: SHARP LQ104V1DG61 (031-
Microboard interface to the Display. It permits the use 02886-000)
of Displays by different manufacturers, by providing
PID0 – OUT (VCC)
the Microboard with a means of automatically deter-
mining which Display is present. PID1 – IN (pin 45 is tied to 44) (GND)
PID2 – No Connection Open (VCC)
Since different display manufacturers require differ-
PID3 – No Connection Open (VCC)
ent timing and control signals, the Microboard Display
Controller must be configured to meet the requirements The Displays can operate in either NORMAL or RE-
of the actual display installed. When AC power is ap- VERSE mode for the Right/left (R/L) and Up/Down
plied to the OptiView Control center, the Microboard (U/D) scan. Normal for the R/L scan is left to right.
reads the Panel Identification (PID0 thru PID3) volt- Normal for the U/D scan is top to bottom. As used in
age levels on the Display Interface Board during the the OptiView Control Center, it is configured to op-
power-up sequence to determine which display is pres- erate in Normal mode for both of these scans. The
ent. These voltage levels indicate the actual display in- Reverse mode for R/L is right to left. Reverse mode
stalled and the Display Controller is automatically con- for U/D is bottom to top. The Display Interface Board
figured appropriately. To provide the appropriate Panel provides the appropriate signals to the display to put it
ID voltage levels for the different displays, there are in Normal scan mode. By hardwired jumper or wiring
different Display Interface Boards. These boards have configuration, the signal is either tied to ground, VCC
permanent wire jumpers that provide the voltage lev- (+3.3VDC or +5VDC, as determined by Microboard
els to the microboard for Panel ID signals (PID0 thru Program Jumper JP2) or left open as follows:
PID3). These jumpers connect these signals to either Display Interface Board 031-01765-001
ground or open-circuit. When connected to ground, the Display Applicability: LG Semicon LP104V2-W (031-
voltage level for that signal is 0VDC. When open, the 02046-000)
voltage level is the VCC logic level, which is either
3.3VDC or 5.0VDC, depending on the display (refer to
P30 – OUT (Open) 7
Microboard Program Jumper JP2). P31 – OUT (Open)
Display Interface Board 031-01765-002
The following are the different Display Interface
Display Applicability: SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031-
Boards and the Panel ID signals they provide to the
01774-000)
Microboard:
P30 – IN (VCC)
Display Interface Board 031-01765-001 P31 - IN (GND)
Display Applicability: LG Semicon LP104V2-W (031- Display Interface Board 031-02887-000
02046-000)
Display Applicability: SHARP LQ104V1DG61 (031-
PID0 – IN (GND) 02886-000)
PID1 – OUT (VCC) P30 – (VCC)
PID2 – OUT (VCC) P31 – (GND)
PID3 – OUT (VCC) Display Interface Boards are available individually for
service replacement. The part number of the Display In-
Display Interface Board 031-01765-002 terface Board for the installed display is listed on a label
Display Applicability: SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031- attached to the display mounting plate. The appropriate
01774-000) board is also supplied with display kit 331-01771-000.
PID0 – OUT (VCC) The red, green and blue display drive and control
signals are simply passed through the Display Inter-
PID1 – IN (GND)
face Board. The value of VCC is either +5VDC or
PID2 – OUT (VCC) +3.3VDC, as determined by the position of Program
PID3 – OUT (VCC) Jumper JP2 on the Microboard.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 69
70
Figure 29 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD 031-01765-001 AND 031-01765-002

LG SEMICON LP104V2-W (031-02046-000) DISPLAY
031-01765-001 - PID0 IN
PID1-3 OUT
P30, P31 OUT
SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000) DISPLAYS
031-01765-002 - PID0 OUT
PID1 IN
PID2, 3 OUT
P30, 31 IN LD04070
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
J1 J2
1 1
GND GND
2 2
3 N 3
4 N 4
FORM 160.80-M1
5 5
GND GND
6 0 6
7 1 7 031-02887
8
JOHNSON CONTROLS
8 2
9 3 9
10 4 10
11 5 11
12 12
GND GND
13 G0 13
14 G1 14
15 G2 15
16 G3 16
17 G4 17
18 G5 18
19 19
GND GND
20 0 20
21 1 21
22 2 22
23 3 23
24 4 24
25 5 25
26 GND 26
GND N
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
31 D GND 31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
FIGURE 29 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD 031-02887-000 (CONT'D)

GND
D1 45
46
GND
D0 47
48
GND
49
50
LD04070b
71
7
FORM 160.80-M1
72 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 8 - DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD

The Display Backlight Inverter Board generates a +5VDC. Program Jumper JP4 must be positioned to
high voltage AC signal that is applied to the backlight provide the required voltage. Further, some applica-
lamp, causing it to illuminate. The magnitude of the tions require this signal to be a +VDC (+12VDC or
signal determines the lamp brightness. Displays by +5VDC) to turn on the lamp. Others require this signal
some manufacturers have two lamps; one at the top and to be 0VDC to turn on the lamp. Program Jumper JP3
one at the bottom of the display. Other Display manu- must be positioned to provide the required polarity.
facturers have only a lamp at the top of the display.
Depending upon the Display manufacturer, the bright-
An Inverter converts low level DC voltage (+12VDC ness control input from the Microboard must be either
or +5VDC, as required by the manufacturer) from the a variable voltage or a variable resistance. Microboard
Microboard to a 500 to 1500VAC 60KHz signal that Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8 are used to provide the
is applied to the lamp. The higher the AC voltage, the appropriate technique (refer to Figure 8 on page 31).
greater the brightness of the lamp. When this voltage is The lamp dimmer circuit on the Microboard is an IC
not present, the lamp is turned off. that is the electrical equivalent of a 10K ohm potenti-
High voltage, up to 1500VAC, is present ometer with 100 positions or steps. The Program adjusts
at the output of the backlight inverter the position of the potentiometer. When configured for
board. Refer to Figure 30 on page 74 variable voltage (JP7 and JP8 installed), the output be-
and Figure 31 on page 75 locate the tween Microboard J6-7 and J6-8 is a 0 to +5.0VDC sig-
output connectors. Use extreme caution nal. Not all applications require the full 5.0VDC range.
when working in this area!!! If configured for variable resistance (JP7 and JP8 re-
moved), the output between Microboard J6-7 and J6-8
Different Display manufacturers require different is a 0 to 10K ohm variable resistance.
Backlight Inverter Boards. The different board de-
The OptiView Control Center could be supplied with
signs require different control voltage inputs. To ac-
any of several approved Displays. Each Display re-
commodate these variations, Microboard Program
quires a specific Backlight Inverter Board as specified
Jumpers JP3 - JP5, JP7 and JP8 must be configured to
below and in Figure 30 on page 74 to 31. These
provide the required voltage levels. A label attached to
boards are individually available as service replace-
the Display mounting plate lists the required Program
ment parts (the required Backlight Inverter Board part
Jumper configuration for that particular display. Refer
number is listed on the label attached to the Display
to Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers on
mounting plate). However, service replacement Dis-
page 28 for required Program Jumper configurations
for the various Display applications.
plays are provided in a kit (YORK P/N 331-01771- 8
000) that includes the appropriate Backlight Inverter
Under Program control, the Microboard generates the Board (refer to SECTION 6 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DIS-
control signals that are applied to the Backlight In- PLAY).
verter Board. The Program determines when the lamp
SHARP model LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000) AND
is turned on and off. It also adjusts the lamp bright-
LG Semicon LP104V2-W (031-02046-000) displays
ness. To increase the average lamp life of 25,000 hours,
require a Backlight Inverter Board (031-01789-000)
the lamp brightness is normally adjusted to 50%. This
(refer to Figure 30 on page 74). SHARP model
brightness level will still allow the display to be vis-
LQ104V1DG61 display (031-02886-000) requires
ible. When the Program senses a Keypad key has been
Backlight Inverter Board 031-02889-000 (refer to Fig-
pressed, it adjusts the brightness to 100% (maximum)
ure 31 on page 75). These boards generate a lamp
The lamp illumination high voltage AC is generated illumination high voltage AC from +12VDC. When
from either +12VDC or +5VDC as required by the the Backlight Enable signal is +5VDC, the high volt-
manufacturer. Microboard Program Jumper JP5 must age signal is applied to the lamp. When the Enable is
be positioned to provide the required voltage. The 0VDC, the high voltage is removed from the lamp.
Microboard provides the Backlight Enable signal. The lamp brightness is controlled by a variable volt-
This signal turns the lamp on and off. Some manufac- age signal, developed by the lamp dimmer circuit
turers require this signal to be +12VDC, others require (refer to Figure 18 on page 55) on the Microboard
JOHNSON CONTROLS 73
FORM 160.80-M1
and applied to the Inverter Board. The lamp dimmer

circuit varies the voltage over the range of 0 to +3.0
VDC. 0VDC produces maximum brightness (100%).
+3.0VDC produces minimum brightness (0%). Volt-
ages between these values produce a linear brightness
between 100% and 0%.
RETURN DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD

BACKLIGHT PART NUMBER: 031-01789-000
500 - 1400 VAC LAMP FOR: SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000) &
LG SEMICON LP104V2-W (031-02046-000) DISPLAYS
N.C.
NOTES:
3 2 1
1. OFF = 0VDC; ON = +5VDC. Refer to Mi-
J2 croboard Program Jumpers JP3 & JP4.
2. 0 - +3.0VDC. 0VDC = MAX (100%) Bright-
ness; +3.0VDC = MIN (0%) Brightness.
Refer to Fig. 10 and Microboard Jumpers J6
INVERTER JP7 & JP8.
N.C. 10
BOARD 3. Refer to Microboard Program Jumper JP5.
4. N.C. = No Connection. N.C. 9
N.C. 8
J1 BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (NOTE 2)
7 MICRO
1 2 3 4 5 N.C. 6 BOARD
N.C. BACKLIGHT ENABLE (NOTE 1)
5
GND
4
N.C. 3
N.C. 2
+ 12 VDC (NOTE 3)
1

LD09568a
Figure 30 - DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD (SHARP LQ10D367/368 (031-01774-000) AND LG

SEMICON LP104V2-W) (031-02046-000)
74 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD

PART NUMBER: 031-02889-000
FOR: SHARP LQ104V1DG6 (031-02886-000) DISPLAYS
500 - 1400 VAC

1 BACKLIGHT
J3 RETURN LAMP 1
2
500 - 1400 VAC

INVERTER J2 1 BACKLIGHT
2 RETURN LAMP 2
BOARD
J6
J1 NC 10
9 MICRO
12345678 NC
BOARD
NC NC
NC 8
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL (NOTE 2) 7
NC 6
BACKLIGHT ENABLE (NOTE 1)
5
GND 4
GND 3 8
+ 12 VDC (NOTE 3)
2
+ 12 VDC (NOTE 3)
1
NOTES:
1.OFF = 0VDC; ON = + 5VDC. Refer to Microboard Program Jumpers JP3 and JP4. LD09568b
2.0- + 3.0 VDC. 0VDC = MAX (100%) brightness. +3VDC = MIN (0%) brightness.
Refer to Microboard Program Jumpers JP7 and JP8.
3.Refer to Microboard Program Jumper JP5.
4.N.C. = No Connection.
Figure 31 - DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD SHARP LQ104V1DG61 DISPLAY 031-02886-000
JOHNSON CONTROLS 75
FORM 160.80-M1
76 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 9 - KEYPAD
The Keypad contains touch-sensitive keys that allow Micro concludes the key at coordinate of row 4 and
the Operator to interface with the Control Center. The column 3 is pressed. Since the coordinates of all keys
Operator presses the keys to request the desired screens are stored in the Microboard’s Program, it can identify
of information and enter System Setpoints. which key is at this coordinate and responds accord-
The top layer of the Keypad contains embossed areas ingly. In this example the “1” key is pressed.
identifying the keys. Under each embossed key area In order for the Microboard to reliably detect closed
are two conductors, one on top of the other, separated and open keys, each key must meet a closed circuit
by an air space. The conductors are arranged in a ma- and open circuit resistance requirement. When a key
trix of rows and columns and connected to the Keypad is pressed, the contact resistance must be ≤ 100 Ohms.
connector as shown in Figure 33 on page 78. The When a key is not pressed, the contact resistance must
embossed area of each key is located directly over the be ≥ 1 Meg Ohm. If the Microboard is not responding
intersection point of the conductors. Pressing the em- to a pressed key, or if it’s detecting a closed key when
bossed key area causes contact and electrical continu- none are pressed, it could be because the contact resis-
ity between the two conductors. For example, press- tance requirements are not being met. The operation of
ing the “1” key creates continuity between the Keypad each key can be checked with an Ohmmeter. To check
connector pin 5 (column 3) and pin 13 (row 4). Since the open and closed contact resistance of any key, refer
this connector is interfaced to the Microboard (J18), to SECTION 24 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLE-
the Microboard senses this continuity as described be- SHOOTING of this manual.
low and concludes the “1” key is pressed.
The Keypad is attached to the front of the Control Cen-
The Microboard Program continuously scans the Key-
ter door with an adhesive backing. If service replace-
pad to determine if a key is pressed. Beginning with
ment is required, start at one corner and slowly peel
row 1 and proceeding through all rows, the Program
the Keypad from the door. The rear side of the replace-
places a “logic low” (<1VDC) on a row, a “logic high”
ment Keypad is coated with an adhesive covered with
(>4VDC) on the remaining rows and reads the col-
a paper backing. Remove the paper backing, align the
umns. A logic low in any column indicates a key in that
Display and rocker switch openings and apply the Key-
column and row is pressed. For example, if at the time
pad to the door.
row 4 is being driven low, if column 3 is low, then the
LD04074
CONNECTOR
Figure 32 - KEYPAD PANEL
JOHNSON CONTROLS 77
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 9 - KEYPAD
LD04075
LD04076
Figure 33 - KEYPAD
78 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 10 - POWER SUPPLY
The Power Supply provides the DC power for the LCD

Display and all the printed circuit boards in the Con-
trol Center. It receives a 102 to 132VAC input from an
external power source and provides the following DC
outputs:
• -12VDC
• +12VDC
29136A
• +5VDC Figure 34 - POWER SUPPLY
• +24VDC
It is also routed to all Pressure Transducers, Tempera-
• Ground ture Thermistors, and Motor controller Board (CM-
The +24VDC output provides power to the CM-2 2, Solid State Starter Logic Board [Mod “A” SSS]).
Board (Electro-Mechanical starter applications), Sol- This permits all Analog circuits to be powered by the
id State Starter Logic Board (Mod “A” SSS) or Solid same supply, eliminating any offsets caused by volt-
State Starter Logic/Trigger Board (Mod “B” SSS). age regulator drift. Microboard 031-02430-000 has an
additional voltage regulator that provides a 2.5VDC
The -12VDC, +12VDC, Gnd and +5VDC outputs are power source. The +3.3VDC supply is utilized by the
applied to the Microboard. There, these voltages are Microprocessor, Flash Memory Card and other digital
applied to the circuits requiring the respective voltage. circuits. It could also be applied to the Backlight In-
From the Microboard, the +12VDC and +5VDC are verter Board, depending on the Display manufacturer’s
distributed to other system components requiring these requirements as explained below.
voltages. These include the GPIC, I/O Board, LCD
Display and Display Backlight Inverter Board. Different Display manufacturers can require differ-
ent supply voltages for their display and supporting
The Condor Power supply allows adjustment of the circuits. To accommodate the different Display manu-
+5Vdc output. To account for losses in wiring and facturer’s voltage requirements, Microboard Program
connections and assure sufficient voltage level at the Jumpers JP2 and JP5 must be positioned to provide the
microboard input, the “VAdJ” (R51) potentiometer required supply voltages to the Display and the Display
is adjusted to achieve +5.1VDC at the input to the Backlight Inverter Board. Either +5VDC or +3.3VDC,
Microboard J1-1. as determined by JP2, is applied to the Display. Either
As shown in Figure 7 on page 27 (031-01730- +12VDC or +5VDC, as determined by JP5, is ap-
000 microboard) and Figure 13 on page 47 plied to the Display Backlight Inverter Board. Refer
(031-02430-000 microboard), the Microboard con- to Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers on
tains two voltage regulators that create separate page 28.
+5VDC and +3.3VDC supplies. The +5VDC sup-
ply is dedicated to all the Microboard Analog cir-
cuits and is labeled as the +5VDC (Analog) supply.
10
JOHNSON CONTROLS 79
80
+5VDC (ANALOG)
ALL TRANSDUCERS AND THERMISTORS
+5VDC
- 12VDC
+12VDC
+12VDC E-LINK GATEWAY
GND
DC GND
POWER
+5VDC
SECTION 10 - POWER SUPPLY
SUPPLY
FOR WIRE CONNECTIONS)

+5VDC
MICROBOARD +12VDC I/O
GND
BOARD
+24VDC
GND
(NOTE 4)
CM-2 BOARD
or +5VDC (ANALOG)
(NOTE 3) VDD (NOTE 1)
SOLID STATE
GND (NOTE 3) LCD
STARTER GND DISPLAY
+V (NOTE 2)
DISPLAY BACKLIGHT
GND INVERTER BOARD
NOTES:
1. +5 or +3.3VDC as determined by Microboard Program
Jumper JP2 and display requirements. LD06483
2. +12 or +5VDC as determined by Microboard Program

Jumper JP5 and display requirements.
3. Not Applicable to Mod “B” Solid State Starter Applications.
4. Applications - CM2 (Em Starter) Logic/Trigger Board (Mod
“B” Solid State Starter).
Figure 35 - POWER SUPPLY – DC POWER DISTRIBUTION (REFER TO CONTROL CENTER WIRING DIAGRAM
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 11 - CURRENT MODULE (CM-2)
On applications where the Compressor Motor is con- The motor current signal input at J1-1 and J1-2 is ap-
trolled by an Electro-Mechanical Starter, the Control plied to potentiometer R8. This is Factory adjusted
Center is equipped with a Current Module. The Cur- (field adjusted on service replacements) to illuminate
rent Module provides compressor motor Overload and the 105% CURR indicator (CR6) when the compressor
Power Fault protection. The Current Module also pro- motor current reaches 105% FLA. This calibrated volt-
vides an analog voltage representing the compressor age is applied to the Power Fault detector, Overload
motor current to the Microboard for display and Cur- detectors and Multiplexer (MUX).
rent Limit control. While the chiller is running, the
Microboard controls the Slide Valve position to limit The Power Fault circuit protects the compressor mo-
the motor current to the system 100% Full Load Amp tor and driveline from transient torque damage. It an-
(FLA) value. ticipates the transient torque condition by detecting
a momentary interruption in motor current and de-
The contacts of Current Module K1 relay (identified as energizing the starter before damage can occur. If the
“CM” contacts on the Control Center wiring diagram) chiller has been running for >75 seconds and the motor
are interfaced into the Motor Controller initiated shut- current decreases to ≤10% FLA, a Power Fault shut-
down circuit that is located between Control Center down is initiated. The Power Fault indicator (CR5) is
TB6-53 and I/O Board TB1-16 (refer to Figure 21 on illuminated and remains illuminated until manually re-
page 57 and Figure 37 on page 83). They are also set with RESET switch S2. Relay K1 is de-energized
connected as a digital input to I/O Board J2-1. Relay for 1 second and then returned to the energized state.
K1 is normally energized, maintaining its contacts in Relay K1 contacts (CM) open for 1 second and then
a closed position. Whenever the Current Module initi- return to the closed state. A SYSTEM LOCKOUT DE-
ates a chiller shutdown, it de-energizes K1, opening its LAY is initiated and POWER FAULT is displayed on
contacts. This interrupts the circuit to I/O Expansion the Display. The chiller will automatically restart upon
Board RUN relay coil 1R (K18), de-energizing it and completion of SYSTEM LOCKOUT DELAY.
causing the Starter to shutdown. Simultaneously, the
Microboard reads the opening of these contacts via I/O If the motor current remains continuously at ≥105%
Board J2-1, initiates a SYSTEM LOCKOUT DELAY FLA for 50 seconds (Nominal), an OVERLOAD shut-
and displays the appropriate message as described be- down is initiated. The Overload indicator (CR4) is
low. illuminated and remains illuminated until manually
reset with RESET switch S2. Relay K1 is de-ener-
Three Current Transformers in the Compressor Mo- gized, opening K1 contacts (CM). Relay K1 remains
tor Terminal Box (refer to Figure 38 on page 84) de-energized until manually reset with RESET switch
provide 3 phase motor current signals to the Diode S2. A SYSTEM LOCKOUT DELAY is initiated and
Bridge (DB). The required turns ratio of the Current MOTOR CONTROLLER-CONTACTS OPEN is
Transformers is determined by the system 100% FLA. displayed. The chiller cannot be started until RESET
The Diode Bridge rectifies and combines the three sig- switch S2 is manually pressed.
nals into one DC signal that is applied to the parallel
Variable Resistors (RES). These are Factory adjusted If the motor current remains continuously at 245% FLA
(field adjusted on service replacements) to provide a for 40 seconds, 290% FLA for 20 seconds or 360%
nominal 1.0VDC (0.15 to 1.10VDC) signal to the Cur- FLA for 10 seconds, an OVERLOAD shutdown is ini-
rent Module at J1-1 and J1-2 when the compressor mo- tiated. Relay K1 and Overload indicator CR4 operate
tor current is at 100% FLA. Figure 38 on page 84 as described immediately above. A SYSTEM LOCK-
contains a formula to calculate the resistance of RES OUT DELAY is initiated and MOTOR CONTROL-
required to achieve 1.0VDC at 100%FLA. The 100% LER - CONTACTS OPEN is displayed. The chiller
cannot be restarted until RESET switch is manually
FLA value is located on a label adhered to the inside of 11
the Control Center door. pressed. LRA/FLA Potentiometer R16 is factory ad-
JOHNSON CONTROLS 81
FORM 160.80-M1
justed (field adjusted on service replacements) to the an unload signal to the Slide Valve until the motor cur-
ratio of Locked Rotor Amps to Full Load Amps. The rent decreases to 102% FLA. While Current Limit is
correct setting is determined by dividing the LRA by in effect, MOTOR - HIGH CURRENT LIMIT is dis-
the FLA. If Switch S1 is in the “Y-Delta/57%” posi- played.
tion, there is no 245% FLA threshold. Switch S1 must
be positioned according to the type of Electro-Mechan- As detailed in SECTION 23 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION,
ical starter present; UP for Y-delta or 57% Autotrans- SERVICE SETPOINTS AND RESET PROCEDURES
former/Reacter starters; DOWN for all others. of this manual, to field calibrate Potentiometer R8, the
slide valve must be manually operated to achieve 105%
The Multiplexer (MUX) is an electronic switch with FLA compressor motor current. Therefore, during this
8 inputs and 1 output. The address applied to it de- procedure, Current Limit is not invoked until 107%
termines the position of the switch (ie, which input is FLA and 110% FLA. The first time the SLIDE VALVE
routed to the output). The inputs to channel 0 through 6 LOAD key is pressed on the COMPRESSOR Screen
are grounded (0VDC) . The input to channel 7 is a 0 to after logging in at SERVICE access level, a 10 min-
4.0VDC analog signal, representing motor current over ute window is opened, allowing the current to rise to
the range of 0 to 100% FLA. It is Factory calibrated 107% FLA before further slide valve loading is inhib-
by Potentiometer R34 to be 4.0VDC when the com- ited. This inhibit is released when the current decreases
pressor motor current is at 100% FLA. Under Program to 106% FLA. If the current continues to rise to 110%,
control, the Microboard commands the Mux to route manual control is overridden and an unload signal is
the inputs to the Mux output by applying 3-bit Binary applied to the slide valve until the current decreases to
addresses to the Mux address inputs at J5-1, 2, 3. The 109% FLA. After 10 minutes, the normal current limit
voltage level for a logic 1 is +12VDC and logic 0 is thresholds of 100% FLA and 104% FLA are applied.
0VDC. The Microboard reads the Mux outputs at J5-
6. It first addresses channel 0 to determine the type of Table 5 - MUX ADDRESS INPUTS ALONG WITH
starter applied. The 0VDC at channel 0 indicates to the RESPECTIVE OUTPUTS
Microboard that this is an Electro-Mechanical Starter BINARY
DECIMAL OUTPUT
application (In all starter applications, the Micro reads J5-1 J5-2 J5-3
channel 0 to determine the type starter applied; 0VDC 0 0 0 0 Ground
= EM starter, >0VDC=Solid State Starter). It then ad- 0 0 1 1 Ground
dresses channel 7 (ignoring channels 1 through 6) to
0 1 0 2 Ground
read the analog motor current voltage. The Microboard
0 1 1 3 Ground
interprets this analog value in terms of %FLA and dis-
1 0 0 4 Ground
plays it upon operator keypad request. It also uses this
value to invoke compressor motor Current Limit at 1 0 1 5 Ground
100% FLA and 104% FLA. When motor current rises 1 1 0 6 Ground
to 100% FLA, the Microboard prevents any further 0-5.0VDC motor current
current rise by inhibiting further Slide Valve loading analog signal calibrated
1 1 1 7
until it decreases to 98% FLA. If the motor current on CM-2 board to be
+4.0VDC at 100% FLA.
continues to rise to 104% FLA, the Microboard applies
82 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
LD04079
Figure 36 - CM-2 CURRENT MODULE (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER APPLICATION)
11
LD04080
Figure 37 - CM-2 CURRENT MODULE (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER APPLICATIONS)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 83
FORM 160.80-M1
LD04081
MOTOR CT
FLA RESD (OHMS)
VOLTAGE RATIO NOTES:
65-111A 200:1 A. Requires passing motor lead through current transformer (CT)
112-224 A
350:1 once before connecting to power supply.
R = 1.282 (CT RATIO)
208-600 B. Requires passing motor lead through CT twice before connect-
225-829 A
700:1 FLA
ing to power supply.
830-1790A 1400:1
C. Requires passing motor lead through CT three times before con-
R = 0.247 (CT RATIO) necting to power supply.
11-18 C
200:1
FLA D. Calculates resistance of “RES” to achieve 1.0 VDC at FLA.
19-37 B
200:1
2300-4160 FLA
38-123A 200:1
124-264 A
350:1
FLA
265-518A 700:1
LD00710
Figure 38 - CM-2 CURRENT MODULE – INTERFACE, CURRENT TRANSFORMERS AND VARIABLE RESISTORS
84 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 12 - SOLID STATE STARTERS
SOLID STATE STARTERS After power has been applied to the system, the
The Control Center will accommodate either of two dif- Microboard will attempt to establish communications
ferent YORK Liquid Cooled Solid State Starters (LC- with the Logic/Trigger Board. If unsuccessful within 10
SSS). New production chillers after October 1999, are attempts, the Microboard initiates a Cycling shutdown
equipped with the Mod “B” LCSSS. This style LCSSS and displays LCSSS INITIALIZATION FAILED on
contains the Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) assem- the System Details line of the Control Center display.
blies, an integrated Logic/Trigger Board and interfaces The Microboard will continue to establish communi-
the Control Center via a serial data communications cations until successful. Also, at power‑up, the Logic/
link and hardwired relay contacts. The Control Center Trigger Board reads wire jumpers in its connector J1
can be retrofit to earlier vintage chillers equipped with to determine the LCSSS model applied (refer to Solid
the previous version LCSSS that interfaces the Control State Starter (Mod “B”) – Operation and Maintenance
Center via a multiplexed data interface and hardwired (Form 160.00‑O2). If an invalid jumper configuration
relay contacts. The earlier vintage LCSSS houses the is read, the Logic/trigger Board initiates a Cycling
SCR assemblies and Trigger board; a separate Logic shutdown and LCSSS ‑ INVALID CURRENT SCALE
Board is located inside the Control Center. Microboard SELECTION is displayed on the System Details line
Program Jumper JP39 must be positioned to invoke of the Control Center Display. The model designation
the appropriate Microboard/Program operation for the is transmitted to the Microboard for display on the
starter applied (refer to Microboard 031-01730-000 MOTOR Screen. This designation determines the al-
Program Jumpers on page 28). lowable range for the Full Load Amps (FLA) Setpoint
and Start Current Setpoint. There are 4 LCSSS models:
Mod “B” Serial Interface LCSSS 7L, 14L, 26L and 33L. Each model has an allowable
Full Load Amps (FLA) range and Start Current range
A complete description, theory of operation and trou-
as listed below.
bleshooting instructions of this LCSSS are contained
in Solid State Starter (Mod “B”) – Operation and Communications between the Microboard and Logic/
Maintenance (Form 160.00‑O2). The following de- Trigger Board are in the form of master/slave. The
scribes the interface and interaction of the LCSSS with Microboard is the master and the Logic/Trigger Board
the Control Center. is the slave. The Logic/Trigger Board sends two types
of data to the Microboard: Status data and Fault data.
As shown in Figure 39 on page 87, the LCSSS con-
After successful initialization, the Microboard sends
tains a single Logic/Trigger printed circuit board. This
a data request every 2 seconds. Normally, the Logic/
board performs the following functions:
Trigger Board responds to each request. However, if
• Generates the SCR trigger pulses the Microboard does not receive a response to 10 con-
secutive requests, the Microboard initiates a Cycling
• Receives start/stop commands from the Microboard
shutdown and displays LCSSS ‑ SERIAL COMMU-
• Transmits status and fault data to the Microboard NICATIONS on the System Details line of the Control
• Generates all LCSSS initiated Safety and Cycling Center display. In addition, the Logic/Trigger Board
shutdowns. will initiate the same Cycling shutdown if it does not
receive a data request from the Microboard after 10
The Logic/Trigger Board is powered by +24VDC from successive attempts to send data.
the Control Center Power Supply. The Control Center
Microboard (J15) communicates with this board via a Anytime the Logic/Trigger Board initiates a Cycling
1200 baud 0/+5VDC serial data communications link. or Safety shutdown, it opens its STOP contacts that
If this communications link does not operate properly, are connected in series with the Control Center’s 1R
correct Microboard J15 serial port operation can be (K18) RUN relay coil. The contacts remain open as
verified using the Serial Inputs and Outputs diagnos- long as the condition exists. The open STOP contacts
tic procedure in SECTION 24 - DIAGNOSTICS AND interrupt the circuit to 1R causing it to de‑energize,
TROUBLESHOOTING of this manual. The STOP re- removing the run signal to the LCSSS. Simultane-
lay contacts on the Logic/Trigger Board assure a posi- ously, the Microboard reads the opening of the LCSSS
STOP contacts via the I/O Board J2‑ 1. This signals 12
tive shutdown on all LCSSS initiated shutdowns.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 85
FORM 160.80-M1
the Microboard that the LCSSS has initiated a shut- The following are the programmable setpoints asso-
down. The Logic/Trigger Board sends the cause of the ciated with the LCSSS. They are programmed on the
shutdown in response to the next data request. This is MOTOR Screen. Refer to programming instructions
logged on the HISTORY Screen as the LAST FAULT in the SECTION 23 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SER-
WHILE RUNNING. A snapshot of the LCSSS operat- VICE SETPOINTS AND RESET PROCEDURES of
ing parameters valid at the instant of the fault are also this manual.
sent. Any additional faults that occur within the 2 sec-
ond transmission time are also sent and logged on the • Full Load Amps ‑ This is the maximum allowed
HISTORY Screen under LAST TEN FAULTS. Refer motor current at which this chiller is permitted to
to YS Mod E – Operation and Maintenance (Form operate to achieve maximum design capacity. It is
160.80-O1) for description of all Cycling and Safety the Full Load Amps (FLA) of the chiller, as listed
shutdown messages. While this data is being sent, LC- on the SALES ORDER Screen. Each starter mod-
SSS ‑ SHUTDOWN ‑ REQUESTING FAULT DATA el has a permissible range over which this setpoint
is displayed on the System Details line of the Control can be programmed as follows:
Center display. If fault data is not returned within 2 sec- LCSSS MODEL PERMISSIBLE FLA
onds, the Microboard will continue to send a request 7L-46, 58 and 50 35 to 260 Amps
at 2 second intervals until the fault data is returned.
14L‑17, 28, 46, 58 and 50 65 to 510 Amps
If none is returned within 10 consecutive requests, it
26L‑17, 28, 46, 58 and 50 125 to 850 Amps
assumes it is not forthcoming and it displays LCSSS ‑
STOP CONTACTS OPEN on the System Details line 33L‑17, 28, 46 and 50 215 to 1050 Amps
of the display. • Start Current ‑ The Logic/Trigger Board will
The chiller can be started if there are no Safety and Cy- limit inrush motor current to this value during
cling conditions. If the temperature of any of the SCR starting. The programmed value is sent to the
modules are >110°F, the LCSSS cooling pump will run Logic/Trigger Board over the serial communica-
and the chiller will be inhibited from starting until the tions link. This setpoint should be programmed to
temperature has decreased below 109°F. While this (0.45 x motor Delta Locked Rotor Amps) as listed
start inhibit is in effect, LCSSS ‑ HIGH TEMPERA- on the SALES ORDER Screen. Each model start-
TURE PHASE X ‑ STOPPED (where X is phase A, er has a permissible range over which this setpoint
B, or C) is displayed on the System Details line of the can be programmed as follows:
display. When the chiller is started, the Control Cen- PERMISSIBLE START
ter sends two start signals simultaneously to the Logic/ LCSSS MODEL
CURRENT RANGE
Trigger Board. One is transmitted via the serial com- 7L-46, 58 and 50 310 to 700 Amps
munications link. The other is the closure of 1R (K18)
14L‑ 17, 28, 46, 58 and 50 620 to 1400 Amps
Start relay, applying 115VAC to Logic/Trigger Board
26L‑ 17, 28, 46, 58 and 50 1150 to 2600 Amps
TB1‑24. If these two signals are not received within 5
seconds of one another, the Logic/Trigger Board initi- 33L‑17, 28, 46 and 50 1460 to 3300 Amps
ates a cycling shutdown and LCSSS ‑ RUN SIGNAL • Supply Line Voltage Range ‑ This setpoint is
is displayed on the System Details line of the display. the line voltage application and establishes the
The Logic/Trigger Board transmits the following pa- high and low line voltage shutdown thresholds.
rameters over the serial communications link for dis- Shutdown and restart thresholds are contained in
play on the MOTOR Screen: YS Mod E – Operation and Maintenance (Form
160.80-O1) under the messages LCSSS ‑ LOW
• Three-phase motor current SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE and LCSSS ‑ HIGH
• Three-phase line‑to‑line motor supply voltage SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE.
• Input Power (kW) • Open SCR Enable/Disable ‑ This enables or dis-

ables the Open SCR detection Safety protection
• Three-phase SCR module temperature performed by the Logic/Trigger Board. This pro-
tection must never be disabled unless advised by
• Starter model designation
the YORK Factory.
86 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
• Kilowatt Hours (KWH) Reset ‑ This allows the Limit or Pulldown Demand Limit setpoint (30% to
accumulated KWH to be set to a desired starting 100% FLA) that is in effect. The Microboard calculates
value in the event the BRAM has to be field re- the “% Full Load Amps” (FLA) by dividing the high-
placed. This must never be arbitrarily performed. est phase of the 3‑phase motor current, received from
the Logic/Trigger Board, by the value programmed for
To assure the chiller is not permitted to run for ex-
the FULL LOAD AMPS setpoint. “% FULL LOAD
tended periods with the supply line voltage outside of
AMPS” is displayed on the MOTOR Screen. If the mo-
acceptable limits, the Logic/Trigger Board compares
tor current increases to the extent that the “% FULL
the actual 3-phase line voltage to the thresholds estab-
LOAD AMPS” reaches 100% of the Current Limit
lished with the Supply Line Voltage Range setpoint.
Setpoint, the slide valve is inhibited from further load-
Each supply voltage application has an allowable up-
ing until the motor current decreases to ≤98% of the
per and lower limit. If the supply voltage goes above
Current Limit setpoint. If the motor current increas-
or below these limits continuously for 20 seconds, the
es to the extent that the “% FULL LOAD AMPS” is
logic trigger Board initiates a Cycling shutdown and
104% of the Current Limit setpoint, the slide valve
displays LCSSS ‑ HIGH SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE or
will be unloaded until the “% FULL LOAD AMPS”
LCSSS ‑ LOW SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE as appro-
decreases to 102% of the Current Limit setpoint. The
priate. The chiller will automatically restart when the
slide valve loading will then be inhibited until the “%
line voltage is within the acceptable range.
FULL LOAD AMPS” decreases to ≤98% of the Cur-
While the chiller is running, the Microboard will un- rent Limit setpoint.
load or inhibit loading of the Slide Valve, as required,
to limit the compressor motor current to the Current
CONTROL CENTER SOLID STATE STARTER

J30 / P30
GND 5
POWER 6 6
J2 +24 VDC
SUPPLY
* 12 4
3
2
J15 1
3 GND
2 RX TB2
MICRO 1 TX
BOARD SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
LCSSS
LOGIC / TRIGGER
2 36 37 J19 BOARD
CONTROLLER
SHUTDOWNS
MOTOR
START
STOP
TB1
– TB6 –
J1 2 36 37 START / STOP 24
25 25 24
TB5
I/O TB1 TB6
STARTER (MOTOR CONTROLLER) INITIATED SHUTDOWN
BOARD 16 16 16
STOP CONTACTS
53 53
J2 1 1 115VAC
NOTE:
LD04648
9 – “CONDOR” Power Supply; 13 – “POWER ONE” Power Supply
Figure 39 - MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER (LCSSS) - INTERFACE 12
JOHNSON CONTROLS 87
FORM 160.80-M1
Mod “A” Multiplexed Data Interface LCSSS

A complete description, theory of operation and trou- As shown in Figure 40 on page 88, the Logic Board
bleshooting instructions of this LCSSS are contained of this model starter is mounted inside the Control
Solid State Starter (Mod “A”) – Operation and Main- Center.
tenance (Form 160.46‑OM3. 1).
300 / 600V
VOLTMETER
SCALE K1
JUMPER RELAY
J3
J6
J2
J5
J7
JUMPER
P1/J1
PLUG
CONN.
LOGIC
BOARD
INDI-
CATOR
LED’S
LD24672a
INTERLOCK R3 R2 R1 J4 START OVERLOAD RESET

JUMPER RESISTORS CURRENT CURRENT PUSHBUTTON
BETWEEN POT POT (SWI)
NO. 7 AND 8
PINS
Figure 40 - SOLID STATE STARTER LOGIC BOARD
88 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
This board provides Overload, Power Fault, Fault or Trig. OOL LED illuminates and remains illuminated
Current, Phase Rotation/Loss, and Half Phase Pro- until manually reset with the S1 RESET switch. The
tection for the Compressor Motor. It also receives SCR chiller will automatically restart when the contacts
High Temp and Trigger Out Of Lock (OOL) shutdown close.
signals from the Starter Trigger Board. Finally, it pro-
vides analog voltages representing Compressor Motor The Starter Trigger Board monitors the Starter’s Sili-
Current, Power Line Voltage, Current Limit commands con Controlled Rectifier (SCR) heatsink tempera-
and a Starter Model code to the Microboard. ture. Whenever the heatsink temperature increases
to 212°F, the Trigger Board signals the Logic Board.
The contacts of Logic Board relay K1 (identified as MOTOR CONTROLLER – CONTACTS OPEN is
“CM” contacts on the Control Center wiring diagram) displayed. The Logic Board illuminates the High
are interfaced into the Motor Controller initiated shut- Temp LED and opens Relay K1 contacts. The LED
down circuit that is located between Control Center remains illuminated and the contacts remain open
TB6-53 and I/O Board TB1-16 (refer to Figure 21 on until the temperature decreases to less than 110°F
page 57 and Figure 38 on page 84). They are also and manually reset with the Logic Board’s S1 RE-
connected as a digital input to I/O Board J2-1. Relay SET switch. After S1 is pressed, the chiller can be
K1 is normally energized, maintaining its contacts in restarted. In routine operation, each time the chiller is
a closed position. Whenever the Logic Board initiates shutdown for any reason, it is prevented from restart-
a chiller shutdown, it de-energizes K1, opening its ing until the heatsink temperature decreases to less
contacts. This interrupts the circuit to I/O Board RUN then 110°F. While it is waiting for the temperature to
relay coil 1R (K18), de-energizing it and causing the decrease to this threshold, the HIGH TEMP LED is il-
Starter to de-energize. Simultaneously, the Microboard luminated, Relay K1 contacts are open, and MOTOR
reads the opening of these contacts via I/O Board J2-1, CONTROLLER – CONTACTS OPEN is displayed.
initiates a SYSTEM LOCKOUT DELAY and displays When the temperature is below 110°F, K1 contacts
the appropriate message as described below. will open, the LED is extinguished, MOTOR CON-
TROLLER – CONTACTS OPEN message is cleared
When the Logic Board detects an Overload condi- and the chiller will automatically restart.
tion, Relay K1 contacts open and the Overload LED
illuminates. MOTOR CONTROLLER – CONTACTS The Multiplexer (MUX) is an electronic switch with
OPEN is displayed. The contacts remain open and the 8 inputs and 1 output. The address applied to it de-
LED remains illuminated until manually reset with the termines the position of the switch and therefore the
Logic Board’s S1 RESET switch. After S1 is pressed, output. Under Program control, the Microboard se-
the chiller can be restarted. quentially addresses MUX channels 0 through 7. The
voltage output of each channel is listed in the table be-
When a Power Fault, Fault Current or Half Phase low. Channel 0 is an analog voltage that represents the
condition is detected, Relay K1 contacts open for 1 Starter model and Power Line voltage Voltmeter scale.
second and then close. The Power Fault LED illumi- The Program uses this value to limit the Full Load
nates and will remain illuminated until manually reset Amps Setpoint range to the maximum allowed value
with the S1 Reset switch. Power Fault is displayed. At for the Starter size. This value also determines the Line
the completion of SYSTEM LOCKOUT DELAY, the Voltage display range and Motor current display range.
chiller will automatically restart. Channel 1 is a current limit command that forces the
When a Power line Phase Rotation/Loss or Trigger Micro to perform slide valve inhibit and unload at the
Board Out of Lock (OOL) condition is detected, Relay 100% and 104% FLA. This command is in addition
K1 contacts open and remain open for as long as the to the Micro’s software current limit feature that’s
condition exists. If the contacts remain open for more based on a calculation comparing the highest current
than 3 seconds, MOTOR CONTROLLER – CON- phase to the programmed Full Load Amp Setpoint to
TACTS OPEN is displayed; if less than 3 seconds, arrive at an FLA Percentage. Channels 2 though 4 are
Power Fault is displayed. The respective Ph. Rot/Loss analog voltages representing Phase C, B and A Power
12
JOHNSON CONTROLS 89
FORM 160.80-M1
Line Voltages. Channels 5 through 7 are analog volt-

ages representing Phase A, B and C Compressor Motor
Current. The addresses are +12VDC for logic high (1).
<1VDC for logic low (0).
The Logic Board MUX address inputs, along with the
respective outputs are as follows:
Table 6 - LOGIC BOARD MUX
BINARY
DECIMAL OUTPUT
J6-1 J6-2 J6-3
Starter Model/Voltmeter/Ammeter full scale, max FLA:
0.41 to 0.77VDC – 7L, 600VAC, max FLA 281, full scale 787A
0 0 0 0
Current Limit commands
3.46 to 5.00VDC – <98% FLA
0 0 1 1
1.21 to 3.45VDC – ≥100% FLA
0.0 to 1.20VDC – ≥104% FLA
Phase “C” AC Power Line voltage as follows:
300VAC scale = VDC(out) = VAC
0 1 0 2 67.9
600VAC scale = VDC(out) = VAC
135.8
0 1 1 3 Phase “B” AC Power Line voltage. Same as Phase “C” above.
1 0 0 4 Phase “A” AC Power Line voltage Same as Phase “C” above.
1 0 1 5 Phase “A” Compressor Motor Current. 0 to +5VDC spanning range in address 0 above.
1 1 0 6 Phase “B” Compressor Motor Current. 0 to +5VDC spanning range in address 0 above.
1 1 1 7 Phase “C” Compressor Motor Current. 0 to +5VDC spanning range in address 0 above.
90 JOHNSON CONTROLS
CONTROL CENTER SOLID STATE STARTER
J/P-30
GND
FORM 160.80-M1
POWER 6 6 1
SUPPLY J2 J3
+24VDC
JOHNSON CONTROLS
12 2
*
ADDRESS (2 2 )
1 1
MICRO 1
ADDRESS (2 )
BOARD 2 2
ADDRESS (2 0 )
3 3
J6 J6
+5VDC
4 4
GND.
5 5
MULTIPLEXED DATA
6 6
J19
2 36 37 L.C.S.S.S
LOGIC PCB
TB6
(031-00936)
TB5
2 36 37
25 25 24 3
J1 J2
J1-2 = MOTOR CONTROLLER SHUTDOWN
TB1
J1-36 = STOP STARTER (MOTOR CONTROLLER) INITIATED SHUTDOWN
J1-37 = START 16 16 1
J2 53 STOP
2 CONTACTS
1 1 115VAC
I/O BOARD
TB6
Figure 41 - MOD “A” LIQUID COOLED SOLID STATE STARTER (LCSSS) - INTERFACE
LD04649
NOTES:
* 9 on “CONDOR” Power Supply

13 on “POWER ONE” Power Supply
91
12
FORM 160.80-M1
LD04083
Figure 42 - MOD “A” SOLID STATE STARTER LOGIC BOARD
92 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 13 - VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL 13
A solenoid valve (2SOL), located in a line parallel with or 27.0 PSIG (R134a), DELTA P control is overridden
the refrigerant orifice, is opened and closed to create and the solenoid valve is opened. While this condi-
a variable orifice. Opening the parallel line allows a tion is in effect, WARNING - EVAPORATOR – LOW
greater refrigerant flow to the evaporator. The solenoid PRESSURE LIMIT is displayed and the Low Evapo-
valve is driven from the I/O Board TB1-29. Under Pro- rator Pressure Override LED is illuminated on the
gram control, it is energized to open the parallel line Variable Orifice Control Screen. The solenoid will re-
and de-energized to close the parallel line. main open until the Low Pressure limit condition is no
longer in effect (≥ 57.5 PSIG R22; ≥ 28.0 PSIG R134a,
When the chiller is not running, the solenoid valve whereupon the Low Pressure override is released.
is opened during the 2-minute SYSTEM LOCKOUT
DELAY, closed thereafter. During run, the Solenoid If the Discharge Superheat (Discharge temp – Con-
Valve is primarily controlled by DELTA P control. denser Saturation temp) is < 15.0°F (R22) or < 10.0°F
However, Low Evaporator Pressure and Discharge Su- (R134a), DELTA P control or any Low Evaporator
perheat conditions can override DELTA P control as Pressure override (as explained above) that is in effect
explained below. is overridden and the solenoid valve is closed. While
this condition is in effect, the Superheat Override
During run, the solenoid valve is opened and closed LED is illuminated. The solenoid valve will remain
per the DELTA P Setpoint that has been programmed closed until the Discharge Superheat increases to ≥
by a qualified Service Technician. The setpoint is pro- 20.0°F (R22) or ≥ 15.0°F (R134a), whereupon the Dis-
grammed over the range of 25 to 150 PSIG (R22) or 15 charge Superheat override is released.
to 110 PSIG (R134a). The system Delta P is the differ-
ential between the condenser and evaporator pressure, The Variable Orifice Control Screen, accessed from
calculated as Delta P = condenser pressure – evapora- the CONDENSER Screen in SERVICE access level,
tor pressure. If the system Delta P decreases to ≤ the displays all of the applicable Variable Orifice control
DELTA P setpoint, the solenoid valve is opened. It parameters and allows a Service technician to program
will remain open until the system Delta P increases to the DELTA P Setpoint. The Low Evaporator Pres-
(DELTA P Setpoint + 10), whereupon it will close. sure and Superheat Override LEDs are located on this
screen.
If the evaporator pressure decreases to the Low Evapo-
rator Pressure Warning threshold of 56.2 PSIG (R22)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 93
FORM 160.80-M1
94 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 14 - E-LINK GATEWAY
The complete description of the E-Link Gateway in- must be set to BAS (ISN) on the OPERATIONS
stallation and operation is contained in YORK form Screen. Otherwise, communications will take place in
450.20-NOM1. any Control Source mode.
14
The E-Link Gateway is an optional printed circuit In operation, the Microboard provides chiller pres-
board that provides an interface between the OptiV- sures, temperatures and status to the E-Link Gate-
iew Control Center and YORK BAS (ISN) (Integrated way in response to requests from the E-Link Gate-
Systems Network) or other selected networks. It can way. Microboard status LEDs illuminate when the
be mounted on the upper corner of the left wall of the Microboard transmits and receives data on COM 4B.
OptiView Control Center or in its own enclosure in a Green LED CR13 (RX4) illuminates when data is be-
remote location. ing received from the E-Link Gateway. Red LED CR12
(TX4) illuminates when data is being transmitted to the
If installed in the OptiView Control Center, the E-Link E-Link Gateway. Similar LEDs on the E-Link Gate-
Gateway is powered by +12VDC from the Microboard. way annunciate data transfer to/from the Microboard
The E-Link Gateway communicates with the (refer to ISN-II MicroGateway (Form 450.20-NOM1)
Microboard COM 4B communications port via an RS- for more information).
232 interface (refer to Figure 43 on page 95). As If there is a communications problem between the
shown in Figure 9 on page 32, Microboard Program Microboard and E-Link Gateway, use the LEDs de-
Jumper JP 27 must be placed on pins 2 and 3 to allow scribed above to analyze the problem. The COM 4B
data to be received from the E-Link Gateway. LoopBack test can be used to verify operation of the
Microboard COM 4B communications port. Refer
If the remote device that is connected to the E-Link
to SECTION 24 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLE-
Gateway is going to provide remote Start-Stop signals,
SHOOTING of this manual.
remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature and/or re-
mote Current Limit Setpoint resets, the Control Source
E-LINK GATEWAY
J2 TB4
GTX 7 TX
1 RX2
GRX 6 RX
2 TX2
9 TB1
+
J21 J1 2 TO ISN
+ 12VDC RS-485 -
1 3 LAN
1
GND
2 2 4
MICROBOARD
LD06484
Figure 43 - E-LINK GATEWAY INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM
JOHNSON CONTROLS 95
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 14 - E-LINK GATEWAY
96 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 15 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
System pressures are sensed by Pressure Transducers. the differential value are compared to determine the
There are different transducers used to sense the vari- offset between them. Since system pressures should
ous system pressures. The actual transducer used is de- be equalized during this period, both transducers will
termined by the required pressure range and refrigerant be sensing the same pressure and their outputs should
application. The operation of the various transducers is indicate the same pressure. However, due to accuracy
identical. The difference between them is simply the tolerances in transducer design, differences can ex- 15
pressure range over which they operate. Each of the dif- ist. Therefore, to compensate for differences between
ferent transducers has a different YORK part number. transducers and assure differential pressure accuracy,
Figure 44 on page 99 lists the transducers and the this offset is added or subtracted from the actual dif-
application of each one. The Transducers are as follows: ferential pressure, at completion of the Auto-zeroing
period, to produce the displayed PSID value. The dis-
PRESSURE PRESSURE played differential value is the actual differential value
LOCATION
TRANSDUCER SENSED plus or minus the offset that existed during the Auto-
Evaporator Evaporator Evaporator zeroing period. For example, if the Oil Pressure Trans-
Condenser Condenser Condenser ducer indicates 1.0 PSIG greater than the Evaporator
Filter Oil Separator Oil Filter Input Transducer during the Auto-zeroing period, then 1.0
Compressor oil PSIG will be subtracted from the displayed PSID value
Oil Compressor SB-2 input / Oil Filter during “System Run”. Similarly, if the Oil Pressure
output Transducer indicates 1.0 PSIG less than the Evaporator
Seal Oil Compressor SB-3 Seal oil Transducer during this period, then 1.0 PSIG is added
to the displayed value during “System Run”.
The output of each transducer is displayed on the ap-
propriate screen as a discrete pressure value in terms of The Auto Zeroing feature can be Enabled or Disabled
PSIG (pounds per square inch gauge) in English mode following a procedure in SECTION 23 - SYSTEM
or KpaG (Kilo Pascals) in Metric mode. In addition, CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND RESET
some pressure values are subtracted from other pres- PROCEDURES of this manual. Normally, the Auto
sure values to create “differential” pressures displayed Zeroing feature should be Enabled. However, certain
as PSID (pounds per square inch differential, in either local conditions could require the Auto-Zeroing feature
PSIG or KpaG). These differential pressures are as fol- be disabled. For example, standby chillers, configured
lows: in series or parallel piping arrangements, can experi-
ence large evaporator/condenser pressure differentials
“Differential Oil Pressure” = while not running. This differential is created by the
Oil Pressure – Evaporator Pressure cold evaporator chilled liquid and/or warm condenser
“Differential Filter pressure” = water from the running chiller flowing through the
standby chiller. The existence of this differential during
Filter Oil Pressure – Oil Pressure
the Auto Zeroing period produce large artificial offsets
“Differential Seal Pressure” = that are not a result of transducer tolerances. Therefore,
Seal Oil Pressure – Evaporator Pressure in these installations, the Auto Zeroing should be Dis-
abled.
To compensate for transducer differences and assure
differential pressure accuracy, the transducers that The Evaporator and Condenser pressures are converted
are involved in the creation of a differential value are to Saturation Temperatures per the appropriate refrig-
compared in a process called Auto-Zeroing. During erant pressure/temperature conversion table contained
the first 15 seconds of the “Start Sequence Initiated” in the Program. These Saturation Temperatures are dis-
period, the output of both transducers that are creating played and used for Chiller control.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 97
FORM 160.80-M1
The transducers output a 0.5 to 4.5VDC voltage that is 21 (signal) to J8-22 (Gnd). To convert this output to a
analogous to the pressure applied to the device. These pressure, refer to the appropriate formula in Figure 44
outputs are applied to the Microboard, where this volt- on page 99. If the pressure is known, the transducer
age is interpreted as a pressure value. The Program output can be predicted with the appropriate formula in
converts the transducer output voltage to a pressure Figure 44 on page 99.
value with the appropriate formula in Figure 44 on
page 99. The pressures are displayed and used for New production chillers are equipped with the Seal
Chiller control and Safety shutdowns. Oil Pressure Transducer. Previous vintage chillers,
such as those encountered in retrofit applications are
The transducers operate from a +5VDC power source. not equipped with this transducer. Therefore, Seal Oil
This supply voltage is provided from the Power supply Pressure Transducer operation must be Enabled or Dis-
via the Microboard. Each transducer is connected to abled as required for the application. This procedure
the Microboard with three wires. Two wires provide is in SECTION 23 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SER-
the +5VDC supply voltage and Ground (Gnd) and the VICE SETPOINTS AND RESET PROCEDURES of
remaining wire connects the transducer output to the this manual.
Microboard. The voltage output of each transducer can
be measured with a Voltmeter at the Microboard. Mea- If any of the displayed pressures do not appear to be
surement should be made from the transducer output correct, refer to SECTION 24 - DIAGNOSTICS AND
to Ground (Gnd). For example, the output of the Con- TROUBLESHOOTING of this manual.
denser transducer would be read from Microboard J8-
98 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 160.80-M1
MAX ALLOWABLE DEVIATION

FROM NOMINAL OUTPUT

+ 150
FROM NOMINAL OUTPUT

+ 133 + 100
+ 116 + 88
(MILLIVOLTS)
(MILLIVOLTS)
+ 75
+ 44
0 150 225 300
50 59.38 87.5 106.25 125 0.500 2.500 3.500 4.500
0.500 1.00 2.500 3.500 4.500 PRESSURE (PSIG)
15
PRESSURE (PSIG) NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
EVAPORATOR TRANSDUCER PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

(R22 WATER APPLICATIONS) YORK PART NO. 025-28678-006
YORK PART NO. 025-28678-113
V = (P x 4) - 162.5 P = (75 x V) + 162.5 V = P + 37.5 P = (75 x V) - 37.5

75 4 75
V = VOLTS DC P = PRESSURE (PSIG) LD04994 V = VOLTS DC P = PRESSURE (PSIG) LD04995

+ 150
FROM NOMINAL OUTPUT
+ 130
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER APPLICATIONS CHART
(MILLIVOLTS)
+ 110
TRANSDUCER R22 APPLICATION
FUNCTION
+ 44 PART NUMBER WATER BRINE
Condenser, Oil,
25.0 43.7 62.5 81.25 100 025-28678-006 X X
0.500 1.500 2.500 3.500 4.500 Filter, Seal
PRESSURE (PSIG) 025-28678-113 Evaporator X
025-28678-114 Evaporator X
EVAPORATOR TRANSDUCER R134a
(R22 BRINE APPLICATIONS) Condenser, Oil
YORK PART NO. 025-28678-114 025-28678-006 X X
Filter, Seal
025-28678-112 Evaporator X X
V = P - 15.6 P = 18.75 x V + 15.6
18.75
V = VOLTS DC P = PRESSURE (PSIG) LD04996

+ 150
FROM NOMINAL OUTPUT
(MILLIVOLTS)
+ 30
All transducers have straight
6 31.5 74
0.500 2.000 4.500 threads with neoprene O-rings.
PRESSURE (PSIG)
EVAPORATOR TRANSDUCER
R134a WATER & BRINE APPLICATIONS
YORK PART NO. 025-28678-112
V = P + 2.5 P = (17 x V) - 2.5

17
V = VOLTS DC P = PRESSURE (PSIG) LD04102
Figure 44 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 99
FORM 160.80-M1
100 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 16 - TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS
System temperatures are sensed by Thermistors. Each thermistor is connected to the Microboard with
There are two different thermistor types used to sense two wires. One wire supplies the +5VDC voltage and
the various system temperatures. Each type has its own the other is the output of the thermistor. This output
YORK part number. Part numbers are listed in Re- voltage can be measured with a Voltmeter. Measure-
newal Parts – OptiView Control Center (Form 160.80- ment should be made from the thermistor output to
RP3). The Return and Leaving Chilled Water, Return Ground (Gnd). For example, the Leaving Chilled Liq-
and Leaving Condenser Water, Condenser Liquid, and uid Temperature would be read from Microboard J9-
Evaporator Refrigerant Temperatures are sensed by 3K 20 (output) to Microboard TP1 (Gnd). To convert this
Ohm thermistors. The Oil and Compressor Discharge voltage to a pressure, refer to the appropriate volts/
temperatures are sensed by 50K Ohm thermistors. temp chart as follows: 16
The 3K Ohm thermistors are defined by the character- • Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature – Table 7 on
istic of being 3000 Ohms at 77°F (25°C). Similarly, page 102
the 50K Ohm thermistors are 50,000 Ohms at the same
• Return Chilled Liquid Temperature – Table 8 on
temperature. Both thermistor types vary their resis-
page 107
tance as the sensed temperature varies. Both are nega-
tive temperature coefficient devices. That is, as the • Leaving and Return Condenser Liquid Tempera-
temperature increases, the resistance decreases. As the ture – Table 9 on page 110
temperature decreases, the resistance increases.
• Oil and Discharge Temperature – Table 10 on
The thermistors are connected to the Microboard. A page 113
+5VDC supply voltage is applied to one side of the
• Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature – Table 11 on
thermistor. The other side of the thermistor is connected
page 118
to Ground through a series resistor on the Microboard,
thus forming a voltage divider network. The tempera- If any of the displayed pressures do not appear to be
ture applied to the thermistor determines the resistance correct, refer to SECTION 24 - DIAGNOSTICS AND
value. The resistance value determines the amount of TROUBLESHOOTING of this manual.
current that will flow through the thermistor and thus
the voltage drop across it. The Program reads this volt-
age at the input to the Microboard and converts it to a
temperature value.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 101

FORM 160.80-M1
Table 7 - LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE
TEMP (°F) TEMP (°C) VIN TEMP (°F) TEMP (°C) VIN TEMP (°F) TEMP (°C) VIN
9.90 -12.28 1.4280 14.67 -9.63 1.5804 19.26 -7.08 1.7329
10.00 -12.22 1.4310 14.76 -9.58 1.5835 19.36 -7.02 1.7359
10.09 -12.17 1.4341 14.85 -9.53 1.5865 19.45 -6.97 1.7390
10.19 -12.12 1.4371 14.95 -9.47 1.5896 19.54 -6.92 1.7420
10.29 -12.06 1.4402 15.04 -9.42 1.5926 19.63 -6.87 1.7451
10.39 -12.01 1.4432 15.13 -9.37 1.5957 19.72 -6.82 1.7481
10.48 -11.96 1.4463 15.22 -9.32 1.5987 19.81 -6.77 1.7512
10.58 -11.90 1.4493 15.32 -9.27 1.6018 19.90 -6.72 1.7542
10.68 -11.85 1.4423 15.41 -9.22 1.6048 19.99 -6.67 1.7573
10.77 -11.80 1.4554 15.50 -9.17 1.6079 20.08 -6.62 1.7603
10.87 -11.74 1.4584 15.60 -9.11 1.6109 20.17 -6.57 1.7634
10.97 -11.68 1.4615 15.69 -9.06 1.6140 20.26 -6.52 1.7664
11.06 -11.63 1.4645 15.78 -9.01 1.6170 20.35 -6.47 1.7695
11.16 -11.58 1.4676 15.87 -8.96 1.6201 20.44 -6.42 1.7725
11.25 -11.53 1.4706 15.97 -8.91 1.6231 20.53 -6.37 1.7756
11.35 -11.47 1.4737 16.06 -8.86 1.6262 20.62 -6.32 1.7786
11.45 -11.42 1.4767 16.15 -8.81 1.6292 20.71 -6.27 1.7817
11.54 -11.37 1.4798 16.24 -8.76 1.6322 20.80 -6.22 1.7847
11.64 -11.31 1.4828 16.34 -8.70 1.6353 20.89 -6.17 1.7878
11.73 -11.26 1.4859 16.43 -8.65 1.6383 20.98 -6.12 1.7908
11.83 -11.21 1.4889 16.52 -8.60 1.6414 21.07 -6.07 1.7939
11.93 -11.15 1.4920 16.61 -8.55 1.6444 21.16 -6.02 1.7969
12.02 -11.10 1.4950 16.70 -8.50 1.6475 21.25 -5.97 1.8000
12.12 -11.05 1.4981 16.80 -8.45 1.6505 21.34 -5.92 1.8030
12.21 -11.00 1.5011 16.89 -8.40 1.6536 21.43 -5.87 1.8060
12.31 -10.94 1.5042 16.98 -8.35 1.6566 21.52 -5.82 1.8091
12.40 -10.89 1.5072 17.07 -8.30 1.6597 21.61 -5.77 1.8121
12.50 -10.83 1.5103 17.16 -8.25 1.6627 21.70 -5.72 1.8152
12.59 -10.78 1.5133 17.26 -8.19 1.6658 21.79 -5.67 1.8182
12.69 -10.73 1.5164 17.35 -8.14 1.6688 21.88 -5.62 1.8213
12.78 -10.68 1.5194 17.44 -8.09 1.6719 21.97 -5.57 1.8243
12.88 -10.62 1.5225 17.53 -8.04 1.6749 22.06 -5.52 1.8274
12.97 -10.57 1.5255 17.63 -7.98 1.6780 22.15 -5.47 1.8304
13.07 -10.52 1.5286 17.72 -7.93 1.6810 22.24 -5.42 1.8335
13.16 -10.47 1.5316 17.81 -7.88 1.6841 22.33 -5.37 1.8365
13.26 -10.41 1.5347 17.90 -7.83 1.6871 22.42 -5.32 1.8396
13.35 -10.36 1.5377 17.99 -7.78 1.6902 22.51 -5.27 1.8426
13.45 -10.31 1.5408 18.08 -7.73 1.6932 22.60 -5.22 1.8457
13.54 -10.26 1.5438 18.17 -7.68 1.6963 22.69 -5.17 1.8487
13.64 -10.20 1.5469 18.26 -7.63 1.6993 22.78 -5.12 1.8518
13.73 -10.15 1.5499 18.35 -7.58 1.7024 22.87 -5.07 1.8548
13.83 -10.10 1.5530 18.44 -7.53 1.7054 22.96 -5.02 1.8579
13.92 -10.05 1.5560 18.54 -7.48 1.7085 23.04 -4.98 1.8609
14.01 -10.00 1.5591 18.63 -7.43 1.7115 23.13 -4.93 1.8640
14.11 -9.94 1.5621 18.72 -7.38 1.7146 23.22 -4.88 1.8670
14.20 -9.89 1.5652 18.81 -7.33 1.7176 23.31 -4.83 1.8701
14.29 -9.84 1.5682 18.90 -7.28 1.7207 23.40 -4.78 1.8731
14.39 -9.78 1.5713 18.99 -7.23 1.7237 23.49 -4.73 1.8762
14.48 -9.73 1.5743 19.08 -7.18 1.7268 23.58 -4.68 1.8792
14.57 -9.68 1.5774 19.17 -7.13 1.7298 23.67 -4.63 1.8823

FORM 160.80-M1
TABLE 7 - LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE (CONT’D)
23.75 -4.58 1.8853 28.17 -2.13 2.0378 32.54 0.30 2.1902
23.84 -4.53 1.8884 28.25 -2.08 2.0408 32.63 0.35 2.1933
23.93 -4.48 1.8914 28.34 -2.03 2.0439 32.72 0.40 2.1963
24.02 -4.43 1.8945 28.43 -1.98 2.0469 32.81 0.45 2.1994
24.11 -4.38 1.8975 28.52 -1.93 2.0500 32.89 0.49 2.2024
24.20 -4.33 1.9006 28.61 -1.88 2.0530 32.98 0.54 2.2055
24.29 -4.28 1.9036 28.69 -1.84 2.0561 33.07 0.59 2.2085
24.37 -4.24 1.9067 28.78 -1.79 2.0591 33.16 0.64 2.2116
24.46 -4.19 1.9097 28.87 -1.74 2.0622 33.24 0.69 2.2146
24.55 -4.14 1.9128 28.96 -1.69 2.0652 33.33 0.74 2.2177 16
24.64 -4.09 1.9158 29.04 -1.64 2.0683 33.42 0.79 2.2207
24.73 -4.04 1.9189 29.13 -1.59 2.0713 33.51 0.84 2.2238
24.82 -3.99 1.9219 29.22 -1.54 2.0744 33.59 0.88 2.2268
24.91 -3.94 1.9250 29.31 -1.49 2.0774 33.68 0.93 2.2299
24.99 -3.89 1.9280 29.39 -1.45 2.0805 33.77 0.98 2.2329
25.08 -3.84 1.9311 29.48 -1.40 2.0835 33.86 1.03 2.2360
25.17 -3.79 1.9341 29.57 -1.35 2.0866 33.94 1.08 2.2390
25.26 -3.74 1.9372 29.66 -1.30 2.0896 34.03 1.13 2.2421
25.35 -3.69 1.9402 29.75 -1.25 2.0927 34.12 1.18 2.2451
25.43 -3.65 1.9433 29.83 -1.21 2.0957 34.21 1.23 2.2482
25.52 -3.60 1.9463 29.92 -1.16 2.0988 34.29 1.27 2.2512
25.61 -3.55 1.9494 30.01 -1.11 2.1018 34.38 1.32 2.2543
25.70 -3.50 1.9524 30.10 -1.06 2.1049 34.47 1.37 2.2573
25.79 -3.45 1.9555 30.18 -1.01 2.1079 34.56 1.42 2.2604
25.87 -3.41 1.9585 30.27 -0.96 2.1110 34.64 1.47 2.2634
25.96 -3.36 1.9616 30.36 -0.91 2.1140 34.73 1.52 2.2665
26.05 -3.31 1.9646 30.45 -0.86 2.1171 34.82 1.57 2.2695
26.14 -3.26 1.9677 30.53 -0.82 2.1201 34.91 1.62 2.2726
26.23 -3.21 1.9707 30.62 -0.77 2.1232 34.99 1.66 2.2756
26.31 -3.16 1.9738 30.71 -0.72 2.1262 35.08 1.71 2.2787
26.40 -3.11 1.9768 30.79 -0.67 2.1293 35.17 1.76 2.2817
26.49 -3.06 1.9798 30.88 -0.62 2.1323 35.26 1.81 2.2848
26.58 -3.01 1.9829 30.97 -0.57 2.1354 35.34 1.86 2.2878
26.67 -2.96 1.9859 31.06 -0.52 2.1384 35.43 1.91 2.2909
26.76 -2.91 1.9890 31.14 -0.48 2.1415 35.52 1.96 2.2939
26.84 -2.87 1.9920 31.23 -0.43 2.1445 35.51 1.95 2.2970
26.93 -2.82 1.9951 31.32 -0.38 2.1476 35.70 2.06 2.3000
27.02 -2.77 1.9981 31.41 -0.33 2.1506 35.78 2.10 2.3031
27.11 -2.72 2.0012 31.49 -0.28 2.1536 35.87 2.15 2.3061
27.20 -2.67 2.0042 31.58 -0.23 2.1567 35.96 2.20 2.3092
27.28 -2.62 2.0073 31.67 -0.18 2.1597 36.05 2.25 2.3122
27.37 -2.57 2.0103 31.76 -0.13 2.1628 36.13 2.29 2.3153
27.46 -2.52 2.0134 31.84 -0.09 2.1658 36.22 2.34 2.3183
27.55 -2.47 2.0164 31.93 -0.04 2.1689 36.31 2.39 2.3214
27.64 -2.42 2.0195 32.02 0.01 2.1719 36.40 2.44 2.3244
27.73 -2.37 2.0225 32.10 0.06 2.1750 36.48 2.49 2.3274
27.81 -2.33 2.0256 32.19 0.11 2.1780 36.57 2.54 2.3305
27.90 -2.28 2.0286 32.28 0.16 2.1811 36.66 2.59 2.3335
27.99 -2.23 2.0317 32.37 0.21 2.1841 36.75 2.64 2.3366
28.08 -2.18 2.0347 32.45 0.25 2.1872 36.83 2.68 2.3396

FORM 160.80-M1

36.92 2.73 2.3427 41.33 5.18 2.4952 45.82 7.68 2.6476
37.01 2.78 2.3457 41.42 5.23 2.4982 45.91 7.73 2.6507
37.10 2.83 2.3488 41.51 5.28 2.5012 46.00 7.78 2.6537
37.18 2.88 2.3518 41.60 5.33 2.5043 46.09 7.83 2.6568
37.27 2.93 2.3549 41.69 5.38 2.5073 46.18 7.88 2.6598
37.36 2.98 2.3579 41.78 5.43 2.5104 46.27 7.93 2.6629
37.45 3.03 2.3610 41.87 5.48 2.5134 46.36 7.98 2.6659
37.54 3.08 2.3640 41.96 5.53 2.5165 46.45 8.03 2.6690
37.62 3.12 2.3671 42.05 5.58 2.5195 46.55 8.08 2.6720
37.71 3.17 2.3701 42.14 5.63 2.5226 46.64 8.13 2.6751
37.80 3.22 2.3732 42.23 5.68 2.5256 46.73 8.18 2.6781
37.89 3.27 2.3762 42.31 5.73 2.5287 46.82 8.23 2.6811
37.98 3.32 2.3793 42.40 5.78 2.5317 46.91 8.28 2.6842
38.07 3.37 2.3823 42.49 5.83 2.5348 47.00 8.33 2.6872
38.15 3.42 2.3854 42.58 5.88 2.5378 47.09 8.38 2.6903
38.24 3.47 2.3884 42.67 5.93 2.5409 47.18 8.43 2.6933
38.33 3.52 2.3915 42.76 5.98 2.5439 47.27 8.48 2.6964
38.42 3.57 2.3945 42.85 6.03 2.5470 47.36 8.53 2.6994
38.51 3.62 2.3976 42.94 6.08 2.5500 47.45 8.58 2.7025
38.60 3.67 2.4006 43.03 6.13 2.5531 47.55 8.64 2.7055
38.69 3.72 2.4037 43.12 6.18 2.5561 47.64 8.69 2.7086
38.77 3.76 2.4067 43.21 6.23 2.5592 47.73 8.74 2.7116
38.86 3.81 2.4098 43.30 6.28 2.5622 47.82 8.79 2.7147
38.95 3.86 2.4128 43.39 6.33 2.5653 47.91 8.84 2.7177
39.04 3.91 2.4159 43.48 6.38 2.5683 48.00 8.89 2.7208
39.13 3.96 2.4189 43.57 6.43 2.5714 48.09 8.94 2.7238
39.22 4.01 2.4220 43.65 6.47 2.5744 48.18 8.99 2.7269
39.30 4.06 2.4250 43.74 6.52 2.5775 48.27 9.04 2.7299
39.39 4.11 2.4281 43.83 6.57 2.5805 48.37 9.10 2.7330
39.48 4.16 2.4311 43.92 6.62 2.5836 48.46 9.15 2.7360
39.57 4.21 2.4342 44.01 6.67 2.5866 48.55 9.20 2.7391
39.66 4.26 2.4372 44.10 6.72 2.5897 48.64 9.25 2.7421
39.74 4.30 2.4403 44.19 6.77 2.5927 48.74 9.30 2.7452
39.83 4.35 2.4433 44.28 6.82 2.5958 48.83 9.35 2.7482
39.92 4.40 2.4464 44.37 6.87 2.5988 48.92 9.40 2.7513
40.01 4.45 2.4494 44.46 6.92 2.6019 49.01 9.45 2.7543
40.10 4.50 2.4525 44.55 6.97 2.6049 49.11 9.51 2.7574
40.19 4.55 2.4555 44.64 7.02 2.6080 49.20 9.56 2.7604
40.27 4.59 2.4586 44.73 7.07 2.6110 49.29 9.61 2.7635
40.36 4.64 2.4616 44.82 7.12 2.6141 49.38 9.66 2.7665
40.45 4.69 2.4647 44.91 7.17 2.6171 49.48 9.71 2.7696
40.54 4.74 2.4677 45.00 7.22 2.6202 49.57 9.76 2.7726
40.63 4.79 2.4708 45.09 7.27 2.6232 49.66 9.81 2.7757
40.71 4.84 2.4738 45.18 7.32 2.6263 49.75 9.86 2.7787
40.80 4.89 2.4769 45.27 7.37 2.6293 49.84 9.91 2.7818
40.89 4.94 2.4799 45.36 7.42 2.6324 49.94 9.97 2.7848
40.98 4.99 2.4830 45.46 7.48 2.6354 50.03 10.02 2.7879
41.07 5.04 2.4860 45.55 7.53 2.6385 50.12 10.07 2.7909
41.16 5.09 2.4891 45.64 7.58 2.6415 50.22 10.12 2.7940
41.24 5.13 2.4921 45.73 7.63 2.6446 50.31 10.17 2.7970

FORM 160.80-M1

50.40 10.22 2.8001 55.12 12.85 2.9525 60.05 15.58 3.1050
50.50 10.28 2.8031 55.22 12.90 2.9556 60.15 15.64 3.1080
50.59 10.33 2.8062 55.32 12.96 2.9586 60.25 15.70 3.1111
50.68 10.38 2.8092 55.41 13.01 2.9617 60.36 15.76 3.1141
50.78 10.43 2.8123 55.51 13.06 2.9647 60.46 15.81 3.1172
50.87 10.48 2.8153 55.61 13.12 2.9678 60.56 15.87 3.1202
50.96 10.53 2.8184 55.70 13.17 2.9708 60.66 15.92 3.1233
51.06 10.59 2.8214 55.80 13.22 2.9739 60.76 15.98 3.1263
51.15 10.64 2.8245 55.90 13.28 2.9769 60.86 16.03 3.1294
51.24 10.69 2.8275 56.00 13.33 2.9800 60.96 16.09 3.1324 16
51.34 10.75 2.8306 56.09 13.38 2.9830 61.06 16.15 3.1355
51.43 10.80 2.8336 56.19 13.44 2.9861 61.17 16.21 3.1385
51.52 10.85 2.8367 56.29 13.50 2.9891 61.27 16.26 3.1416
51.62 10.90 2.8397 56.39 13.55 2.9922 61.37 16.32 3.1446
51.71 10.95 2.8428 56.48 13.60 2.9952 61.47 16.37 3.1477
51.80 11.00 2.8458 56.58 13.66 2.9983 61.57 16.43 3.1507
51.90 11.06 2.8458 56.68 13.71 3.0013 61.67 16.48 3.1538
51.99 11.11 2.8519 56.78 13.77 3.0044 61.78 16.55 3.1568
52.09 11.16 2.8549 56.87 13.82 3.0074 61.88 16.60 3.1599
52.18 11.21 2.8580 56.97 13.87 3.0105 61.98 16.66 3.1629
52.28 11.27 2.8610 57.07 13.93 3.0135 62.08 16.71 3.1660
52.37 11.32 2.8641 57.17 13.98 3.0166 62.18 16.77 3.1690
52.46 11.37 2.8671 57.26 14.03 3.0196 62.28 16.82 3.1721
52.56 11.42 2.8702 57.36 14.09 3.0227 62.39 16.88 3.1751
52.65 11.47 2.8732 57.46 14.15 3.0257 62.49 16.94 3.1782
52.75 11.53 2.8763 57.56 14.20 3.0287 62.59 17.00 3.1812
52.84 11.58 2.8793 57.66 14.26 3.0318 62.69 17.05 3.1843
52.94 11.63 2.8824 57.76 14.31 3.0348 62.80 17.11 3.1873
53.03 11.68 2.8854 57.86 14.37 3.0379 62.90 17.17 3.1904
53.13 11.74 2.8885 57.96 14.42 3.0409 63.01 17.23 3.1934
53.22 11.79 2.8915 58.06 14.48 3.0440 63.11 17.28 3.1965
53.32 11.85 2.8946 58.15 14.53 3.0470 63.22 17.35 3.1995
53.41 11.90 2.8976 58.25 14.58 3.0501 63.32 17.40 3.2025
53.51 11.95 2.9007 58.35 14.64 3.0531 63.43 17.46 3.2056
53.60 12.00 2.9037 58.45 14.70 3.0562 63.53 17.52 3.2086
53.70 12.06 2.9068 58.55 14.75 3.0592 63.63 17.57 3.2117
53.79 12.11 2.9098 58.65 14.81 3.0623 63.74 17.63 3.2147
53.89 12.16 2.9129 58.75 14.86 3.0653 63.84 17.69 3.2178
53.98 12.21 2.9159 58.85 14.92 3.0684 63.95 17.75 3.2208
54.08 12.27 2.9190 58.95 14.97 3.0714 64.05 17.81 3.2239
54.17 12.32 2.9220 59.05 15.03 3.0745 64.16 17.87 3.2269
54.27 12.37 2.9251 59.15 15.08 3.0775 64.26 17.92 3.2300
54.36 12.42 2.9281 59.25 15.14 3.0806 64.37 17.98 3.2330
54.46 12.48 2.9312 59.35 15.20 3.0836 64.47 18.04 3.2361
54.55 12.53 2.9342 59.45 15.25 3.0867 64.58 18.10 3.2391
54.65 12.58 2.9373 59.55 15.31 3.0897 64.68 18.16 3.2422
54.74 12.63 2.9403 59.65 15.36 3.0928 64.79 18.22 3.2452
54.84 12.69 2.9403 59.75 15.42 3.0958 64.90 18.28 3.2483
54.93 12.74 2.9464 59.85 15.47 3.0989 65.00 18.33 3.2513
55.03 12.80 2.9495 59.95 15.53 3.1019 65.11 18.40 3.2544

FORM 160.80-M1
65.21 18.45 3.2574 70.69 21.50 3.4099 76.57 24.76 3.5623
65.32 18.51 3.2605 70.80 21.56 3.4129 76.69 24.83 3.5654
65.43 18.57 3.2635 70.92 21.62 3.4160 76.81 24.90 3.5684
65.53 18.63 3.2666 71.03 21.69 3.4190 76.93 24.96 3.5715
65.64 18.69 3.2696 71.15 21.75 3.4221 77.05 25.03 3.5745
65.75 18.75 3.2727 71.26 21.81 3.4251 77.18 25.10 3.5776
65.85 18.81 3.2757 71.37 21.87 3.4282 77.30 25.17 3.5806
65.96 18.87 3.2788 71.49 21.94 3.4312 77.43 25.24 3.5837
66.06 18.92 3.2818 71.60 22.00 3.4343 77.55 25.31 3.5867
66.17 18.98 3.2849 71.72 22.07 3.4373 77.68 25.38 3.5898
66.28 19.05 3.2879 71.83 22.13 3.4404 77.80 25.45 3.5928
66.39 19.11 3.2910 71.95 22.20 3.4434 77.93 25.52 3.5959
66.49 19.16 3.2940 72.06 22.26 3.4465 78.05 25.59 3.5989
66.60 19.22 3.2971 72.18 22.32 3.4495 78.17 25.65 3.6020
66.71 19.28 3.3001 72.29 22.39 3.4526 78.30 25.72 3.6050
66.82 19.35 3.3032 72.41 22.45 3.4556 78.42 25.79 3.6081
66.93 19.41 3.3062 72.52 22.51 3.4587 78.55 25.86 3.6111
67.03 19.46 3.3093 72.64 22.58 3.4617 78.67 25.93 3.6142
67.14 19.52 3.3123 72.75 22.64 3.4648 78.80 26.00 3.6172
67.25 19.58 3.3154 72.87 22.71 3.4678 78.93 26.07 3.6203
67.36 19.65 3.3184 72.98 22.77 3.4709 79.05 26.14 3.6233
67.47 19.71 3.3215 73.10 22.84 3.4739 79.18 26.21 3.6264
67.58 19.77 3.3245 73.21 22.90 3.4770 79.31 26.29 3.6294
67.68 19.82 3.3276 73.33 22.96 3.4800 79.44 26.36 3.6325
67.79 19.88 3.3306 73.44 23.02 3.4831 79.57 26.43 3.6355
67.90 19.95 3.3337 73.56 23.09 3.4861 79.69 26.50 3.6386
68.01 20.01 3.3367 73.68 23.16 3.4892 79.82 26.57 3.6416
68.12 20.07 3.3398 73.80 23.22 3.4922 79.95 26.64 3.6447
68.23 20.13 3.3428 73.92 23.29 3.4953 80.08 26.71 3.6477
68.34 20.19 3.3459 74.04 23.36 3.4983 80.20 26.78 3.6508
68.45 20.25 3.3489 74.16 23.42 3.5014 80.33 26.85 3.6538
68.56 20.31 3.3520 74.28 23.49 3.5044 80.46 26.92 3.6569
68.67 20.37 3.3550 74.40 23.56 3.0575 80.59 27.00 3.6599
68.78 20.43 3.3581 74.52 23.62 3.5105 80.72 27.07 3.6630
68.90 20.50 3.3611 74.64 23.69 3.5136 80.85 27.14 3.6660
69.01 20.56 3.3642 74.75 23.75 3.5166 80.98 27.21 3.6691
69.12 20.62 3.3672 74.87 23.82 3.5197 81.11 27.29 3.6721
69.23 20.68 3.3703 74.99 23.89 3.5227 81.24 27.36 3.6752
69.34 20.75 3.3733 75.11 23.95 3.5258 81.37 27.43 3.6782
69.45 20.81 3.3763 75.23 24.02 3.5288 81.50 27.50 3.6813
69.56 20.87 3.3794 75.35 24.09 3.5319 81.63 27.57 3.6843
69.67 20.93 3.3824 75.47 24.15 3.5349 81.76 27.65 3.6874
69.78 20.99 3.3855 75.60 24.22 3.5380 81.89 27.72 3.6904
69.89 21.05 3.3885 75.72 24.29 3.5410 82.02 27.79 3.6935
70.01 21.12 3.3916 75.84 24.36 3.5441 82.15 27.86 3.6965
70.12 21.18 3.3946 75.96 24.42 3.5471 82.28 27.94 3.6996
70.24 21.25 3.3977 76.08 24.49 3.5501 82.41 28.01 3.7026
70.35 21.31 3.4007 76.20 24.56 3.5532
70.46 21.37 3.4038 76.32 24.62 3.5562
70.58 21.44 3.4068 76.44 24.69 3.5593

FORM 160.80-M1
Table 8 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE

15.01 -9.44 1.5918 22.31 -5.38 1.8359 29.38 -1.46 2.0801
15.16 -9.36 1.5967 22.45 -5.31 1.8408 29.52 -1.38 2.0850
15.31 -9.27 1.6016 22.60 -5.22 1.8457 29.66 -1.30 2.0898
15.46 -9.19 1.6064 22.74 -5.14 1.8506 29.80 -1.22 2.0947
15.61 -9.11 1.6113 22.88 -5.07 1.8555 29.94 -1.14 2.0996
15.76 -9.02 1.6162 23.03 -4.98 1.8604 30.08 -1.07 2.1045
15.91 -8.94 1.6211 23.17 -4.91 1.8652 30.22 -0.99 2.1094
16.05 -8.86 1.6260 23.31 -4.83 1.8701 30.36 -0.91 2.1143
16.20 -8.78 1.6309 23.45 -4.75 1.8750 30.50 -0.83 2.1191
16.35 -8.70 1.6357 23.60 -4.67 1.8799 30.64 -0.76 2.1240 16
16.50 -8.61 1.6406 23.74 -4.59 1.8848 30.78 -0.68 2.1289
16.64 -8.53 1.6455 23.88 -4.51 1.8896 30.92 -0.60 2.1338
16.79 -8.45 1.6504 24.02 -4.43 1.8945 31.06 -0.52 2.1387
16.94 -8.37 1.6553 24.16 -4.36 1.8994 31.20 -0.44 2.1436
17.09 -8.28 1.6602 24.31 -4.27 1.9043 31.34 -0.37 2.1484
17.23 -8.21 1.6650 24.45 -4.19 1.9092 31.48 -0.29 2.1533
17.38 -8.12 1.6699 24.59 -4.12 1.9141 31.62 -0.21 2.1582
17.53 -8.04 1.6748 24.73 -4.04 1.9189 31.76 -0.13 2.1631
17.68 -7.96 1.6797 24.87 -3.96 1.9238 31.90 -0.06 2.1680
17.82 -7.88 1.6846 25.01 -3.88 1.9287 32.04 0.02 2.1729
17.97 -7.80 1.6895 25.16 -3.80 1.9336 32.18 0.10 2.1777
18.11 -7.72 1.6943 25.30 -3.72 1.9385 32.32 0.18 2.1826
18.26 -7.63 1.6992 25.44 -3.64 1.9434 32.46 0.26 2.1875
18.41 -7.55 1.7041 25.58 -3.57 1.9482 32.60 0.33 2.1924
18.55 -7.47 1.7090 25.72 -3.49 1.9531 32.74 0.41 2.1973
18.70 -7.39 1.7139 25.86 -3.41 1.9580 32.88 0.49 2.2021
18.84 -7.31 1.7188 26.00 -3.33 1.9629 33.02 0.57 2.2070
18.99 -7.23 1.7236 26.14 -3.26 1.9678 33.16 0.64 2.2119
19.13 -7.15 1.7285 26.28 -3.18 1.9727 33.30 0.72 2.2168
19.28 -7.07 1.7334 26.42 -3.10 1.9775 33.44 0.80 2.2217
19.43 -6.98 1.7383 26.56 -3.02 1.9824 33.59 0.88 2.2266
19.57 -6.91 1.7432 26.71 -2.94 1.9873 33.73 0.96 2.2314
19.71 -6.83 1.7480 26.85 -2.86 1.9922 33.87 1.04 2.2363
19.86 -6.74 1.7529 26.99 -2.78 1.9971 34.01 1.12 2.2412
20.00 -6.67 1.7578 27.13 -2.71 2.0020 34.15 1.19 2.2461
20.15 -6.58 1.7627 27.27 -2.63 2.0068 34.29 1.27 2.2510
20.29 -6.51 1.7676 27.41 -2.55 2.0117 34.43 1.35 2.2559
20.44 -6.42 1.7725 27.55 -2.47 2.0166 34.57 1.43 2.2607
20.58 -6.34 1.7773 27.70 -2.39 2.0215 34.71 1.51 2.2656
20.73 -6.26 1.7822 27.84 -2.31 2.0264 34.85 1.58 2.2705
20.87 -6.18 1.7871 27.98 -2.23 2.0313 34.99 1.66 2.2754
21.01 -6.11 1.7920 28.12 -2.16 2.0361 35.13 1.74 2.2803
21.16 -6.02 1.7969 28.26 -2.08 2.0410 35.27 1.82 2.2852
21.30 -5.94 1.8018 28.40 -2.00 2.0459 35.41 1.89 2.2900
21.45 -5.86 1.8066 28.54 -1.92 2.5058 35.55 1.97 2.2949
21.59 -5.78 1.8115 28.68 -1.84 2.0557 35.69 2.05 2.2998
21.73 -5.71 1.8164 28.82 -1.77 2.0605 35.83 2.13 2.3047
21.88 -5.62 1.8213 28.96 -1.69 2.0654 35.97 2.21 2.3096
22.02 -5.54 1.8262 29.10 -1.61 2.0703 36.11 2.28 2.3145
22.17 -5.46 1.8311 29.24 -1.53 2.0752 36.25 2.36 2.3193

FORM 160.80-M1
TABLE 8 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE (CONT’D)

36.39 2.44 2.3242 43.48 6.38 2.5684 50.78 10.43 2.8125
36.53 2.52 2.3291 43.62 6.46 2.5732 50.93 10.52 2.8174
36.67 2.59 2.3340 43.76 6.53 2.5781 51.08 10.60 2.8223
36.81 2.67 2.3389 43.91 6.62 2.5830 51.23 10.68 2.8271
36.95 2.75 2.3438 44.05 6.69 2.5879 51.38 10.77 2.8320
37.09 2.83 2.3486 44.19 6.77 2.5928 51.53 10.85 2.8369
37.23 2.91 2.3535 44.34 6.86 2.5977 51.68 10.93 2.8418
37.37 2.98 2.3584 44.48 6.93 2.6025 51.83 11.02 2.8467
37.51 3.06 2.3633 44.62 7.01 2.6074 51.98 11.10 2.8516
37.66 3.14 2.3682 44.77 7.10 2.6123 52.13 11.18 2.8564
37.80 3.22 2.3730 44.91 7.17 2.6172 52.28 11.27 2.8613
37.94 3.30 2.3779 45.06 7.26 2.6221 52.44 11.36 2.8662
38.08 3.38 2.3828 45.20 7.33 2.6270 52.59 11.44 2.8711
38.22 3.46 2.3877 45.35 7.42 2.6318 52.74 11.52 2.8760
38.36 3.53 2.3926 45.49 7.50 2.6367 52.89 11.61 2.8809
38.51 3.62 2.3975 45.64 7.58 2.6416 53.04 11.69 2.8857
38.65 3.69 2.4023 45.79 7.66 2.6465 53.19 11.77 2.8906
38.79 3.77 2.4072 45.93 7.74 2.6514 53.34 11.86 2.8955
38.93 3.85 2.4121 46.08 7.82 2.6563 53.50 11.95 2.9004
39.07 3.93 2.4170 46.22 7.90 2.6611 53.65 12.03 2.9053
39.21 4.01 2.4219 46.37 7.98 2.6660 53.80 12.11 2.9102
39.35 4.08 2.4268 46.51 8.06 2.6709 53.95 12.20 2.0150
39.50 4.17 2.4316 46.66 8.15 2.6758 54.11 12.28 2.9199
39.64 4.24 2.4365 46.80 8.22 2.6807 54.26 12.37 2.9248
39.78 4.32 2.4414 46.95 8.31 2.6855 54.41 12.45 2.9297
39.92 4.40 2.4463 47.09 8.38 2.6904 54.56 12.53 2.9346
40.06 4.48 2.4512 47.24 8.47 2.6953 54.72 12.62 2.9395
40.20 4.56 2.4561 47.39 8.55 2.7002 54.87 12.71 2.9443
40.34 4.63 2.4609 47.53 8.63 2.7051 55.02 12.79 2.9492
40.48 4.71 2.4658 47.68 8.71 2.7100 55.17 12.87 2.9541
40.62 4.79 2.4707 47.82 8.79 2.7148 55.33 12.96 2.9590
40.76 4.87 2.4756 47.97 8.87 2.7197 55.48 13.05 2.9639
40.91 4.95 2.4805 48.11 8.95 2.7246 55.64 13.13 2.9688
41.05 5.03 2.4854 48.26 9.03 2.7295 55.79 13.22 2.9736
41.19 5.11 2.4902 48.41 9.12 2.7344 55.95 13.31 2.9785
41.33 5.18 2.4951 48.56 9.20 2.7393 56.11 13.40 2.9834
41.48 5.27 2.5000 48.70 9.28 2.7441 56.26 13.48 2.9983
41.62 5.34 2.5049 48.85 9.36 2.7490 56.42 13.57 2.9932
41.76 5.42 2.5098 49.00 9.45 2.7539 56.57 13.65 2.9980
41.90 5.50 2.5146 49.15 9.53 2.7588 56.73 13.74 3.0029
42.05 5.58 2.5195 49.30 9.61 2.7637 56.89 13.83 3.0078
42.19 5.66 2.5244 49.44 9.69 2.7686 57.04 13.91 3.0127
42.33 5.74 2.5293 49.59 9.77 2.7734 57.20 14.00 3.0176
42.48 5.82 2.5342 49.74 9.86 2.7783 57.36 14.09 3.0225
42.62 5.90 2.5391 49.89 9.94 2.7832 57.51 14.17 3.0273
42.76 5.98 2.5439 50.04 10.02 2.7881 57.67 14.26 3.0322
42.90 6.06 2.5488 50.19 10.11 2.7930 57.83 14.35 3.0371
43.05 6.14 2.5537 50.34 10.19 2.7979 57.99 14.44 3.0420
43.19 6.22 2.5586 50.48 10.27 2.8027 58.15 14.53 3.0469
43.33 6.29 2.5635 50.63 10.35 2.8076 58.31 14.62 3.0518

FORM 160.80-M1
TABLE 8 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE (CONT’D)

58.47 14.71 3.0566 66.73 19.30 3.3008 75.87 24.37 3.5449
58.62 14.79 3.0615 66.91 19.40 3.3057 76.07 24.49 3.5498
58.78 14.88 3.0664 67.08 19.49 3.3105 76.26 24.59 3.5547
58.94 14.97 3.0713 67.25 19.58 3.3154 76.46 24.70 3.5596
59.10 15.06 3.0762 67.43 19.68 3.3203 76.65 24.81 3.5645
59.26 15.15 3.0811 67.60 19.78 3.3252 76.84 24.91 3.5693
59.42 15.23 3.0859 67.77 19.87 3.3301 77.04 25.02 3.5742
59.59 15.33 3.0908 67.95 19.97 3.3350 77.24 25.14 3.5791
59.75 15.42 3.0957 68.12 20.07 3.3398 77.44 25.25 3.5840
59.91 15.51 3.1006 68.30 20.17 3.3447 77.64 25.36 3.5889 16
60.07 15.60 3.1055 68.48 20.27 3.3496 77.84 25.47 3.5938
60.23 15.68 3.1104 68.66 20.37 3.3545 78.04 25.58 3.5986
60.39 15.77 3.1152 68.83 20.46 3.3594 78.24 25.69 3.6035
60.55 15.86 3.1201 69.01 20.56 3.3643 78.44 25.80 3.6084
60.72 15.96 3.1250 69.19 20.66 3.3691 78.64 25.91 3.6133
60.88 16.05 3.1299 69.36 20.76 3.3740 78.84 26.02 3.6182
61.04 16.13 3.1348 69.54 20.86 3.3789 79.04 26.14 3.6230
61.20 16.22 3.1396 69.72 20.96 3.3838 79.25 26.25 3.6279
61.37 16.32 3.1445 69.90 21.06 3.3887 79.45 26.36 3.6328
61.53 16.41 3.1494 70.08 21.16 3.3936 79.66 26.48 3.6377
61.69 16.50 3.1543 70.26 21.26 3.3984 79.86 26.59 3.6426
61.85 16.58 3.1592 70.45 21.36 3.4033 80.07 26.71 3.6475
62.02 16.68 3.1641 70.63 21.46 3.4082 80.27 26.82 3.6523
62.18 16.77 3.1689 70.81 21.56 3.4131 80.48 26.94 3.6572
62.34 16.86 3.1738 70.99 21.66 3.4180 80.68 27.05 3.6621
62.51 16.95 3.1787 71.17 21.76 3.4229 80.89 27.16 3.6670
62.67 17.04 3.1836 71.36 21.87 3.4277 81.10 27.28 3.6719
62.84 17.13 3.1885 71.54 21.97 3.4326 81.31 27.40 3.6768
63.01 17.23 3.1934 71.72 22.07 3.4375 81.52 27.51 3.6816
63.17 17.32 3.1882 71.91 22.17 3.4424 81.72 27.62 3.6865
63.34 17.41 3.2031 72.09 22.27 3.4473 81.93 27.74 3.6914
63.51 17.51 3.2080 72.28 22.38 3.4521 82.14 27.86 3.6963
63.68 17.60 3.2129 72.46 22.48 3.4570 82.35 27.97 3.7012
63.84 17.69 3.2178 72.64 22.58 3.4619 82.56 28.09 3.7061
64.01 17.78 3.2227 72.83 22.69 3.4668
64.18 17.88 3.2275 73.01 22.79 3.4717
64.34 17.97 3.2324 73.20 22.89 3.4766
64.51 18.06 3.2373 73.38 22.99 3.4814
64.68 18.16 3.2422 73.57 23.10 3.4863
64.85 18.25 3.2471 73.76 23.20 3.4912
65.02 18.35 3.2520 73.95 23.31 3.4961
65.19 18.44 3.2568 74.14 23.41 3.5010
65.36 18.53 3.2617 74.33 23.52 3.5059
65.53 18.63 3.2666 74.53 23.63 3.5107
65.70 18.72 3.2715 74.72 23.74 3.5156
65.87 18.82 3.2764 74.91 23.84 3.5205
66.04 18.91 3.2813 75.10 23.95 3.5254
66.21 19.01 3.2861 75.29 24.05 3.5303
66.39 19.11 3.2910 75.48 24.16 3.5352
66.56 19.20 3.2959 75.68 24.27 3.5400

FORM 160.80-M1
Table 9 - RETURN AND LEAVING CONDENSING WATER TEMPERATURE
40.12 4.51 1.8408 47.65 8.70 2.0850 55.11 12.84 2.3291
40.27 4.59 1.8457 47.79 8.77 2.0898 55.26 12.92 2.3340
40.42 4.68 1.8506 47.94 8.86 2.0947 55.41 13.01 2.3389
40.58 4.77 1.8555 48.09 8.94 2.0996 55.56 13.09 2.3438
40.73 4.85 1.8604 48.24 9.02 2.1045 55.71 13.17 2.3486
40.88 4.93 1.8652 48.39 9.11 2.1094 55.86 13.26 2.3535
41.03 5.02 1.8701 48.54 9.19 2.1143 56.01 13.34 2.3584
41.18 5.10 1.8750 48.69 9.27 2.1191 56.16 13.42 2.3633
41.33 5.18 1.8799 48.84 9.36 2.1240 56.31 13.51 2.3682
41.48 5.27 1.8848 48.99 9.44 2.1289 56.46 13.59 2.3730
41.64 5.36 1.8896 49.14 9.52 2.1338 56.61 13.67 2.3779
41.79 5.44 1.8945 49.29 9.61 2.1387 56.76 13.76 2.3828
41.94 5.52 1.8994 49.44 9.69 2.1436 56.91 13.84 2.3877
42.09 5.61 1.9043 49.59 9.77 2.1484 57.06 13.92 2.3926
42.24 5.69 1.9092 49.74 9.86 2.1533 57.21 14.01 2.3975
42.39 5.77 1.9141 49.89 9.94 2.1582 57.36 14.09 2.4023
42.54 5.86 1.9189 50.03 10.02 2.1631 57.51 14.17 2.4072
42.70 5.94 1.9238 50.18 10.10 2.1680 57.66 14.26 2.4121
42.85 6.03 1.9287 50.33 10.18 2.1729 57.81 14.34 2.4170
43.00 6.11 1.9336 50.48 10.27 2.1777 57.97 14.43 2.4219
43.15 6.19 1.9385 50.63 10.35 2.1826 58.12 14.51 2.4268
43.30 6.28 1.9434 50.78 10.43 2.1875 58.27 14.60 2.4316
43.45 6.36 1.9482 50.93 10.52 2.1924 58.42 14.68 2.4365
43.60 6.44 1.9531 51.08 10.60 2.1973 58.57 14.76 2.4414
43.75 6.53 1.9580 51.23 10.68 2.2021 58.72 14.85 2.4463
43.90 6.61 1.9629 51.38 10.77 2.2070 58.87 14.93 2.4512
44.05 6.69 1.9678 51.53 10.85 2.2119 59.02 15.01 2.4561
44.20 6.78 1.9727 51.68 10.93 2.1268 59.17 15.10 2.4609
44.35 6.86 1.9775 51.83 11.02 2.2217 59.33 15.18 2.4658
44.50 6.95 1.9824 51.97 11.10 2.2266 59.48 15.27 2.4707
44.65 7.03 1.9873 52.12 11.18 2.2314 59.63 15.35 2.4756
44.80 7.11 1.9922 52.27 11.26 2.2363 59.78 15.43 2.4805
44.95 7.20 1.9971 52.42 11.35 2.2412 59.93 15.52 2.4854
45.10 7.28 2.0020 52.57 11.43 2.2461 60.09 15.61 2.4902
45.25 7.36 2.0068 52.72 11.51 2.2510 60.24 15.69 2.4951
45.40 7.45 2.0117 52.87 11.60 2.2559 60.39 15.77 2.5000
45.55 7.53 2.0166 53.02 11.68 2.2607 60.54 15.86 2.5049
45.70 7.61 2.0215 53.17 11.76 2.2656 60.69 15.94 2.5098
45.85 7.70 2.0264 53.32 11.85 2.2705 60.85 16.03 2.5146
46.00 7.78 2.0313 53.47 11.93 2.2754 61.00 16.11 2.5195
46.15 7.86 2.0361 53.62 12.01 2.2803 61.15 16.20 2.5244
46.30 7.95 2.0410 53.77 12.10 2.2852 61.30 16.28 2.5293
46.45 8.03 2.0459 53.92 12.18 2.2900 61.45 16.36 2.5342
46.60 8.11 2.0508 54.07 12.26 2.2949 61.61 16.45 2.5391
46.75 8.20 2.0557 54.21 12.34 2.2998 61.76 16.53 2.5439
46.90 8.28 2.0605 54.36 12.42 2.3047 61.91 16.62 2.5488
47.05 8.36 2.0654 54.51 12.51 2.3096 62.06 16.70 2.5537
47.20 8.45 2.0703 54.66 12.59 2.3145 62.21 16.78 2.5586
47.35 8.53 2.0752 54.81 12.67 2.3193 62.36 16.87 2.5635
47.50 8.61 2.0801 54.96 12.76 2.3242 62.52 16.96 2.5684

FORM 160.80-M1
TABLE 9 - RETURN AND LEAVING CONDENSING WATER TEMPERATURE (CONT’D)
62.67 17.04 2.5732 70.48 21.38 2.8174 78.71 25.95 3.0615
62.82 17.12 2.5781 70.64 21.47 2.8223 78.88 26.05 3.0664
62.98 17.21 2.5830 70.80 21.56 2.8271 79.05 26.14 3.0713
63.13 17.30 2.5879 70.96 21.65 2.8320 79.22 26.24 3.0762
63.29 17.38 2.5928 71.12 21.74 2.8369 79.40 26.34 3.0811
63.44 17.47 2.5977 71.28 21.82 2.8418 79.57 26.43 3.0859
63.59 17.55 2.6025 71.44 21.91 2.8467 79.74 26.52 3.0908
63.75 17.64 2.6074 71.61 22.01 2.8516 79.91 26.62 3.0957
63.90 17.72 2.6123 71.77 22.10 2.8564 80.08 26.71 3.1006
64.06 17.81 2.6172 71.93 22.19 2.8613 80.26 26.81 3.1055 16
64.21 17.90 2.6221 72.09 22.27 2.8662 80.43 26.91 3.1104
64.36 17.98 2.6270 72.25 22.36 2.8711 80.60 27.00 3.1152
64.52 18.07 2.6318 72.41 22.45 2.8760 80.77 27.10 3.1201
64.52 18.07 2.6367 72.57 22.54 2.8809 80.95 27.20 3.1250
64.83 18.24 2.6416 72.73 22.63 2.8857 81.12 27.29 3.1299
64.98 18.32 2.6465 72.89 22.72 2.8906 81.29 27.39 3.1348
65.14 18.41 2.6514 73.05 22.81 2.8955 81.47 27.49 3.1396
65.29 18.50 2.6563 73.22 22.90 2.9004 81.64 27.58 3.1445
65.45 18.58 2.6611 73.38 22.99 2.9053 81.81 27.67 3.1494
65.60 18.67 2.6660 73.54 23.08 2.9102 81.99 27.77 3.1543
65.76 18.76 2.6709 73.71 23.17 2.9150 82.16 27.87 3.1592
65.91 18.84 2.6758 73.87 23.26 2.9199 82.33 27.96 3.1641
66.07 18.93 2.6807 74.04 23.36 2.9248 82.51 28.06 3.1689
66.22 19.01 2.6855 74.20 23.45 2.9297 82.69 28.16 3.1738
66.38 19.10 2.6904 74.37 23.54 2.9346 82.86 28.26 3.1787
66.54 19.19 2.6953 74.53 23.63 2.9395 83.04 28.36 3.1836
66.69 19.27 2.7002 74.70 23.72 2.9443 83.22 28.46 3.1885
66.85 19.36 2.7051 74.86 23.81 2.9492 83.39 28.55 3.1934
66.00 18.89 2.7100 75.03 23.91 2.9541 83.57 28.65 3.1982
67.16 19.53 2.7148 75.19 24.00 2.9590 83.75 28.75 3.2031
67.32 19.62 2.7197 75.36 24.09 2.9639 83.93 28.85 3.2080
67.47 19.71 2.7246 75.52 24.18 2.9688 84.10 28.95 3.2129
67.63 19.80 2.7295 75.69 24.27 2.9736 84.28 29.05 3.2178
67.78 19.88 2.7344 75.85 24.36 2.9785 84.46 29.15 3.2227
67.94 19.97 2.7393 76.02 24.46 2.9834 84.65 29.25 3.2275
68.10 20.06 2.7441 76.19 24.55 2.9883 84.83 29.35 3.2324
68.26 20.15 2.7490 76.35 24.64 2.9932 85.01 29.45 3.2373
68.41 20.23 2.7539 76.52 24.74 2.9980 85.19 29.55 3.2422
68.57 20.32 2.7588 76.69 24.83 3.0029 85.37 29.65 3.2471
68.73 20.41 2.7637 76.85 24.92 3.0078 85.55 29.75 3.2520
68.89 20.50 2.7686 77.02 25.01 3.0127 85.73 29.85 3.2568
69.05 20.58 2.7734 77.19 25.11 3.0176 85.92 29.96 3.2617
69.21 20.67 2.7783 77.36 25.20 3.0225 86.10 30.06 3.2666
69.36 20.76 2.7832 77.53 25.30 3.0273 86.28 30.16 3.2715
69.52 20.85 2.7881 77.70 25.39 3.0322 86.47 30.26 3.2764
69.68 20.94 2.7930 77.86 25.48 3.0371 86.65 30.36 3.2813
69.84 21.02 2.7979 78.03 25.57 3.0420 86.84 30.47 3.2861
70.00 21.11 2.8027 78.20 25.67 3.0469 87.02 30.57 3.2910
70.16 21.20 2.8076 78.37 25.76 3.0518 87.21 30.67 3.2959
70.32 21.29 2.8125 78.54 25.86 3.0566 87.39 30.77 3.3008

FORM 160.80-M1
TABLE 9 - RETURN AND LEAVING CONDENSING WATER TEMPERATURE (CONT’D)
87.58 30.88 3.3057 97.38 36.33 3.5498 108.59 42.55 3.7939
87.76 30.98 3.3105 97.59 36.44 3.5547 108.84 42.69 3.7988
87.95 31.09 3.3154 97.80 36.56 3.5596 109.08 42.83 3.8037
88.13 31.19 3.3203 98.01 36.68 3.5645 109.32 42.96 3.8086
88.32 31.29 3.3252 98.22 36.79 3.5693 109.57 43.10 3.8135
88.51 31.40 3.3301 98.43 36.91 3.5742 109.82 43.24 3.8184
88.70 31.50 3.3350 98.64 37.03 3.5791 110.06 43.37 3.8232
88.88 31.60 3.3398 98.86 37.15 3.5840 110.31 43.51 3.8281
89.07 31.71 3.3447 99.07 37.26 3.5889 110.56 43.65 3.8330
89.26 31.81 3.3496 99.29 37.39 3.5938 110.81 43.79 3.8379
89.44 31.91 3.3545 99.50 37.50 3.5986 111.05 43.92 3.8328
89.63 32.02 3.3594 99.71 37.62 3.6035 111.31 44.06 3.8477
89.82 32.12 3.3643 99.93 37.74 3.6084 111.36 44.09 3.8525
90.01 32.23 3.3691 100.14 37.86 3.6133 111.82 44.35 3.8574
90.20 32.34 3.3740 100.36 37.98 3.6182 112.08 44.49 3.8623
90.39 32.44 3.3789 100.58 38.10 3.6230 112.34 44.64 3.8672
90.59 32.55 3.3838 100.79 38.22 3.6279 112.59 44.78 3.8721
90.78 32.66 3.3887 101.01 38.34 3.6328 112.85 44.92 3.8770
90.97 32.76 3.3936 101.23 38.46 3.6377 113.11 45.06 3.8818
91.16 32.87 3.3984 101.45 38.59 3.6426 113.37 45.21 3.8867
91.35 32.97 3.4033 101.67 38.71 3.6475 113.63 45.35 3.8916
91.54 33.08 3.4082 101.89 38.83 3.6523 113.88 45.49 3.8965
91.74 33.19 3.4131 102.11 38.95 3.6572 114.14 45.64 3.9014
91.93 33.30 3.4180 102.33 39.08 3.6621
92.13 33.41 3.4229 102.55 39.20 3.6670
92.32 33.51 3.4277 102.78 39.33 3.6719
92.52 33.62 3.4326 103.00 39.45 3.6768
92.72 33.74 3.4375 103.22 39.57 3.6816
92.91 33.84 3.4424 103.45 39.70 3.6865
93.11 33.95 3.4473 103.67 39.82 3.6914
93.31 34.06 3.4521 103.89 39.94 3.6963
93.51 34.17 3.4570 104.12 40.07 3.7012
93.70 34.28 3.4619 104.35 40.20 3.7061
93.90 34.39 3.4668 104.58 40.33 3.7109
94.10 34.50 3.4717 104.81 40.45 3.7158
94.30 34.61 3.4766 105.04 40.58 3.7207
94.50 34.73 3.4814 105.27 40.71 3.7256
94.70 34.84 3.4863 105.50 40.84 3.7305
94.90 34.95 3.4912 105.73 40.96 3.7354
95.11 35.06 3.4961 105.96 41.09 3.7402
95.31 35.18 3.5010 106.20 41.23 3.7451
95.52 35.29 3.5059 106.44 41.36 3.7500
95.72 35.40 3.5107 106.67 41.49 3.7549
95.93 35.52 3.5156 106.91 41.62 3.7598
96.13 35.63 3.5205 107.14 41.75 3.7646
96.34 35.75 3.5254 107.38 41.88 3.7695
96.54 35.86 3.5303 107.62 42.01 3.7744
96.75 35.98 3.5352 107.86 42.15 3.7793
96.96 36.09 3.5400 108.11 42.29 3.7842
97.17 36.21 3.5449 108.35 42.42 3.7891

FORM 160.80-M1
Table 10 - OIL AND DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
31.99 -0.01 0.2637 57.31 14.06 0.5176 74.29 23.50 0.7715
32.63 0.35 0.2686 57.68 14.27 0.5225 74.57 23.65 0.7764
33.27 0.71 0.2734 58.06 14.48 0.5273 74.86 23.81 0.7813
33.90 1.06 0.2783 58.43 14.68 0.5322 75.14 23.97 0.7861
34.51 1.39 0.2832 58.81 14.90 0.5371 75.42 24.12 0.7910
35.12 1.73 0.2881 59.18 15.10 0.5420 75.70 24.28 0.7959
35.73 2.07 0.2930 59.54 15.30 0.5469 75.98 24.44 0.8008
36.32 2.40 0.2979 59.90 15.50 0.5518 76.25 24.59 0.8057
36.91 2.73 0.3027 60.26 15.70 0.5566 76.53 24.74 0.8105
37.49 3.05 0.3076 60.63 15.91 0.5615 76.81 24.90 0.8154
38.05 3.36 0.3125 60.98 16.10 0.5664 77.09 25.05 0.8203
16
38.61 3.67 0.3174 61.33 16.30 0.5713 77.36 25.20 0.8252
39.18 3.99 0.3223 61.69 16.50 0.5762 77.63 25.35 0.8301
39.72 4.29 0.3271 62.04 16.69 0.5811 77.90 25.50 0.8350
40.26 4.59 0.3320 62.39 16.88 0.5859 78.17 25.65 0.8398
40.80 4.89 0.3369 62.73 17.07 0.5908 78.44 25.80 0.8447
41.33 5.18 0.3418 63.07 17.26 0.5957 78.71 25.95 0.8496
41.85 5.47 0.3467 63.41 17.45 0.6006 78.98 26.10 0.8545
42.37 5.76 0.3516 63.75 17.64 0.6055 79.24 26.25 0.8594
42.89 6.05 0.3564 64.09 17.83 0.6104 79.50 26.39 0.8643
43.39 6.33 0.3613 64.43 18.02 0.6152 79.77 26.54 0.8691
43.89 6.61 0.3662 64.76 18.20 0.6201 80.03 26.69 0.8740
44.39 6.88 0.3711 65.09 18.38 0.6250 80.30 26.84 0.8789
44.88 7.16 0.3760 65.42 18.57 0.6299 80.56 26.98 0.8838
45.36 7.42 0.3809 65.75 18.75 0.6348 80.82 27.12 0.8887
45.84 7.69 0.3857 66.08 18.93 0.6396 81.08 27.27 0.8936
46.32 7.96 0.3906 66.40 19.11 0.6445 81.33 27.41 0.8984
46.79 8.22 0.3955 66.72 19.29 0.6494 81.59 27.55 0.9033
47.25 8.47 0.4004 67.04 19.47 0.6543 81.85 27.70 0.9082
47.72 8.73 0.4053 67.36 19.65 0.6592 82.11 27.84 0.9131
48.18 8.99 0.4102 67.68 19.82 0.6641 82.37 27.99 0.9180
48.63 9.24 0.4150 68.00 20.00 0.6689 82.62 28.12 0.9229
49.07 9.48 0.4199 68.31 20.17 0.6738 82.87 28.26 0.9277
49.52 9.73 0.4248 68.62 20.35 0.6787 83.12 28.40 0.9326
49.97 9.98 0.4297 68.93 20.52 0.6836 83.37 28.54 0.9375
50.40 10.22 0.4346 69.24 20.69 0.6885 83.62 28.68 0.9424
50.83 10.46 0.4395 69.55 20.86 0.6934 83.88 28.82 0.9473
51.26 10.70 0.4443 69.86 21.04 0.6982 84.13 28.96 0.9521
51.69 10.94 0.4492 70.17 21.21 0.7031 84.38 29.10 0.9570
52.11 11.17 0.4541 70.47 21.37 0.7080 84.62 29.24 0.9619
52.53 11.41 0.4590 70.77 21.54 0.7129 84.87 29.37 0.9668
52.94 11.63 0.4639 71.07 21.71 0.7178 85.11 29.51 0.9717
53.36 11.87 0.4688 71.37 21.87 0.7227 85.36 29.65 0.9766
53.77 12.10 0.4736 71.67 22.04 0.7275 85.61 29.79 0.9814
54.17 12.32 0.4785 71.96 22.20 0.7324 85.85 29.92 0.9863
54.57 12.54 0.4834 72.26 22.37 0.7373 86.10 30.06 0.9912
54.97 12.76 0.4883 72.55 22.53 0.7422 86.34 30.19 0.9961
55.37 12.98 0.4932 72.84 22.69 0.7471 86.58 30.32 1.0010
55.76 13.20 0.4980 73.14 22.86 0.7520 86.82 30.46 1.0059
56.15 13.42 0.5029 73.43 23.02 0.7568 87.06 30.59 1.0107
56.54 13.63 0.5078 73.72 23.18 0.7617 87.30 30.72 1.0156
56.92 13.85 0.5127 74.00 23.34 0.7666 87.54 30.86 1.0205

FORM 160.80-M1
TABLE 10 - OIL AND DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE (CONT'D)

87.78 30.99 1.0254 99.41 37.45 1.2793 109.95 43.31 1.5332
88.02 31.12 1.0303 99.62 37.57 1.2842 110.15 43.42 1.5381
88.25 31.25 1.0352 99.83 37.69 1.2891 110.34 43.53 1.5430
88.49 31.39 1.0400 100.04 37.80 1.2939 110.54 43.64 1.5479
88.72 31.51 1.0449 100.25 37.92 1.2988 110.73 43.74 1.5527
88.96 31.65 1.0498 100.46 38.04 1.3037 110.93 43.85 1.5576
89.20 31.78 1.0547 100.67 38.15 1.3086 111.12 43.96 1.5625
89.43 31.91 1.0596 100.88 38.27 1.3135 111.32 44.07 1.5674
89.67 32.04 1.0645 101.09 38.39 1.3184 111.51 44.18 1.5723
89.90 32.17 1.0693 101.29 38.50 1.3232 111.70 44.28 1.5771
90.13 32.30 1.0742 101.50 38.61 1.3281 111.90 44.39 1.5820
90.36 32.42 1.0791 101.71 38.73 1.3330 112.09 44.50 1.5869
90.59 32.55 1.0840 101.92 38.85 1.3379 112.28 44.60 1.5918
90.82 32.68 1.0889 102.13 38.96 1.3428 112.48 44.71 1.5967
91.05 32.81 1.0938 102.33 39.08 1.3477 112.67 44.82 1.6016
91.28 32.94 1.0986 102.54 39.19 1.3525 112.86 44.93 1.6064
91.51 33.06 1.1035 102.74 39.30 1.3574 113.06 45.04 1.6113
91.74 33.19 1.1084 102.95 39.42 1.3623 113.25 45.14 1.6162
91.96 33.31 1.1133 103.15 39.53 1.3672 113.44 45.25 1.6211
92.19 33.44 1.1182 103.36 39.65 1.3721 113.63 45.35 1.6260
92.42 33.57 1.1230 103.56 39.76 1.3770 113.82 45.46 1.6309
92.64 33.69 1.1279 103.77 39.88 1.3818 114.01 45.56 1.6357
92.87 33.82 1.1328 103.97 39.99 1.3867 114.20 45.67 1.6406
93.10 33.95 1.1377 104.18 40.10 1.3916 114.40 45.78 1.6455
93.32 34.07 1.1426 104.38 40.21 1.3965 114.59 45.89 1.6504
93.54 34.19 1.1475 104.58 40.33 1.4014 114.78 45.99 1.6553
93.77 34.32 1.1523 104.78 40.44 1.4063 114.97 46.10 1.6602
93.99 34.44 1.1572 104.99 40.55 1.4111 115.16 46.20 1.6650
94.21 34.56 1.1621 105.19 40.66 1.4160 115.35 46.31 1.6699
94.43 34.69 1.1670 105.39 40.78 1.4209 115.54 46.41 1.6748
94.65 34.81 1.1719 105.59 40.89 1.4258 115.73 46.52 1.6797
94.88 34.94 1.1768 105.80 41.00 1.4307 115.92 46.63 1.6846
95.10 35.06 1.1816 105.99 41.11 1.4355 116.11 46.73 1.6895
95.32 35.18 1.1865 106.19 41.22 1.4404 116.30 46.84 1.6943
95.53 35.30 1.1914 106.39 41.33 1.4453 116.49 46.94 1.6992
95.75 35.42 1.1963 106.59 41.44 1.4502 116.67 47.04 1.7041
95.97 35.54 1.2012 106.79 41.55 1.4551 116.86 47.15 1.7090
96.19 35.66 1.2061 106.99 41.66 1.4600 117.05 47.25 1.7139
96.41 35.79 1.2109 107.19 41.78 1.4648 117.24 47.36 1.7188
96.63 35.91 1.2158 107.39 41.89 1.4697 117.43 47.46 1.7236
96.84 36.03 1.2207 107.59 42.00 1.4746 117.62 47.57 1.7285
97.06 36.15 1.2256 107.79 42.11 1.4795 117.80 47.67 1.7334
97.27 36.26 1.2305 107.99 42.22 1.4844 117.99 47.78 1.7383
97.49 36.39 1.2354 108.18 42.33 1.4893 118.18 47.88 1.7432
97.70 36.50 1.2402 108.38 42.44 1.4941 118.37 47.99 1.7480
97.92 36.63 1.2451 108.58 42.55 1.4990 118.56 48.09 1.7529
98.13 36.74 1.2500 108.78 42.66 1.5039 118.74 48.19 1.7578
98.35 36.86 1.2549 108.97 42.76 1.5088 118.93 48.30 1.7627
98.56 36.98 1.2598 109.17 42.88 1.5137 119.12 48.40 1.7676
98.77 37.10 1.2646 109.37 42.99 1.5186 119.31 48.51 1.7725
98.98 37.21 1.2695 109.56 43.09 1.5234 119.49 48.61 1.7773
99.20 37.34 1.2744 109.76 43.20 1.5283 119.68 48.72 1.7822

FORM 160.80-M1
119.87 48.82 1.7871 129.44 54.14 2.0410 138.92 59.40 2.2949
120.05 48.92 1.7920 129.63 54.24 2.0459 139.11 59.51 2.2998
120.24 49.03 1.7969 129.81 54.34 2.0508 139.29 59.61 2.3047
120.43 49.13 1.8018 129.99 54.44 2.0557 139.47 59.71 2.3096
120.61 49.23 1.8066 130.17 54.54 2.0605 139.65 59.81 2.3145
120.80 49.34 1.8115 130.36 54.65 2.0654 139.84 59.92 2.3193
120.98 49.44 1.8164 130.54 54.75 2.0703 140.02 60.02 2.3242
121.17 49.54 1.8213 130.72 54.85 2.0752 140.20 60.12 2.3291
121.35 49.64 1.8262 130.90 54.95 2.0801 140.39 60.22 2.3340
121.54 49.75 1.8311 131.09 55.05 2.0850 140.57 60.32 2.3389
121.72 49.85 1.8359 131.27 55.15 2.0898 140.75 60.42 2.3438
16
121.91 49.95 1.8408 131.45 55.25 2.0947 140.94 60.53 2.3486
122.10 50.06 1.8457 131.63 55.35 2.0996 141.12 60.63 2.3535
122.28 50.16 1.8506 131.82 55.46 2.1045 141.30 60.73 2.3584
122.47 50.27 1.8555 132.00 55.56 2.1094 141.49 60.83 2.3633
122.65 50.37 1.8604 132.18 55.66 2.1143 141.67 60.93 2.3682
122.84 50.47 1.8652 132.36 55.76 2.1191 141.85 61.03 2.3730
123.02 50.57 1.8701 132.54 55.86 2.1240 142.04 61.14 2.3779
123.21 50.68 1.8750 132.73 55.97 2.1289 142.22 61.24 2.3828
123.39 50.78 1.8799 132.91 56.07 2.1338 142.40 61.34 2.3877
123.58 50.88 1.8848 133.09 56.17 2.1387 142.59 61.44 2.3926
123.76 50.98 1.8896 133.27 56.27 2.1436 142.77 61.54 2.3975
123.94 51.08 1.8945 133.46 56.37 2.1484 142.95 61.64 2.4023
124.13 51.19 1.8994 133.64 56.47 2.1533 143.14 61.75 2.4072
124.31 51.29 1.9043 133.82 56.57 2.1582 143.32 61.85 2.4121
124.50 51.39 1.9092 134.00 56.67 2.1631 143.51 61.95 2.4170
124.68 51.49 1.9141 134.18 56.77 2.1680 143.69 62.05 2.4219
124.86 51.59 1.9189 134.37 56.88 2.1729 143.87 62.15 2.4268
125.05 51.70 1.9238 134.55 56.98 2.1777 144.06 62.26 2.4316
125.23 51.80 1.9287 134.73 57.08 2.1826 144.24 62.36 2.4365
125.42 51.90 1.9336 134.91 57.18 2.1875 144.43 62.47 2.4414
125.60 52.00 1.9385 135.09 57.28 2.1924 144.61 62.57 2.4463
125.78 52.10 1.9434 135.28 57.38 2.1973 144.80 62.67 2.4512
125.97 52.21 1.9482 135.46 57.48 2.2021 144.98 62.77 2.4561
126.15 52.31 1.9531 135.64 57.58 2.2070 145.17 62.88 2.4609
126.33 52.41 1.9580 135.82 57.68 2.2119 145.35 62.98 2.4658
126.52 52.52 1.9629 136.01 57.79 2.2168 145.54 63.08 2.4707
126.70 52.62 1.9678 136.19 57.89 2.2217 145.72 63.18 2.4756
126.88 52.72 1.9727 136.37 57.99 2.2266 145.91 63.29 2.4805
127.07 52.82 1.9775 136.55 58.09 2.2314 146.09 63.39 2.4854
127.25 52.92 1.9824 136.73 58.19 2.2363 146.28 63.49 2.4902
127.43 53.02 1.9873 136.92 58.29 2.2412 146.46 63.59 2.4951
127.62 53.13 1.9922 137.10 58.39 2.2461 146.65 63.70 2.5000
127.80 53.23 1.9971 137.28 58.49 2.2510 146.84 63.81 2.5049
127.98 53.33 2.0020 137.46 58.59 2.2559 147.02 63.91 2.5098
128.17 53.43 2.0068 137.65 58.70 2.2607 147.21 64.01 2.5146
128.35 53.53 2.0117 137.83 58.80 2.2656 147.39 64.11 2.5195
128.53 53.63 2.0166 138.01 58.90 2.2705 147.58 64.22 2.5244
128.71 53.73 2.0215 138.19 59.00 2.2754 147.77 64.32 2.5293
128.90 53.84 2.0264 138.37 59.10 2.2803 147.95 64.42 2.5342
129.08 53.94 2.0313 138.56 59.20 2.2852 148.14 64.53 2.5391
129.26 54.04 2.0361 138.74 59.30 2.2900 148.32 64.63 2.5439

FORM 160.80-M1

148.51 64.73 2.5488 158.41 70.23 2.8027 168.87 76.04 3.0566
148.70 64.84 2.5537 158.61 70.34 2.8076 169.07 76.16 3.0615
148.88 64.94 2.5586 158.80 70.45 2.8125 169.28 76.27 3.0664
149.07 65.04 2.5635 159.00 70.56 2.8174 169.49 76.39 3.0713
149.26 65.15 2.5684 159.19 70.67 2.8223 169.70 76.51 3.0762
149.45 65.26 2.5732 159.39 70.78 2.8271 169.91 76.62 3.0811
149.63 65.36 2.5781 159.59 70.89 2.8320 170.12 76.74 3.0859
149.82 65.46 2.5830 159.78 70.99 2.8369 170.33 76.86 3.0908
150.01 65.57 2.5879 159.98 71.11 2.8418 170.54 76.97 3.0957
150.20 65.67 2.5928 160.18 71.22 2.8467 170.75 77.09 3.1006
150.38 65.77 2.5977 160.37 71.32 2.8516 170.96 77.21 3.1055
150.57 65.88 2.6025 160.57 71.43 2.8564 171.18 77.33 3.1104
150.76 65.98 2.6074 160.77 71.54 2.8613 171.39 77.45 3.1152
150.95 66.09 2.6123 160.97 71.66 2.8662 171.60 77.56 3.1201
151.14 66.19 2.6172 161.16 71.76 2.8711 171.81 77.68 3.1250
151.33 66.30 2.6221 161.36 71.87 2.8760 172.02 77.80 3.1299
151.51 66.40 2.6270 161.56 71.98 2.8809 172.24 77.92 3.1348
151.70 66.51 2.6318 161.76 72.09 2.8857 172.45 78.03 3.1396
151.89 66.61 2.6367 161.96 72.21 2.8906 172.66 78.15 3.1445
152.08 66.72 2.6416 162.15 72.31 2.8955 172.88 78.27 3.1494
152.27 66.82 2.6465 162.35 72.42 2.9004 173.10 78.40 3.1543
152.46 66.93 2.6514 162.55 72.53 2.9053 173.31 78.51 3.1592
152.65 67.03 2.6563 162.75 72.64 2.9102 173.53 78.63 3.1641
152.84 67.14 2.6611 162.95 72.76 2.9150 173.74 78.75 3.1689
153.03 67.24 2.6660 163.15 72.87 2.9199 173.96 78.87 3.1738
153.22 67.35 2.6709 163.35 72.98 2.9248 174.17 78.99 3.1787
153.41 67.46 2.6758 163.55 73.09 2.9297 174.39 79.11 3.1836
153.60 67.56 2.6807 163.75 73.20 2.9346 174.61 79.23 3.1885
153.79 67.67 2.6855 163.96 73.32 2.9395 174.83 79.36 3.1934
153.98 67.77 2.6904 164.16 73.43 2.9443 175.04 79.47 3.1982
154.17 67.88 2.6953 164.36 73.54 2.9492 175.26 79.60 3.2031
154.36 67.98 2.7002 164.56 73.65 2.9541 175.48 79.72 3.2080
154.55 68.09 2.7051 164.76 73.76 2.9590 175.70 79.84 3.2129
154.74 68.19 2.7100 164.96 73.87 2.9639 175.92 79.96 3.2178
154.94 68.31 2.7148 165.17 73.99 2.9688 176.14 80.08 3.2227
155.13 68.41 2.7197 165.37 74.10 2.9736 176.36 80.21 3.2275
155.32 68.52 2.7246 165.57 74.21 2.9785 176.58 80.33 3.2324
155.51 68.62 2.7295 165.78 74.33 2.9834 176.80 80.45 3.2373
155.70 68.73 2.7344 165.98 74.44 2.9883 177.02 80.57 3.2422
155.90 68.84 2.7393 166.19 74.56 2.9932 177.25 80.70 3.2471
156.09 68.94 2.7441 166.39 74.67 2.9980 177.47 80.82 3.2520
156.28 69.05 2.7490 166.60 74.78 3.0029 177.69 80.95 3.2568
156.47 69.16 2.7539 166.80 74.89 3.0078 177.91 81.07 3.2617
156.67 69.27 2.7588 167.00 75.01 3.0127 178.14 81.20 3.2666
156.86 69.37 2.7637 167.21 75.12 3.0176 178.36 81.32 3.2715
157.05 69.48 2.7686 167.42 75.24 3.0225 178.59 81.45 3.2764
157.25 69.59 2.7734 167.62 75.35 3.0273 178.81 81.57 3.2813
157.44 69.69 2.7783 167.83 75.47 3.0322 179.04 81.70 3.2861
157.64 69.81 2.7832 168.04 75.58 3.0371 179.26 81.82 3.2910
157.83 69.91 2.7881 168.24 75.69 3.0420 179.49 81.95 3.2959
158.02 70.02 2.7930 168.45 75.81 3.0469 179.72 82.07 3.3008
158.22 70.13 2.7979 168.66 75.93 3.0518 179.94 82.20 3.3057

FORM 160.80-M1
180.17 82.32 3.3105 192.49 89.17 3.5596 206.65 97.04 3.8086
180.40 82.45 3.3154 192.75 89.31 3.5645 206.96 97.21 3.8135
180.63 82.58 3.3203 193.01 89.46 3.5693 207.26 97.37 3.8184
180.86 82.71 3.3252 193.27 89.60 3.5742 207.57 97.55 3.8232
181.09 82.83 3.3301 193.53 89.75 3.5791 207.87 97.71 3.8281
181.32 82.96 3.3350 193.79 89.89 3.5840 208.17 97.88 3.8330
181.55 83.09 3.3398 194.05 90.03 3.5889 208.48 98.05 3.8379
181.78 83.22 3.3447 194.31 90.18 3.5938 208.79 98.22 3.8428
182.01 83.35 3.3496 194.57 90.32 3.5986 209.10 98.40 3.8477
182.24 83.47 3.3545 194.84 90.47 3.6035 209.42 98.57 3.8525
182.48 83.61 3.3594 195.10 90.62 3.6084 209.73 98.75 3.8574
16
182.71 83.73 3.3643 195.37 90.77 3.6133 210.04 98.92 3.8623
182.94 83.86 3.3691 195.63 90.91 3.6182 210.35 99.09 3.8672
183.17 83.99 3.3740 195.90 91.06 3.6230 210.67 99.27 3.8721
183.41 84.12 3.3789 196.16 91.21 3.6279 210.99 99.45 3.8770
183.65 84.26 3.3838 196.43 91.36 3.6328 211.31 99.62 3.8818
183.88 84.38 3.3887 196.70 91.51 3.6377 211.62 99.80 3.8867
184.12 84.52 3.3936 196.97 91.66 3.6426 211.94 99.97 3.8916
184.36 84.65 3.3984 197.24 91.81 3.6475 212.27 100.16 3.8965
184.59 84.78 3.4033 197.51 91.96 3.6523 212.59 100.34 3.9014
184.83 84.91 3.4082 197.78 92.11 3.6572 212.92 100.52 3.9063
185.07 85.05 3.4131 198.06 92.26 3.6621 213.24 100.70 3.9111
185.31 85.18 3.4180 198.33 92.41 3.6670 213.57 100.88 3.9160
185.55 85.31 3.4229 198.61 92.57 3.6719 213.90 101.06 3.9209
185.79 85.45 3.4277 198.88 92.72 3.6768 214.23 101.25 3.9258
186.03 85.58 3.4326 199.15 92.87 3.6816 214.56 101.43 3.9307
186.27 85.71 3.4375 199.43 93.02 3.6865 214.89 101.61 3.9355
186.51 85.85 3.4424 199.71 93.18 3.6914 215.23 101.80 3.9404
186.75 85.98 3.4473 199.99 93.34 3.6963 215.56 101.99 3.9453
186.99 86.11 3.4521 200.27 93.49 3.7012 215.90 102.17 3.9502
187.24 86.25 3.4570 200.55 93.65 3.7061 216.24 102.36 3.9551
187.48 86.38 3.4619 200.83 93.80 3.7109 216.58 102.55 3.9600
187.73 86.52 3.4668 201.11 93.96 3.7158 216.92 102.74 3.9648
187.97 86.66 3.4717 201.39 94.11 3.7207 217.26 102.93 3.9697
188.22 86.80 3.4766 201.68 94.27 3.7256 217.60 103.12 3.9746
188.46 86.93 3.4814 201.97 94.44 3.7305 217.95 103.31 3.9795
188.71 87.07 3.4863 202.25 94.59 3.7354 218.30 103.51 3.9844
188.96 87.21 3.4912 202.54 94.75 3.7402 218.65 103.70 3.9893
189.21 87.35 3.4961 202.82 94.91 3.7451 219.00 103.90 3.9941
189.46 87.48 3.5010 203.11 95.07 3.7500 219.35 104.09 3.9990
189.71 87.62 3.5059 203.40 95.23 3.7549 219.70 104.29 4.0039
189.96 87.76 3.5107 203.69 95.39 3.7598 220.06 104.49 4.0088
190.21 87.90 3.5156 203.99 95.56 3.7646
190.46 88.04 3.5205 204.28 95.72 3.7695
190.71 88.18 3.5254 204.57 95.88 3.7744
190.96 88.32 3.5303 204.86 96.04 3.7793
191.22 88.46 3.5352 205.16 96.21 3.7842
191.47 88.60 3.5400 205.46 96.37 3.7891
191.73 88.75 3.5449 205.76 96.54 3.7939
191.98 88.88 3.5498 206.05 96.70 3.7988
192.23 89.02 3.5547 206.35 96.87 3.8037

FORM 160.80-M1
Table 11 - EVAPORATOR REFRIGERANT SENSOR
TEMP (°F) TEMP (°C) VIN

0.04 -17.76 1.135
2.79 -16.23 1.214
5.44 -14.76 1.292
8.02 -13.32 1.370
10.53 -11.93 1.448
12.98 -10.57 1.526
15.39 -9.23 1.604
17.75 -7.92 1.683
20.08 -6.62 1.761
22.38 -5.34 1.839
24.66 -4.08 1.917
26.92 -2.82 1.995
29.17 -1.57 2.073
31.41 -0.33 2.151
33.66 0.92 2.230
35.90 2.17 2.308
38.15 3.42 2.386
40.41 4.67 2.464
42.69 5.94 2.542
44.99 7.72 2.620
47.31 8.51 2.698
49.67 9.82 2.777
52.06 11.15 2.855
54.49 12.50 2.933
56.96 13.87 3.011
59.50 15.28 3.089
62.10 16.72 3.167
64.77 18.21 3.245
67.51 19.73 3.324
70.35 21.31 3.402
73.29 22.94 3.480
76.36 24.65 3.558
79.55 26.42 3.636
82.89 28.27 3.714
86.41 30.23 3.792
90.12 32.29 3.871
94.07 34.49 3.949
98.31 36.84 4.027
102.87 39.38 4.105
107.81 42.12 4.183
113.26 45.15 4.261
119.30 48.50 4.339
126.10 52.28 4.418

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 17 - REMOTE SETPOINTS
There are three different Remote operating Modes that CURRENT LIMIT
can be selected at the Keypad: Analog Remote mode,
REMOTE CURRENT LIMIT SETPOINT with
Digital Remote Mode or BAS (ISN) Remote Mode.
0‑10VDC, 2‑10VDC, 0‑20mA, 4‑20mA or Pulse
The Control Center can receive a remote Current Limit Width Modulation Signal – The Remote Current
and/or a Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Limit setpoint can be reset over the range of 100% to
Setpoint via the following: 30% Full Load Amps (FLA) by supplying (by others)
a 0‑10VDC, 2‑10VDC, 0‑20mA, 4‑20mA or 1 to 11
Analog Remote Mode second Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal to the
• 0-10VDC Analog Input Control Center. The Control Center must be configured
appropriately to accept the desired signal type as fol-
• 2-10VDC Analog Input lows:
• 0-20mA Analog Input • The appropriate Remote Mode must be selected: 17
• 4-20mA Analog Input ANALOG Remote Mode must be selected when
using a voltage or current signal input. DIGITAL
Digital Remote Mode Remote Mode must be selected when using a
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Input PWM input.
• If ANALOG Remote Mode is selected, the RE-
BAS (ISN) Remote Mode
MOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint must
RS-232 Serial Port via E-Link Gateway be set to “0‑10VDC” or “2‑10VDC” as detailed
The Analog inputs are connected to the Microboard below, regardless of whether the signal is a volt-
J22 as shown in Figure 10 on page 33 and described age or current input signal type.
below. Microboard Program Jumpers JP23 and JP24 • Microboard Program Jumper JP23 must be posi-
must be positioned appropriately to receive either a tioned appropriately per the input signal type as
0-10VDC, 2-10VDC, 0-20mA or a 4-20mA signal. Re- detailed below. It is recommended that a qualified
fer to Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers Service Technician position this jumper.
on page 28 and for required configurations. IMPORTANT! ‑ The signal type used
The PWM inputs are in the form of a 1 to 11 second for Remote Current Limit setpoint reset
Relay contact closure that applies 115VAC to the and the signal type used for Remote Leav‑
I/O Board TB4-19 (Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp) ing Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint
and TB4-20 (Remote Current Limit) for 1 to 11 sec- reset must be the same. For example, if a
onds. Refer to Figure 20 on page 56. The source of 0-10VDC signal is being used for Remote
115VAC is I/O Board TB4-1. The PWM input must Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Re‑
be received at a frequency of at least once every 30 set, then a 0‑10VDC signal must be used
minutes. If not received within this time interval, the for Remote Current Limit Reset.
Program assumes the remote device is defective and
defaults the Current Limit Setpoint to 100% and the 0-10VDC
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint to the lo- As shown in Figure 10 on page 33, connect input
cally programmed Local BASE value. to Microboard J22-1 (signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). The
The Microboard COM 4B RS-232 Serial Port (J2) re- setpoint varies linearly from 100% to 30% FLA as the
ceives the Setpoints in serial data form from the E-Link input varies from 0 to 10VDC. This input will only be
Gateway located inside the Control Center enclosure. accepted when ANALOG Remote Mode is selected,
The E-Link Gateway receives Setpoints from remote the REMOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is
external devices and transfers them to the Microboard.

FORM 160.80-M1
set for “0-10 Volts and Microboard Program Jumper 4-20mA

JP23 has been removed. Calculate the Setpoint for var- As shown in Figure 17 on page 54, connect input
ious inputs as follows: to Microboard J22-2 (signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). The
Setpoint (%) = 100 – (VDC x 7) Setpoint varies linearly from 100% to 30% FLA as the
For example, if the input is 5VDC, the setpoint would input varies from 4mA to 20mA. This input will only
be set to 65% as follows: be accepted when ANALOG remote mode is selected,
Setpoint(%) = 100 - (5 x 7) the REMOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is
set for “2-10 Volts” and Microboard Program Jumper
= 100 - 35 JP23 has been placed on pins 1 and 2. Calculate the
= 65% Setpoint for various inputs as follows:
2-10VDC Setpoint (%) = 100 – [(mA-4) x 4.375)]

As shown in Figure 10 on page 33, connect input For example, if the input is 8mA, the setpoint would be
to Microboard J22-1 (signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). The set to 83% as follows:
setpoint varies linearly from 100% to 30% FLA as the
input varies from 2 to 10VDC. This input will only be Setpoint (%) = 100 - [(8-4) x 4.375]
accepted when ANALOG Remote Mode is selected,
the REMOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is = 100 - (4 x 4.375)
set for “2-10 Volts” and Microboard Program Jumper
= 100 - 17.5
JP23 has been removed. Calculate the Setpoint for var-
ious inputs as follows: = 82.5
Setpoint (%) = 100 – [(VDC - 2) x 8.75]
= 83%
For example, if the input is 5VDC, the setpoint would PWM
be set to 74% as follows:
The Pulse Width Modulation input is in the form of a 1
Setpoint (%) = 100 - [(5 - 2) x 8.75] to 11 second relay contact closure that applies 115VAC
= 100 - [3 x 8.75] to the I/O Board TB4-20 for 1 to 11 seconds. As shown
in Figure 20 on page 56, connect dry closure relay
= 100 - 26.25 contacts between I/O Board TB4-20 (signal) and TB4-
= 74% 1 (115VAC). The setpoint varies linearly from 100% to
30% as the relay contact closure time changes from 1
0-20mA to 11 seconds. The relay contacts should close for 1 to
As shown in Figure 17 on page 54, connect input 11 seconds at least once every 30 minutes to maintain
to Microboard J22-2 (signal) and J22-5 (Gnd). The the setpoint to the desired value. If a 1 to 11 second
Setpoint varies linearly from 100% to 30% FLA as the closure is not received within 30 minutes of the last
input varies from 0mA to 20mA. This input will only closure, the setpoint is defaulted to 100%. A closure
be accepted when ANALOG remote mode is selected, is only accepted at rates not to exceed once every 70
the REMOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is seconds. This input will only be accepted in DIGITAL
set for “0-10 Volts” and Microboard Program Jumper remote mode. Calculate the Setpoint for various inputs
JP23 has been placed on pins 1 and 2. Calculate the as follows:
Setpoint for various inputs as follows:
Setpoint (%) = 100 – [(pulse width in seconds - 1) x 7]
Setpoint (%) = 100 – (mA x 3.5)
For example, if the relay contacts close for 3 seconds,
For example, if the input is 8mA, the setpoint would be
the setpoint would be set to 86% as follows:
set to 72% as follows:
Setpoint (%) = 100 - (8 x 3.5) Setpoint (%) = 100 - [(3-1) x 7]
= 100 - 28 = 100 - (2 x 7)
= 72%
= 100 - 14
= 74%
= 86%

FORM 160.80-M1
RS-232 • Microboard Program Jumper JP24 must be posi-

As shown in Figure 9 on page 32, a setpoint can be tioned appropriately per the input signal type as
received in serial data form at Microboard J2 from the detailed below. It is recommended a qualified Ser-
GPIC. vice Technician position this jumper.
IMPORTANT! ‑ The signal type used
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE for Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Tem‑
REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEM- perature setpoint reset and the signal type
PERATURE SETPOINT with 0-10VDC, 2‑10VDC, used for Remote Current Limit setpoint
0‑20mA, 4‑20mA or Pulse Width Modulation Signal – reset must be the same. For example, if
Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint a 0‑10VDC signal is being used for Re‑
reset can be accomplished by supplying (by others) mote Current Limit setpoint reset, then a
a 0‑10VDC, 2‑10VDC, 0‑20mA, 4‑20mA or 1 to 11 0‑10VDC signal must be used for Leaving
second Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) signal to the Chilled Liquid Temperature reset.
Control Center. The LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID
0-10VDC - As shown in Figure 10 on page 33,
TEMPERATURE setpoint is programmable over the
range of 38°F to 70°F (water applications); 36°F to
connect input to Microboard J22-3 (signal) and J22-5 17
(Gnd). A 0VDC signal produces a 0°F offset. A 10VDC
70°F (water applications with Smart Freeze protection
signal produces the maximum offset (10, 20, 30 or
enabled); or 20°F to 70°F (brine applications). The Re-
40°F above the Local Setpoint value). The setpoint is
mote input signal changes the setpoint by creating an
changed linearly between these extremes as the input
offset above the locally programmed Leaving Chilled
varies linearly over the range of 0VDC to 10VDC. This
Liquid Temperature Base setpoint value. The setpoint
input will only be accepted when ANALOG Remote
can be remotely changed over the range of 10, 20, 30
mode is selected, the REMOTE ANALOG INPUT
or 40°F (as per the locally programmed REMOTE RE-
RANGE setpoint is set for “0‑10VDC” and Microboard
SET TEMPERATURE RANGE setpoint) above the
Program Jumper JP24 has been removed. Calculate the
Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint.
Setpoint for various inputs as follows:
For example, if the Local setpoint is 40°F and the RE-
MOTE RESET TEMPERATURE RANGE setpoint Offset (°F) = (VDC) (Remote Reset Temp Range)
is programmed for 10°F, the Leaving Chilled Liquid 10
Temperature setpoint can be remotely reset over the
range of 40°F to 50°F. The setpoint received through Setpoint (°F) = Locally programmed BASE value
the COM 4B RS‑232 serial port is not an offset that
+ Offset
is applied to the locally programmed BASE value as
described above. Rather, it is an actual Setpoint value. For example, if the input is 5VDC and the Remote Re-
The locally programmed value is not used as a BASE set Temp Range setpoint is programmed for 10°F and
in this application. the Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint
is programmed for 40°F, the setpoint would be set to
The Control Center must be configured appropriately
45°F as follows:
to accept the desired signal type as follows:
• The appropriate Remote Mode must be selected: Offset (°F) = 5 x 10
ANALOG Remote Mode must be selected when 10
using a voltage or current signal input. DIGITAL
= 50
Remote Mode must be selected when using a
PWM input. 10
= 5°F
• If ANALOG Remote Mode is selected, the RE-
MOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint must Setpoint = 40 + 5
be set to “0‑10VDC” or “2‑10VDC” as detailed = 45°F
below, regardless of whether the signal is a volt-
age or current signal type.

FORM 160.80-M1
2‑10VDC “0-10VDC” and Microboard Program Jumper J24 has

As shown in Figure 18 on page 55, connect input been placed on pins 1 and 2. Calculate the setpoint for
to Microboard J22‑3 (signal) and J2‑5 (Gnd). A 2VDC various inputs as follows:
signal produces a 0°F offset. A 10VDC signal produces Offset (°F) = (mA) (Remote Reset Temp Range)
the maximum allowed offset (10, 20, 30 or 40°F above 20
the Local Setpoint value). The setpoint is changed lin-
early between these extremes as the input varies over Setpoint (°F) = Local Setpoint + Offset
the range of 2VDC to 10VDC. This input will only be
accepted when ANALOG remote mode is selected, the For example, if the input is 8mA, the Remote Reset
REMOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is set Temp Range Setpoint is programmed for 10°F and the
for “2-10VDC” and the Microboard Program Jumper Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint
JP24 has been removed. Calculate the setpoint for vari- is programmed for 40°F, the setpoint would be set to
ous inputs as follows: 44°F as follows:
Offset (°F) = (VDC – 2) (Remote Reset Temp Range) Offset (°F) = (8)(10)
8 20
Setpoint (°F) = Local Setpoint + Offset = 80

20
For example, if the input is 5VDC and the Remote Re-
set Temp Range setpoint is programmed for 10°F and = 4°F
the Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint
is programmed for 40°F, the setpoint would be set to Setpoint (°F) = 40 + 4
43.8°F. = 44°F
Offset (°F) = (5 – 2)(10) 4-20mA - As shown in Figure 10 on page 33, con-

nect input to Microboard J22-4 (signal) and J22-5
8
(GND). Program Jumper JP24 must be placed on
= (3)(10) pins 1 and 2. A 4mA signal produces a 0°F Offset. A
8 20mA signal produces the maximum allowed Offset
(10 or 20°F above the Local Setpoint). The setpoint is
= 30 changed linearly between these extremes as the input
8 varies over the range of 4‑20mA. This input will only
be accepted when ANALOG Remote mode is selected,
= 3.8°F
the REMOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is
Setpoint (°F) = 40 + 3.8 set for “2‑10VDC” and Microboard Program Jumper
JP24 has been placed on pins 1 and 2. Calculate the
= 43.8°F Setpoint for various inputs as follows:
0‑20mA Offset (ºF) = (mA-4) (Remote Reset Temp Range)
As shown in Figure 18 on page 55, connect input 16
to Microboard J22‑4 (signal) and J22‑5 (Gnd). A 0mA
signal produces a 0°F offset. A 20mA signal produces Setpoint (ºF) = Local Setpoint + Offset
the maximum allowed offset (10, 20, 30 or 40°F above
the Local setpoint value). The setpoint is changed lin-
early between these extremes as the input varies over
the range of 0‑20mA. This input will only be accepted
when ANALOG remote mode is selected, the RE-
MOTE ANALOG INPUT RANGE setpoint is set for

FORM 160.80-M1
For example, if the input is 8mA, and the Remote Re- at rates not to exceed once every 70 seconds. This input
set Temp Range setpoint is programmed for 10°F and will only be accepted in DIGITAL Remote mode. Cal-
the Local Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature setpoint culate the setpoint for various pulse widths as follows:
is programmed for 40°F, the setpoint would be set to
42.5°F as follows: Offset (°F) =
Offset (°F) = (8 – 4)(10) (pulse width in seconds – 1)(Remote Reset Temp Range)
16 10
Setpoint (F°) = Local Setpoint + Offset

= (4)(10)
16 For example, if the relay contacts close for 5 seconds
and the Remote Reset Temp Range setpoint is pro-
= 40 grammed to 10°F and the Local Leaving Chilled Liq-
16 uid Temperature setpoint is programmed for 40°F, the
setpoint would be set to 44°F as follows:
= 2.5°F
Offset (°F) = (5 – 1)(10) 17
Setpoint (°F) = 40 + 2.5
10
= 42.5
PWM = (4)(10)
10
The Pulse Width Modulation input is in the form of a 1
to 11 second relay contact closure that applies 115VAC
to the I/O Board TB4‑19 for 1 to 11 seconds. As shown = 40
in Figure 20 on page 56, connect dry closure relay 10
contacts between I/O Board TB4‑19 (input) and TB4‑1
(115VAC). A contact closure time (pulse width) of 1 = 4°F
second produces a 0°F offset. An 11 second closure
Setpoint (°F) = 40 + 4
produces the maximum allowed offset (10 , 20, 30 or
40°F above the Local Setpoint value). The relay con- = 44°F
tacts should close for 1 to 11 seconds at least once ev-
RS-232 - As shown in Figure 9 on page 32, a Setpoint
ery 30 minutes to maintain the setpoint to the desired
can be received in serial data form at the Microboard
value. If a 1 to 11 second closure is not received within
COM 4B serial port (J2) from the E-Link Gateway.
30 minutes of the last closure, the setpoint is defaulted
to the Local setpoint value. A closure is only accepted

FORM 160.80-M1

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 18 - HOT GAS BYPASS
The optional Hot Gas Bypass diverts hot gas directly perature Setpoint. Once turned on, it is turned off when
from the Oil Separator to the Evaporator, bypassing the Return Chilled Liquid Temperature increases to ≥
the Condenser. Solenoid Valve 3 SOL, located in the x°F (programmed OFF Setpoint) above the Leaving
bypass line, is driven by the I/O Board TB1-61 to con- Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint.
trol the bypass. Under Program control, it is turned on
(energized) to open the bypass line and turned off (de- The ON Setpoint is programmed over the range of
energized) to close the bypass line. 1.0 to 10.0°F (default 1.0). The OFF setpoint is pro-
grammed over the range of 2.0 to 15.0°F (default 2.0).
When the chiller is shutdown, the Hot Gas Bypass is These Setpoints are programmed by a Service Tech-
turned off coincident with removing the start signal nician using instructions in SECTION 23 - SYSTEM
from the motor starter. It remains off while the chiller CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND RE-
is shut down. SET PROCEDURES of this manual. If the chiller is
equipped with the Hot Gas Bypass option, operation
Each time the chiller is started, the solenoid valve is must be enabled on the OPERATIONS Screen.
turned off for the first 3 minutes of operation. After
that, the solenoid valve is controlled per the differen- The HOT GAS BYPASS Screen, accessed from the
tial between the Return Chilled Liquid Temperature COMPRESSOR Screen, displays a pictorial of the by-
and the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint, pass line and solenoid valve location on the chiller. The 18
as compared to the Hot Gas Bypass ON Setpoint and Hot Gas ON and OFF Setpoints are programmed on
OFF Setpoint. It is turned on when the Return Chilled this screen and system parameters pertinent to Hot Gas
Liquid Temperature decreases to ≤ x°F (programmed Bypass operation are displayed. An LED illuminates
ON Setpoint) above the Leaving Chilled Liquid Tem- when the Hot Gas Solenoid is ON.

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 18 - HOT GAS BYPASS

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 19 - SMART FREEZE PROTECTION
The Smart Freeze feature prevents nuisance chiller SMART FREEZE protection is activated only when
shutdowns due to brief periods of chilled liquid flow the feature is enabled AND the Leaving Chilled Liquid
fluctuations or other brief operating conditions that Temperature Setpoint is < 38°F. Once activated, the
would normally cause Low Evaporator Pressure Safe- total number of seconds that the evaporator refriger-
ty shutdowns. With this feature enabled and activated, ant temperature is below the freeze threshold is count-
the chiller is permitted to ride through these tempo- ed. The freeze threshold is 32.8°F (refrigerant temp.
rary conditions. Also, this feature allows the Leaving sensor RT7) or 34.0°F (evaporator saturation temp.).
Chilled Liquid temperature Setpoint to be set as low The count is incremented once for every second the
as 36.0°F. Smart Freeze protection can be enabled or evaporator refrigerant temperature is below the freeze
disabled at the Keypad, by a Service Technician, us- threshold and decremented once for every second it is
ing a procedure detailed in SECTION 23 - SYSTEM above the freeze threshold (but it is never decremented
CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND RESET below zero). Thus if the evaporator refrigerant temper-
PROCEDURES of this manual. It cannot be used in ature goes below the freeze threshold for 30 seconds,
Brine cooling mode. then goes above it for 10 seconds, then goes below the
threshold for 5 seconds, the total number of seconds
The basis of this feature is that the chilled liquid con- the evaporator refrigerant temperature was below the
tains an amount of heat, which cannot be eliminated freeze threshold was 25 seconds. If Smart Freeze is
immediately. Therefore, it requires a certain amount no longer activated due to the Leaving Chilled Liquid
of time for the liquid to change to a solid. During this Temperature Setpoint being raised to ≥ 38°F, the total
period of time, those parameters that determine when number of seconds being tracked is set to zero.
solidification will occur, are evaluated and the appro- 19
priate Low Evaporator Temperature shutdown thresh- The number of seconds it will take the chilled liquid to
old is applied. This threshold could be lower, but not freeze is based on how far the evaporator refrigerant
higher than the normal Safety threshold. temperature is below the freeze threshold as follows:
Smart Freeze protection uses the Evaporator Refriger- Number of seconds to freezing =
ant Temperature as one of the variables to determine
when freezing is imminent. If the chiller is equipped (4053.7)
with the Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature Sensor (freeze threshold - evaporator refrigerant temperature)
(RT7), and the sensor is enabled using SECTION 23 Thus , if the Evaporator Saturation Temperature is be-
- SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS ing used as the evaporator refrigerant temperature, and
AND RESET PROCEDURES of this manual, this value that temperature is 26°F, it would take 8 minute and 26
is used as the refrigerant temperature. Otherwise, the seconds for the chilled liquid to freeze.
Evaporator Saturation Temperature (as derived from
the output of the Evaporator Pressure Transducer. The When the total number of seconds the evaporator re-
pressure is converted to a temperature via the appropri- frigerant temperature is below the freeze threshold ex-
ate refrigerant “pressure/temperature lookup table”) is ceeds the “Number of seconds to freezing”, a safety
used as the refrigerant temperature. shutdown is performed and EVAPORATOR- LOW
PRESSURE - SMART FREEZE is displayed on the
When Smart Freeze protection is Enabled, the Leaving System Details line of the display.
Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoint can be set as low
as 36.0°F. If set to < 38.0°F, the LEAVING CHILLED Even though Smart Freeze protection is enabled and
LIQUID – LOW TEMPERATURE cycling shutdown activated, the Slide Valve Load inhibit still occurs at
threshold becomes a minimum of 34.0°F. the same thresholds as with normal operation; inhibit
at 56.2 PSIG (R22) and 27.0 (R134a). As in normal
Unless Smart Freeze protection is activated, the fixed operation, loading will be allowed when the pressure
Low Evaporator Pressure Safety thresholds (R22 – 54.3 increases to 57.5 PSIG (R22) and 28.0 PSIG (R134a).
PSIG, 29.6°F) (R134a – 25.0 PSIG, 28.7°F) are used.

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 19 - SMART FREEZE PROTECTION
The following is a summary of the operation with • If the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Set-
Smart Freeze enabled and disabled: point is <38.0°F:
SMART FREEZE DISABLED 1. The Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Tempera-

ture Cycling shutdown threshold: 1 to 3.0°F
• Minimum Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint: below the Leaving Chilled Liquid Tempera-
38.0°F ture Setpoint, as programmed, or a minimum
• Low Chilled Liquid Temp cycling shutdown of 34.0°F.
threshold: 1° to 34.0°F below the Leaving Chilled 2. Low Evaporator Pressure shutdown thresh-
Liquid temp Setpoint, as programmed, or a mini- old: Determined by how far the evaporator
mum of 36.0°F. refrigerant temperature is below the freeze
• Low Evaporator Pressure safety shutdown thresh- threshold of 32.8°F (refrigerant sensor RT7)
old: R22 - 54.3 PSIG (29.6°F); R134a – 25.0 or 34.0°F (Evaporator Saturation temp.), and
PSIG (28.7°F) the total number of seconds it remains there.
Refer to previous explanation.
• PRV Load Inhibit: R22 – 56.2 PSIG; R134a –
27.0 PSIG • Slide Valve Load Inhibit: same as Smart Freeze
Disabled above.
• Load Inhibit disable: R22 – 57.5 PSIG; R134a –
28.0 PSIG • Load Inhibit Disable: same as Smart Freeze Dis-
able above.
SMART FREEZE ENABLED
• Minimum Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint: 36.0° F

• If the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Set-
point is ≥38.0°F:
1. The Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Tempera-
ture Cycling shutdown threshold: 1 to 34.0°F
below the Leaving Chilled Liquid Tempera-
ture Setpoint, as programmed, or a minimum
of 36.0°F.
2. The Low Evaporator Pressure Safety shut-
down threshold is the same as Smart Freeze
Disabled above.

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 20 - STANDBY CHILLER FREEZE PROTECTION
In multiple chiller applications, it may be possible RESET PROCEDURES of this manual. The condenser
for the chilled liquid from an operating chiller (water pump operation is independent of this time delay.
or brine) to flow through the evaporator of a standby
chiller. This presents a possible freeze threat to the con- At chiller shutdown, the condenser pump continues
denser of the standby chiller. To minimize this freeze to run until the Condenser Saturation Temperature in-
potential, the Control Center of the standby chiller creases to > 35.0°F. During shutdown, anytime this
cycles the condenser pump (via I/O Board TB2-151) temperature decreases to < 30.0°F, the pump is turned
based upon the Condenser Saturation Temperature of on until the temperature increases to > 35.0°F. After
the standby chiller, while the chiller is shutdown. If the the chiller has been shutdown for at least the amount of
temperature continues to decrease after the pump has time programmed as the Freeze Warning Time Delay,
been turned on, a Warning message is displayed and if the temperature continues to decrease to < 28.0°F,
the Warning/Anticipatory alarm contacts (I/O Board WARNING – FREEZE THREAT FROM OPERAT-
TB2-55/56) are closed to annunciate the condition. If ING CHILLER is displayed on the System Details line
Standby Chiller Freeze Protection feature is desired, of the Display and the Warning/Alarm contacts close.
it must be Enabled. Otherwise, it must be Disabled. A The Warning message and Warning/Alarm contacts au-
Service Technician must Enable or Disable this feature tomatically clear when the temperature increases to >
using SECTION 23 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SER- 28.0°F.
VICE SETPOINTS AND RESET PROCEDURES of The condenser water flow switch (I/O Board TB4-11)
this manual. is bypassed for 60 seconds after the condenser pump
The Warning and Alarm will occur only after the by- is turned on. If the flow switch is not closed within 60
pass time programmed as the Freeze Warning Time seconds after pump turn on or if it opens continuously
Delay Setpoint (30 to 60 minutes; default 30 minutes) for 2 seconds after the 60 second bypass, WARNING
has elapsed. This Setpoint is programmed by a Service – FREEZE THREAT, CONDENSER FLOW SWITCH
Technician using instructions in SECTION 23 - SYS- OPEN is displayed on the System Details line of the 20
TEM CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND Display.

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 20 - STANDBY CHILLER FREEZE PROTECTION

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 21 - OIL RECOVERY FEATURE
An Oil Recovery feature is included in Flash Memory 1. If the discharge superheat is [>15.0 ºF (R22)
Card version C.MLM.03.03.xxx (and later). Extended (10.0ºF for R134a) and <25.0 ºF (R22)(13.0ºF for
operation at low load, entering condenser water tem- R134a)] or the Slide Valve position is < 40%, the
peratures that are below design, oil cooler supply superheat and superheat rate of change are evalu-
problems or oil solenoid valve problems can allow ated every 5 seconds and the following action is
oil to migrate from the oil separator to the evaporator taken at the end of each 5-second period. While
refrigerant charge. This reduces the quantity of oil in this operation is in effect, WARNING – OIL RE-
the separator and can result in “Oil Separator – Low COVERY LIMIT is displayed on the System De-
Level” safety shutdowns. Excess oil mixed with the tails line of the display. If the change in discharge
refrigerant in the evaporator will cause severe foam- superheat:
ing when the chiller is started. This foaming carries
• Remains the same or increases, apply 0.5
liquid refrigerant into the compressor, lowering the
second load pulse
compressor discharge temperature. As the compres-
sor discharge temperature approaches the condenser • Decreases by 0.1 to 0.9ºF, hold the slide valve
saturation temperature (low discharge superheat), the
• Decreases >1ºF, apply 0.5 second unload pulse.
refrigerant gas has a greater affinity to absorb more oil.
When the discharge superheat is reduced, oil cannot be 2. If the discharge superheat is <15.0ºF(R22) (10.0ºF
separated from the refrigerant gas in the oil separator. for R134a) but >10ºF(R22) (5.0ºF for R134a),
hold the slide valve.
The Oil Recovery feature is used to automatically re-
cover the oil that has accumulated in the evaporator re- 3. If the discharge superheat is ≤10.0ºF(R22) (5.0ºF
frigerant. It accomplishes this by applying load, unload for R134a):
or hold outputs to the slide valve in 5-second intervals
• Inhibit loading
according to the rate of change of the discharge super-
heat in each interval. This operation is detailed below. • If condition exists for ≥ 10 seconds, invoke
The feature can be Enabled or Disabled. The Default “Excess Charge Override’ routine as follows:
is Disabled. Pertinent information for this feature is apply 0.5 second unload pulses every 3 sec-
displayed on the Oil Separator Screen. The change in onds (during which WARNING – LOW DIS- 21
superheat that occurs in each 5-second interval is dis- CHARGE SUPERHEAT LIMIT is displayed)
played as CHANGE IN DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT until Superheat ≥ 15.0ºF (whereupon WARN-
= XX.X ºF. Increases are displayed as xx.x. Decreases ING-LOW DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT DE-
are displayed as –xx.x. The Oil recovery feature is En- TECTED replaces the message WARNING –
abled and Disabled on this screen. The access level is LOW DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT LIMIT).
OPERATOR or higher. This allows an Operator at the
4. When both the superheat increases to ≥ 25.0 ºF
chiller facility, under the direction of a qualified ser-
(R22)(13.0ºF for R134a) and the slide valve po-
vice technician from a remote location, to enable the
sition is ≥ 40%, WARNING – OIL RECOVERY
feature and restart a chiller that has shutdown on an Oil
LIMIT is cleared, Oil Recovery operation termi-
Level safety shutdown. This feature should only be is
nates and normal operation resumes.
used as a tool to recover oil and should only be enabled
following an oil loss safety shutdown. It should be dis- If the Oil recovery feature is Enabled, the restart cri-
abled after the oil has been recovered. Since it inhibits teria following an OIL SEPARATOR – LOW LEVEL
Slide Valve loading, chiller capacity will be affected safety shutdown is different than if the feature is Dis-
while this routine is in effect. Therefore, it should be abled. With the feature Disabled, the Separator Oil
disabled after the oil has been recovered. Level Switch (SOLS) must be closed before a restart is
allowed. This requirement is the same as in all previous
After a 3-minute bypass at start, during which the Sep- software versions. However, to eliminate the need to
arator Oil Level Switch (SOLS) status is bypassed, the manually bypass the SOLS in order to restart a chiller
Oil Recovery operation is performed as follows: that has already suffered oil loss, the SOLS does not
have to be closed to start the chiller when the feature
is Enabled.

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 21 - OIL RECOVERY FEATURE

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 22 - YS MOD E WITH HEAT PUMP
OPERATION OVERVIEW “Undefined”. “Undefined” is the Default value.

The chiller shall not be permitted to start when the
This document pertains to YORK YS Mod E Heat
chiller style is “Undefined.”When the panel boots
Pump Screw Chiller. It identifies the differences be-
with the Chiller Style of “Undefined”, the user is
tween this chiller style and the standard YORK YS
presented with the INITIAL SETUP Screen with
Chiller. Only those things that are different from the
instructions on how to select the correct Chiller
standard YS chiller are contained in this document.
Style and enable Heat Pump Duty.
Refer to the standard YS chiller documents: YS Mod E • The Chiller Style and Heat Pump Duty Enabled/
– Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.80-O1) and Disabled Setpoints settings are displayed on the
OptiView Control Center – Service Instructions (Form SETUP Screen. They can also be changed on this
160.80-M1). screen. Whenever the Chiller Style or Heat Pump
Although the Optiview Control Center and internal Duty is changed, the BRAM is cleared and the
hardware for this chiller is the same as used in the panel reboots which will force the application to
standard YS Chiller, the Microboard Controls Soft- be reinitialized with the proper default settings for
ware operates differently in several features and has the selected chiller style. The initial setup Screen
a different version identifier. The version identifier is: will not be presented, as with the reboot above.
C.OPT.14.01.303 (or later) and the chiller operation
INITIAL SETUP SCREEN
described in this manual is that which applies to this
and later software versions. Software revisions will in- When the program loads for the first time, or when the
crement the version number in the normal way. This BRAM has been cleared (by means other than chang-
software is available on Program Card 031-02878-002, ing the Chiller Style set point or the Heat Pump Duty
as a replacement part. This software version contains set point on the SETUP Screen), the user will be pre-
controls software for both YS Mod E Heat Pump Screw sented an initial setup screen and the opportunity to se-
Chiller and YN Screw Chiller. Two selection steps are lect a chiller style and enable/disable heat pump duty.
required to obtain YS Mod E Heat Pump operation, us- Be aware that that changing the chiller style or heat
ing the CHILLER STYLE and HEAT PUMP DUTY pump duty enable/disable will cause the BRAM to be
Setpoints as follows. Typically, this selection is made cleared and the panel to reboot. The following shall be
at the factory at the time of chiller manufacture. How- present on the initial setup screen:
ever, due to Microboard Service replacement, software
upgrade or BRAM clearing as described below, the se- Title
lection might have to be made in the field. Centered at the top of the screen shall appear the fol- 22
lowing text:
1. Set the CHILLER STYLE Setpoint to “YS Mod
E” from the following selections: Welcome to the Unified Screw Application
• “Undefined” Instructions
• “YS Mod E” Centered in the screen shall appear the following text:
• “YN” The Unified Screw Application is designed to provide
controls processing to certain large tonnage screw
2. Set the HEAT PUMP DUTY Setpoint to “Enabled” compressor chiller styles offered by JCI/York.
The CHILLER STYLE and HEAT PUMP DUTY For the Unified Screw Application to run properly, the
setpoints are available from both the INITIAL SETUP chiller style of this machine must be configured. To do
Screen and the SETUP Screen. so, the following steps must be performed:
• When the program loads for the first time, or when Step 1 Log into the system. Press the Login but-
the BRAM has been cleared (by means other than ton to provide your user ID and a password. Ac-
changing the Chiller Style set point or chang- cess Level of Service or higher is required to con-
ing the Heat Pump Duty set point on the SETUP tinue to Step 2.
Screen), the program defaults to a chiller Style of

FORM 160.80-M1
Step 2 Select the Chiller Style. Press the Chiller Heat Pump Duty
Style button to choose the correct chiller style for A “Heat Pump Duty” button shall appear a heat pump-
this machine. capable chiller style (YS Mod E or YN) has been se-
Selecting an incompatible chiller style lected in Step 2 When this button appears, instructions
may result in damage to the chiller. shall also appear regarding the enabling/disabling of this
setting. If the chiller style selected in Step 2 is not heat
pump-capable, neither the button nor the instructions for
this step shall be displayed. This button shall contain an
edit box that displays the indicator of whether or not this
Step 3 Select Heat Pump Duty. Press the Heat machine is configured to operate as a heat pump. This
Pump Duty button to specify that this machine is button brings up a dialog box with a selection for wheth-
configured as a heat pump. er heat pump duty is configured on this machine or not.
The user must open the dialog box and select either ‘En-
Enabling Heat Pump Duty without the
able’ or ‘Disable’ before he can proceed to the ‘Finish’
proper equipment installed may result in
step. Once the heat pump duty set point has been select-
damage to the chiller.
ed, this button shall remain to allow the user to change
that selection again before the Finish button is pressed.
Finish
Step [3 or 4] Finish. Press the Finish button to A “Finish” button shall appear once Step 2 is complete
complete the setup procedure. This will clear the and a chiller style other than “Undefined,” or a chiller
BRAM and the program will reboot with settings style that is heat pump capable, has been selected. If a
appropriate for the selected Chiller Style. heat pump capable chiller style is selected, the “Finish”
The instructions shall be presented in gray. The cur- button shall not appear until Step 3 has been complet-
rent step shall be presented in white with a blue arrow ed. Once the “Finish” button is pressed the panel shall
pointing to the step. Steps already performed shall be reboot applying the appropriate settings for the chiller
presented in gray. The **WARNING** text shall be style selected in step 2 and the heat pump duty selec-
presented in yellow. tion from step 3 (if applicable).
HEAT PUMP DUTY Enable/Disable

BUTTONS The Heat Pump Duty selection is displayed on the
Setup Screen. Whenever the Heat Pump Duty selec-
Login
tion is changed, the BRAM shall be cleared (except
A “Login” button shall appear when Step 1 is being the Chiller Style selection) and the panel shall reboot,
performed. Pressing this button brings up the login dia- which will force the application to be reinitialized with
log box. Once logged-in, the button shall disappear. the proper default settings. Access Level of Service or
higher shall be required to change the Heat Pump Duty
Chiller Style
selection.
A “Chiller Style” button shall appear when Step 2 is
being performed. This button shall contain an edit box When enabled, this set point declares that this machine
that displays the currently selected chiller style. This is capable of operating as a heat pump and that all
button brings up a dialog box with a selection of the necessary equipment and safety features have been in-
available chiller styles supported by the Unified Screw stalled to be able to operate safely at higher condenser
Application (YS Mod E or YN). Once a chiller style temperatures.
has been selected, this button shall remain to allow the
When in Access Level Service or higher a string indi-
user to change that selection again before the Finish
cating that changing the set point shall cause the panel
button is pressed.
to reboot shall be displayed to the right of the Heat
Pump Duty set point. The string shall state:

FORM 160.80-M1
Modifying Heat Pump Duty or Chiller The basic control algorithm that determines how the
Style will cause the BRAM to be cleared slide valve is to be controlled is as follows: if the Leav-
and the panel to restart. ing Heated Liquid Temperature is greater than set
point, a request to unload the slide valve will be sent
to the Leaving Heated Liquid Load Control routine; if
the Leaving Heated Liquid Temperature is less than set
The Heat Pump Duty selection appears on the Setup point, a request to load the slide valve will be sent to
Screen and may be viewed by all access levels but the Leaving Heated Liquid Load Control routine. The
modified only with Access Level of Service or higher. rate at which the temperature is changing will also af-
When enabled, this set point indicates that all compo- fect whether the slide valve is loaded or unloaded.
nents have been installed that are necessary for the safe The System Screen refers to the Condenser Liquid
and reliable operation of the machine in a heating ap- temperatures as the Heated Liquid Temperatures and
plication. there is a Heated Liquid Temperature set point located
under Leaving and Returning temperatures on the con-
HEAT PUMP OPERATIONAL MODES denser side of the graphic and the leaving Chilled Liq-
The YS Mod E Heat Pump can operate in the following uid Temperature setpoint is not shown.
modes: Since the evaporator parameters are not used to control
the chiller, the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature set
• Cooling
points are not shown on the Evaporator Screen.
• Heating Since the condenser parameters are used to control the
• Cooling and Heating chiller, the Condenser Screen will display as follows:
• References to Condenser Liquid shall be changed
The Operational Mode is selectable on the Op-
to Heated Liquid for clarity,
erations Screen using the OPERATIONAL MODE
Setpoint. It can also be set from a remote location • Local Leaving Heated Liquid Temperature set
via Microgateway/e-link serial communications in point and Range and Leaving Heated Liquid Tem-
ISN mode as described below. The Operational Mode perature Cycling Offset Shutdown and Reset la-
Setpoint key appears on the Operations Screen only bels and buttons shall be added (corollaries to the
when the Heat Pump Duty Setpoint is set to “Enabled.” ones removed from the Evaporator Screen),
It may be viewed by all access levels but changed only • Setpoint/Remote Range
with Access Level of Operator or higher. The system
• Shutdown/Offset
shall be able to be switched between the various Opera-
tional Modes while running—there shall be no need to • Restart/Offset
stop the system to make the switch-over. When operating in “Heating mode”, the low leaving 22
chilled liquid temperature fault uses the hard limits of
In “Cooling mode”, the chiller capacity control oper-
the chiller and are not relative to the leaving chilled liq-
ates to maintain a user specified leaving evaporator
uid set point. This is 16 °F for brine, 34 °F for Smart-
(cooled) liquid temperature.
Freeze and 36 °F for standard water operation.
In “Heating mode”, the chiller capacity control oper- In “Cooling and Heating mode”, the chiller capacity
ates to maintain a user specified leaving condenser control operates to maintain both the cooling set point
(heated) liquid temperature. The Leaving Heated Liq- and the heating set point, without the leaving condens-
uid Temperature Control operates by comparing the er liquid exceeding the heating set point or the leaving
Leaving Heated Liquid Temperature to the Leaving evaporator liquid going below the cooling set point. It
Heated Liquid Temperature Setpoint and determines may be set to this mode only if the Heat Pump Duty
when to load or unload the slide valve. The Leaving Setpoint is set to Enabled. Additionally, this mode is
Heated Liquid Temperature Setpoint is programmable available only if the “Level Control” set point (found
over the following range: on the Operations Screen) is set to ‘Enabled.’ The slide
valve control is based on both the leaving evaporator
• R134a – 80 to 140ºF; default 130ºF
liquid temperature and the leaving condenser liquid
• R22 – 80 to 115ºF; default 10ºF temperature. It is controlled to keep the leaving evapo-
rator liquid at or above its set point while keeping the

FORM 160.80-M1
leaving condenser liquid at or below its set point. In this HOME SCREEN
mode, the System Screen refers to the Condenser Liq-
The OPERATIONAL MODE being performed, “Cool-
uid temperatures as the Heated Liquid Temperatures
ing”, “Heating” or “Cooling and Heating” is displayed.
and both the Chilled Liquid Temperature Setpoints and
When in Heating Mode, the Chilled Liquid tempera-
Heated Liquid Temperature Setpoints are displayed.
tures are displayed as “Evaporator Liquid Tempera-
To correct the problems associated with the extremes sur- tures”. When in Heating or Heating and Cooling mode,
rounding either the evaporator or the condenser, “Cool- the condenser liquid temperatures are displayed as
ing” and “Heating” Operational Modes shall use the “Heated Liquid Temperatures”.
same method to control the slide valve as is used in the
“Cooling and Heating” Operational Mode. In this way SYSTEM SCREEN
the “Cooling” and “Heating” Operational Modes become
When in Heating Mode, the Chilled Liquid Tempera-
special cases within the “Cooling and Heating” mode.
tures are displayed as “Evaporator Liquid Tempera-
In the “Cooling” mode, the slide valve is controlled to
tures” and the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
prevent the leaving heated liquid from exceeding the
setpoint is not displayed. When in Heating or Heating
maximum value of the heated liquid set point (instead
and Cooling mode, the Condenser Liquid Temperatures
of the user assigned value). Likewise, in the “Heating”
are displayed as “Heated Liquid Temperatures” and the
mode, the slide valve is controlled to prevent the leaving
“Heated Liquid Temperature Setpoint is displayed. The
chilled liquid from falling below the minimum value of
SENSITIVITY key allows navigation to the Sensitivity
the chilled liquid set point (instead of the user assigned
Screen.
value). This shall put in place an advanced control at the
extremes of both the evaporator and the condenser based SENSITIVITY SCREEN
on leaving liquid temperatures. The existing controls,
based on the various pressures, remain unchanged—all This Screen, accessed from the SYSTEM Screen, al-
safeties remain in place and at the same values. lows programming of the Sensitivity Setpoints that
affect the control of the Leaving Chilled Liquid Tem-
The maximum leaving condenser liquid temperatures
perature and Leaving Heated Liquid Temperature in
permitted are as follows:
Cooling Mode, Heating Mode and Cooling and Heat-
• R-134a – 140ºF ing Mode.
• R22 – 115ºF
The following are the programmable setpoint values.
Remote Setpoints They are explained below.
The OPERATIONIONAL MODE Setpoint can be
Cooling
changed remotely via ISN Microgateway/e-Link serial
communications (microboard serial RS-232 COM4B Period: 5-20 sec Default: 20 seconds
serial port) when the Optiview CONTROL SOURCE Error: 0.5 – 4.0 ºF Default: 1.5ºF
setpoint is set ISN. The write values for GPIC Analog Rate: 0.5ºF/sec – 4.0ºF/sec Default: 2.5ºF
Value slot 3 (AV.3) are: Max Load pulse: 0.5 – 1.4 sec Default: 0.5 sec
• 0 = Cooling Max Unload Pulse: 0.5 – 1.4 sec Default: 0.5 sec
• 1 = Heating
Heating
• 2 = Cooling and Heating
Period: 5-20 sec Default: 20 seconds
Remote Status Error: 0.5 – 4.0 ºF Default: 1.5ºF
The following I/O Board Digital Output indicates when Rate: 0.5ºF/sec – 4.0ºF/sec Default: 2.5ºF
the chiller is operating in Heating mode or Heating and Max Load pulse: 0.5 – 1.4 sec Default: 0.5 sec
Cooling mode:
Max Unload Pulse: 0.5 – 1.4 sec Default: 0.5 sec
TB2-152/153 (relay K6) – relay is energized, clos-
ing dry closure contacts when OPERATIONAL
MODE setpoint set to Heating. Otherwise, relay
is de-energized, opening the contacts. Diagnostics
Screen LED (K6) is illuminated when relay ener-
gized. Otherwise, it is extinguished.

FORM 160.80-M1
Cooling and Heating control actions will be more responsive to changes in

Period: 5-20 sec Default: 20 sec the Leaving Liquid Temperature. By increasing this
Cooling Error: 0.5 – 4.0 ºF Default: 1.5ºF number, the control actions will be less responsive to
changes in the Leaving Liquid Temperature.
Cooling Rate: Default: 2.5ºF
0.5ºF/sec – 4.0ºF/sec MAX LOAD PULSE (0.5 to 1.4 sec) – This variable
Cooling Max Load pulse: Default: 0.5 sec limits the maximum allowed load pulse duration to the
0.5 – 1.4 sec programmed value. The larger the number, the longer
Cooling Max Unload Pulse: Default: 0.5 sec the pulses are allowed to be. This variable can be used
0.5 – 1.4 sec to compensate for different liquid loop lengths. To
minimize setpoint overshoot, shorter loops will require
Heating Error: 0.5 – 4.0 ºF Default: 1.5ºF
smaller numbers.
Heating Rate: Default: 2.5ºF
0.5ºF/sec – 4.0ºF/sec MAX UNLOAD PULSE (0.5 to 1.4 sec) – This vari-
Heating Max Load pulse Default: 0.5 sec able limits the maximum allowed unload pulse to the
0.5 – 1.4 sec programmed value. The larger the number, the longer
the pulses are allowed to be. Like the “Max Unload
Heating Cooling Max Default: 0.5 sec pulse” above, this variable can be used to compen-
Unload Pulse: 0.5–1.4 sec sate for different size liquid loop lengths. To minimize
PERIOD (5 to 20 sec) – The recurring period of time setpoint overshoot, shorter loops will require smaller
over which the actual Leaving Chilled Liquid Temper- numbers.
ature (cooling mode) or Leaving Heated Liquid Tem-
perature (heating mode) is compared to the respective Change Settings - Cooling
Leaving Liquid Temperature Setpoint. These periods Use to change the COOLING Mode setpoints. Pressing
occur consecutively and continuously as long as the this key places a green box around the first change-
chiller is running. At the end of each period, a load, able setpoint. Use the Up/Dn arrows to place the box
unload or hold output, as appropriate, is applied to the around the desired setpoint. With the setpoint selected,
slide valve actuator. Longer periods reduce the number press the ENTER () key. A dialog box appears with
of control actions. Shorter periods increase the number the range of settings. Using the numeric keypad keys,
of control actions. enter the desired value and press the ENTER () key.
ERROR (0.5 to 4.0ºF sec) – This variable determines Change Settings - Heating
how sensitive the control is to the error between the Use to change the HEATING mode setpoints. Pressing
actual Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature (cooling this key places a green box around the first change-
mode) or Leaving Heated Liquid Temperature (heating able setpoint. Use the Up/Dn arrows to place the box 22
mode)and the respective Leaving Liquid Temperature around the desired setpoint. With the setpoint selected,
setpoint. The value programmed represents a large er- press the ENTER () key. A dialog box appears with
ror to the control and the control will respond aggres- the range of settings. Using the numeric keypad keys,
sively when this or greater error exists. Reducing this enter the desired value and press the ENTER () key.
number causes the control to try to control to a tighter
temperature band around the Leaving Liquid Tempera- Change Settings - Cooling and Heating
ture Setpoint. Use to change the COOLING AND HEATING
setpoints. Pressing this key places a green box around
RATE (0.5 to 4.0ºF/sec) – This variable determines
the first changeable setpoint. Use the Up/Dn arrows
how sensitive the control is to the rate of change of the
to place the box around the desired setpoint. With the
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature (cooling mode) or
setpoint selected, press the ENTER () key. A dialog
Leaving Heated Liquid Temperature (heating mode).
box appears with the range of settings. Using the nu-
Value programmed represents a large rate of change
meric keypad keys, enter the desired value and press
within the control period (see above) and the control
the ENTER () key.
will respond aggressively when this rate of change (or
greater) has occurred. By decreasing this number, the

FORM 160.80-M1
EVAPORATOR SCREEN ERATIONS Screen determines the refrigerant level

control type used. If set to ENABLED, the following
When in Heating Mode, the leaving Chilled Liquid
refrigerant level control is employed and this screen
Temperature Setpoints are not displayed.
is displayed. If set to Disabled, the bypass type level
CONDENSER SCREEN control is employed and the screen applicable to that
type is displayed.
When in Heating Mode or Cooling and Heating Mode,
the Heated Liquid Temperature Setpoints are available. This screen allows the Service Technician to program
Keys are available to navigate to the REFRIGERANT all Refrigerant Level Control setpoints. All Setpoint
LEVEL CONTROL Screen (if level Control setpoint changes require SERVICE access level.
on OPERATIONS screen is set to enabled) and the
SETUP Screen. Refrigerant Level Position
Displays the present level of the liquid level in the con-
CONDENSER SETUP SCREEN denser. The measured level is animated in the cutaway
Thus screen allows the Service Technician to set the view of the condenser. When the actual level is 0-15%,
setpoints pertinent to the condenser as follows: level is shown as 50% full. When the actual level is
16-31%, the level is shown as 60% full. When the ac-
Freeze Warning tual level is 32-47%, the level is shown as 70% full.
Allows the Service technician to enable/disable the When the actual level is 48-63%, the level is shown as
Standby Chiller Freeze Protection feature. 80% full. When the actual level is 64-79%, the level is
shown as 90% full. Actual levels above 79% are shown
Freeze Time as 100% full.
Only displayed if the Freeze warning setpoint above
Refrigerant Level Control Mode
is set to Enabled. Allows the Service Technician to set
the Freeze Warning Bypass Time (30 to 60 minutes; Indicates whether the level control is in automatic or
default 30). Freeze Warnings are bypassed until the manual mode.
standby chiller has been shutdown for at least this du-
ration of time. Raise (LED)
Illuminated while a close command is applied to the
Pump Delay level control actuator.
Allows the Service Technician to set a delay for the
start of the condenser liquid pump. The delay timer (0 Lower (LED)
to 90 seconds; default 0) will start coincident with the Illuminated when an open command is applied to the
compressor motor start. At the completion of the delay, level control actuator.
I/O Board contacts TB2-150/151 will close to start the
condenser pump. Zone Control State
Displays the zone control state (“Zone 1”, “Zone 2”,
REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL SCREEN
“Zone 2 to Zone 1”) in effect for the level control.
(Only displayed if Level Control Setpoint on Opera- “Zone Control Off” is displayed when the chiller is
tions Screen set enabled) shutdown.
The YS Mod E Heat Pump uses Zone Type Refriger- Zone Time Remaining
ant Level Control similar to that used in YK chillers
(not the bypass configuration as used in standard YS Displays the time remaining in the 60 second count-
chillers). Chillers equipped for Heat Pump Duty are down timer when transitioning from Zone 2 to Zone 1.
also equipped with the YK chiller type orifice/actuator. When transitioning from Zone 2 parameter set to Zone
This control is must be enabled on the OPERATIONS 1 parameter set, the Zone 1 error requirement must be
Screen using the LEVEL CONTROL Setpoint. Note: met for 60 continuous secons before Zone 1 parameters
The setting of the Level Control Setpoint on the OP- are used.

FORM 160.80-M1
Refrigerant Level Target [Refrigerant Level Control] Lower (Manual)

After the chiller has been running for 3 minutes, if the This key puts the Level Control in Manual mode and
refrigerant level is less than the level setpoint, a linearly applies a lower (open ) command to the level control
increasing ramp (target) is applied to the level setpoint. actuator.
This ramp allows the level to go from the present level
to the programmed level setpoint over a period of time [Refrigerant Level Control] Raise (Manual)
programmed as the RAMP UP TIME. This key puts the Level Control in Manual mode and
applies a raise (close) command to the level control ac-
Ramp Up Time Remaining tuator.
Displays the time remaining in the Ramp Time count-
down timer while a refrigerant level Target is in effect. [Refrigerant Level Control] Hold (Manual)
This key puts the level control in manual mode and ap-
Setpoint plies neither a raise (close) nor lower (open) command
Specifies the desired refrigerant level to be maintained to the level control actuator.
in the condenser. Programmable over the range of 20%
to 80% (default 30). [Refrigerant Level Control] Auto
Returns the level control to automatic control.
Valve Preset Time
Specifies the duration of the pre-positioning (close) SETPOINTS SCREEN
signal during the System Pre-lube when starting the In “Heating and Cooling” mode, the VIEW COOL-
chiller. Programmable over the range of 0 to 100 sec- ING SETPOINTS/VIEW HEATING SETPOINTS key
onds (default 50). (View Access level and higher) allows the user to alter-
nately display the Cooling setpoints and the Heating
Ramp Up Time
setpoints with each press of the key.
Specifies the duration of the ramp time applied to
the Refrigerant Level Target when starting the chiller SETUP SCREEN
while the actual refrigerant level is less than the level
The CHILLER STYLE setpoints key (Service Access
setpoint, after a 3 minute bypass at compressor start.
Level or higher) allows the service technician to enter
Programmable over the range of 3 to 15 minutes (de-
the applicable chiller type the control center is control-
fault 8).
ling. The selections are: “YS mod E”, “YN”, “Unde-
fined”.
Period (Zone 1)
Specifies the control period used during Zone 1 opera- The HEAT PUMP DUTY setpoint (Service access lev- 22
tion. Programmable over a range of 8 to 22 seconds el or higher) allows the service technician to enable or
(default 15) disable Heat Pump Duty.
Rate (Zone 1) The LIQUID INJECTION Setpoint (Service access

level or higher) allows the service technician to enable
Specifies the rate limit threshold used during Zone 1 or disable the Liquid Injection feature.
operation. Programmable over a range of 3 to 15% (de-
fault 7) OPERATIONS SCREEN
Period (Zone 2) The OPERATIONAL MODE Setpoint allows the ser-

vice technician to select the desired operational mode.
Specifies the control period used during Zone 2 opera-
The selections are: “Cooling”, “Heating”, “Cooling and
tion. Programmable over a range of 2.5 to 10 seconds
Heating”. When the CONTROL SOURCE setpoint is
(default 2.5)
set to ISN, the Operational Mode setpoint can be re-
Rate (Zone 2) motely changed through E-link or Microgateway serial
communications.
Specifies the rate limit threshold used during Zone 2
operation. Programmable over a range of 3 to 15% (de-
fault 5).

FORM 160.80-M1
The LEVEL CONTROL Setpoint allows the service Service Replacements

technician to enable or disable the YK Chiller Zone The replacement microboard part number is 331-
style level control. It should be set to Enabled for YS 02430-611. It includes microboard 031-02430-001
mod E Heat Pump Duty. If set to Disabled, the level programmed with the latest version of YS Mod E Heat
control employed is the same as the YS chiller control Pump software. If it is necessary to update the Con-
using the orifice bypass technique. Heating and Cool- trols Program at a later date, order Program Card 031-
ing mode can only be selected when Level Control is 02878-002 and follow standard download procedures.
set to Enabled. When set to enabled, the zone style re-
frigerant level control screen is displayed. When set to MOTOR OVERLOAD FAULT
disabled, the orifice bypass style screen is displayed.
In addition to the overload function performed by the
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR YS MOD E CM-2 Board (electro-mechanical starters) or the Solid
HEAT PUMP UNITS State Starter Logic/Trigger Board, there is also a safety
shutdown that is performed by the microboard soft-
ISN COMMUNICATIONS ware as follows:
When the CONTROL SOURCE setpoint is set to ISN,
105% Motor Current Overload
the OPERATIONAL MODE setpoint (“Cooling”,
“Heating” or “Cooling and Heating”) can be remotely The compressor motor current has exceeded 105% of
changed through the E-link/Gateway serial communi- the Chiller (Job) Full Load Amps for a time period ex-
cations. ceeding the setting of the 105% MOTOR CURRENT
FAULT TIME Setpoint (12 to 40 seconds; default 40)
I/O BOARD (see below). The chiller can be started after the COM-
PRESSOR Switch is placed in the Stop-reset (O) posi-
Status Relay (K6) N.O. dry contacts at TB2-152/153
tion. This motor current overload shutdown is in addi-
will close to indicate when the YS mod E Heat Pump
tion to the overload shutdown performed by the CM-2
is operating in “Heating” or “Cooling and Heating”
Current Module (electro-mechanical starter) or Solid
mode. Otherwise, they are open.
State Starter.
MICROBOARD The following setpoint on the SETPOINTS Screen al-
The Microboard for the YS Mod E Heat Pump is 031- lows setting of the above overload timer:
02430-001. It is equipped as follows:
105% Motor Current Fault Time
BRAM Allows the user to set the duration of the software
The BRAM used is part number 031-02565-000. The 105% FLA motor current overload timer. It is adjust-
size is 128KB. It has 32 pins and requires a 32-pin able over the range of 12 (default) to 40 seconds, in 1
socket. This application requires that Program Jumper second increments. It should not be set to a value other
JP14 be REMOVED. than the default value unless advised by YORK tech-
nical Support. This overload protection is in addition
Boot-Up Program to that which is provided by the CM-2 Board (electro-
The BIOS Eprom used is part number 031-02429-001. mechanical starter) or the Logic/Trigger Board of the
The version is C.OPT.00.01. Solid State Starter. If the motor current exceeds 105%
of the chiller (Job) Full Load Amps for the programmed
Chiller Operating Program time, a safety shutdown is performed and “105% Mo-
tor Current Overload” is displayed.
The Controls Software version for YS Mod Heat Pump
is C.OPT. 14.01.303 (or later). Replacement software
is available on Program Card 031-02878-002 as ex-
plained below.

FORM 160.80-M1
PROPORTIONAL LOADING/UNLOADING EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

To prevent motor current swings resulting from un- With Heat Pump Duty Enabled, a 0-125 PSIG evapo-
dershoot and overshoot of the current limit setpoint, rator transducer is required. The part number of this
proportional slide valve loading/unloading is applied device is 025-028678-115. This higher range device
within a band around the current limit Setpoint (Local is required due to the higher evaporator pressures en-
or Remote). The proportional loading band will begin countered in heat pump duty.
at 93% of the current limit setpoint and end at 100% of
the setpoint. While in this band, the load pulses will be REFRIGERANT AND LIQUID TYPE SELECTION
proportionately decreased as the motor current increas- Refrigerant Type and Liquid type selections are done
es to from 93% to 100% of the current limit setpoint, with the REFRIGERANT SELECTION Setpoint and
and proportionately increased as the motor current de- the LIQUID TYPE setpoint on the on the SETUP
creases from 100% to 93% of the current limit setpoint. Screen. In previous software versions, these selec-
At 100% of the current limit setpoint, no loading or tions were done with DIP Switch selection on the mi-
unloading occurs. croboard.
The proportional unloading band begins above 100% EXTENDED CONDENSER LIQUID
of the current limit setpoint and ends at 104% of the TEMPERATURE DISPLAY RANGE FOR HEAT
current limit setpoint. While in this band, the unload PUMP UNITS
pulses will proportionally decrease as the motor cur- The maximum displayed temperature for Leaving
rent decreases from 104% to 100% of the current limit and Return Condenser Liquid Temperatures has been
setpoint and proportionally increase as the motor cur- raised to 154ºF from 133.4ºF. The following Table is
rent increases from 100% to 104% of the current limit the temperature to volts chart.
setpoint.
Above 104% of the current limit setpoint, the unload
output is continuously energized.
The above operation applies to Local Current Limit
Setpoint, Remote Current Limit Setpoint and Pulldown
Demand Limit Setpoint.
025-28678-II5 22
Maximum allowable
deviation from nominal 0.75 ± 0.10
output (millivolts)*
0 62.5 125 Pressure (PSIS)

0.500 2.5 4.500 nominal output
voltage +
V = P + 15.6
31.25
P = (31.25 x V) - 15.6
V = Vdc
P = Pressure in PSIG
Figure 45 - EVAPORATOR TRANSDUCER (YS MOD E HEAT PUMP)

FORM 160.80-M1
Table 12 - LEAVING AND RETURN CONDENSER EXTENDED EVAPORATOR LIQUID

LIQUID TEMPERATURE YS MOD E HEAT PUMP TEMPERATURE DISPLAY RANGE FOR HEAT
TEMP (F) TEMP (C) VIN PUMP UNITS
8.04 -13.31 0.9290
The maximum displayed temperature for Leaving
11.30 -11.50 1.0071
Chilled Liquid Temperature and Return Chilled Liquid
14.41 -9.77 1.0852
temperature is raised to 136ºF and 107ºF respectively,
17.39 -8.12 1.1633
from 82ºF and 94ºF respectively.
20.26 -6.52 1.2415
23.06 -4.96 1.3196 When the Heat Pump Duty setpoint is set to Enabled
25.76 -3.46 1.3977 (meaning the chiller is built as a heat pump capable
28.40 -2.00 1.4758 machine), the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
30.98 -0.56 1.5540 Thermistor must be connected between J7-14 and J7-
33.52 0.84 1.6321 15 on the microboard, with Program Jumper JP21 posi-
36.02 2.23 1.7102 tioned on pins 2 and 3. This is input channel 30 on the
38.48 3.60 1.7883 Analog Inputs Diagnostics Screen.
40.92 4.95 1.8665
Refer to the following Tables 13 and 14 for the tem-
43.33 6.29 1.9446 perature to volts charts.
45.74 7.63 2.0227
48.13 8.96 2.1008
50.52 10.28 2.1790
52.91 11.61 2.2571
55.29 12.93 2.3352
57.70 14.27 2.4133
60.12 15.62 2.4915
62.55 16.97 2.5696
65.02 18.34 2.6477
67.51 19.72 2.7258
70.04 21.13 2.8040
72.61 22.56 2.8821
75.23 24.01 2.9602
77.91 25.50 3.0383
80.64 27.02 3.1165
83.44 28.57 3.1946
86.33 30.18 3.2727
89.30 31.83 3.3508
92.37 33.53 3.4290
95.57 35.31 3.5071
98.91 37.17 3.5852
102.38 39.10 3.6633
106.02 41.12 3.7415
109.88 43.26 3.8196
113.95 45.52 3.8977
118.30 47.94 3.9758
122.95 50.52 4.0540
128.00 53.33 4.1321
133.50 56.38 4.2102
139.57 59.76 4.2883
146.35 63.52 4.3665
154.04 67.80 4.4446

FORM 160.80-M1
Table 13 - LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID Table 14 - RETURN CHILLED LIQUID

TEMPERATURE YS MOD E HEAT PUMP TEMPERATURE YS MOD E HEAT PUMP
TEMP (F) TEMP (C) VIN TEMP (F) TEMP (C) VIN
0.04 -17.75 1.0107 0.04 -17.75 1.1353
3.02 -16.10 1.0889 2.79 -16.22 1.2134
5.87 -14.51 1.1670 5.44 -14.75 1.2915
8.63 -12.98 1.2451 8.02 -13.32 1.3696
11.30 -11.50 1.3232 10.53 -11.92 1.4478
13.89 -10.06 1.4014 12.98 -10.56 1.5259
16.42 -8.65 1.4795 15.39 -9.22 1.6040
18.89 -7.28 1.5576 17.75 -7.91 1.6821
21.32 -5.93 1.6357 20.08 -6.62 1.7603
23.71 -4.60 1.7139 22.38 -5.34 1.8384
26.07 -3.29 1.7920 24.66 -4.07 1.9165
28.40 -2.00 1.8701 26.92 -2.82 1.9946
30.71 -0.71 1.9482 29.17 -1.57 2.0728
33.01 0.56 2.0264 31.41 -0.32 2.1509
35.30 1.83 2.1045 33.66 0.92 2.2290
37.58 3.10 2.1826 35.90 2.16 2.3071
39.87 4.37 2.2607 38.15 3.41 2.3853
42.15 5.63 2.3389 40.41 4.67 2.4634
44.45 6.91 2.4170 42.69 5.93 2.5415
46.76 8.20 2.4951 44.99 7.21 2.6196
49.09 9.49 2.5732 47.31 8.50 2.6978
51.44 10.80 2.6514 49.67 9.81 2.7759
53.82 12.12 2.7295 52.06 11.14 2.8540
56.23 13.46 2.8076 54.49 12.49 2.9321
58.69 14.82 2.8857 56.96 13.86 3.0103
61.19 16.21 2.9639 59.50 15.27 3.0884
63.74 17.63 3.0420 62.10 16.72 3.1665
66.35 19.08 3.1201 64.77 18.20 3.2446
22
69.02 20.56 3.1982 67.51 19.72 3.3228
71.78 22.10 3.2764 70.35 21.30 3.4009
74.62 23.67 3.3545 73.29 22.93 3.4790
77.56 25.31 3.4326 76.36 24.64 3.5571
80.61 27.00 3.5107 79.55 26.41 3.6353
83.77 28.76 3.5889 82.89 28.27 3.7134
87.10 30.61 3.6670 86.41 30.22 3.7915
90.57 32.53 3.7451 90.12 32.28 3.8696
94.23 34.57 3.8232 94.07 34.48 3.9478
98.13 36.73 3.9014 98.31 36.83 4.0259
102.28 39.04 3.9795 107.81 42.11 4.1821
106.72 41.51 4.0576
111.53 44.18 4.1357
116.76 47.08 4.2139
122.56 50.31 4.2920
129.02 53.90 4.3701
136.37 57.98 4.4482

FORM 160.80-M1
SOLID STATE STARTER COOLING HIGH DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE

WARNING/FAULT
In heating applications, the condenser liquid is typi-
cally too hot to cool the Liquid Cooled Solid State For YS mod E units, when the Liquid Injection fea-
Starter (LCSSS) adequately. Therefore, in these appli- ture is Enabled (with Liquid Injection setpoint on the
cations, the LCSSS cooling loop is piped to the evapo- SETUP Screen), the thresholds for the High Discharge
rator instead of the condenser. When the Heat Pump Temperature warning and safety shutdown are as fol-
Duty Setpoint is set to Enabled (regardless of whether lows:
the OPERATIONAL MODE setpoint is set to Heat-
ing, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling), the Evaporator WARNING – DISCHARGE – HIGH TEMPER-
Chilled Liquid Pump (I/O Board contacts TB2-44/45) ATURE – This warning is displayed when the
is operated to cool the LCSSS. Discharge Temperature increases to greater than
205ºF. The warning message automatically clears
LIQUID INJECTION when the temperature decreases to less than or
equal to 205ºF.
A Liquid Injection feature is available when Heat Pump
Duty is Enabled. It is used to reduce high discharge DISCHARGE – HIGH TEMPERATURE – This
temperature warnings and faults. The Liquid Injection safety shutdown is performed when the Discharge
feature is enabled/disabled on the SETUP Screen with Temperature increases to greater than 210ºF. The
the Liquid Injection setpoint. unit can be restarted when the Discharge Temper-
ature decreases to less than or equal to 210ºF and
The Liquid Injection solenoid is controlled from the the Compressor Switch is placed in the stop-reset
I/O Board TB1-34 (K15). While the chiller is running, position.
when the Discharge Temperature increases to great-
er than 200ºF, K15 is energized (closes) to provide REFRIGERANT LEVEL CONTROL
115vac to the Liquid Injection Solenoid. This ener- The YS Mod E Heat Pump uses Zone Type Refriger-
gizes (opens) the Liquid Injection Solenoid. When the ant Level Control similar to that used in YK chillers
Discharge Temperature decreases to less than 190ºF or (not the orifice bypass configuration as used in stan-
when the chiller is no longer in the RUN state, K15 is dard YS chillers). YS Chillers equipped for Heat Pump
de-energized (opens) to de-energize (close) the Liquid Duty are equipped with the YK chiller type variable
Injection Solenoid. orifice/actuator. This control must be enabled on the
A status LED, shown on the COMPRESSOR Screen OPERATIONS Screen using the LEVEL CONTROL
when Liquid Injection is enabled, illuminates when the Setpoint. The setting of the Level Control Setpoint on
Liquid Injection Solenoid is energized (open). Other- the OPERATIONS Screen determines which refriger-
wise, it is extinguished. ant level control used. When set to ENABLED, the
zone style level control is employed and the applicable
With liquid Injection enabled, when the Discharge refrigerant level control screen is displayed. When set
Temperature increases to greater than 205ºF, WARN- to DISABLED, the orifice bypass style level control is
ING – DISCHARGE – HIGH TEMPERATURE is dis- employed and its applicable screen is displayed.
played. If it increases to greater than 210ºF, a safety
shutdown is performed and “Discharge – High Tem-
perature” is displayed.
See Liquid Injection above.

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 23 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SERVICE

SETPOINTS AND RESET PROCEDURES
The chiller is supplied from the YORK Factory with all Some Safety shutdowns will not permit the chiller to start
factory mounted components fully calibrated. The fol- until a special reset procedure is performed. These reset
lowing procedures are used to verify these calibrations procedures require SERVICE access level and should not
or calibrate a component after it has been field replaced. be performed by anyone other than a Service Technician.
Each of these procedures is described below.
Programmable Service Setpoints are used by the Pro-
gram to control critical chiller operation. Also, some of ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER
these Setpoints can be used to enable or disable certain APPLICATIONS
features. Although they have been entered at the YORK
Factory, they can be changed by a field Service Techni- If the Compressor Motor is driven by an Electro-Me-
cian that has logged in at SERVICE access level. If the chanical Starter, the Control Center is equipped with
BRAM battery backed memory device (U52) is field a CM-2 Current Module along with supporting com-
replaced, all of the programmed setpoints will be lost. ponents Diode Bridge (DB) and Calibration Resistors
They will have to be reentered into the new BRAM. (RES), as described in a previous chapter of this man-
Each of these Setpoints is described below. Program- ual. The following procedures can be used to verify the
ming procedures and Control Center Keypad operation calibration and perform the calibration if Necessary.
required in the procedures below are detailed in YS In addition to the calibration, Switch S1 and Potenti-
Mod E – Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.80- ometer R16 have to be set appropriately on the CM-2
O1). In general, the following procedure is used to en- Module. If the CM-2 and/or RES are field replaced,
ter Setpoints in this section: field calibration is necessary.
1. Unless noted otherwise in procedures below, log CM-2 Settings

in at SERVICE access level using Access Code 1. Place Switch S1 in the appropriate position per
1380. the Starter type:
2. Select the appropriate Display Screen. UP: Y-Delta or Autotransformer Starter
3. Press the desired Setpoint key. Down: All others
A dialog box appears, giving the minimum and 2. Calculate LRA/FLA ratio by dividing the Motor
maximum allowed values, Default value and pres- Lock Rotor Amps by the chiller Full Load Amps
ent value. The dialog box can be canceled at any (LRA/FLA = ratio) and then adjust Potentiometer
time by pressing the CANCEL (X) key. R16 to the ratio value.
4. If the dialog box begins with the word “Enter”, Calibration Verification
use the numeric keys to enter the desired value. 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
Leading zeroes are not necessary. Press the • key using access code 1 3 8 0 . 23
to place a decimal point at the appropriate place
Pressing the ▲ key displays the Default value. 2. Select MOTOR Screen and set Current Limit and
Pressing the ▼ key clears the entry. The ◄ key Pulldown Demand Limit Setpoints to 100% FLA.
is a backspace key and causes the entry point to 3. Run chiller. Read compressor motor current in
move back one space. If the dialog box begins Phase A, B, and C using a clamp-on Ammeter.
with “Select” or “Enable”, use the ◄ and ► keys Apply ammeter to highest Phase.
to select the desired value. The ◄ key decreases
the value. The ► key increases the value. 4. Select COMPRESSOR Screen.
5. Press the ENTER () key. If the value is within 5. Manually operate the Pre-rotation Vanes by press-
range, it is accepted and the dialog box disappears. ing the OPEN and CLOSE Keypad keys as re-
The chiller will begin to operate based on the new quired to achieve a motor current equivalent to
value. If out of range, the value is not accepted 100% FLA as indicated by the clamp-on Amme-
and a message describing why it is not acceptable ter. The motor current value on the Display should
is displayed momentarily. indicate 100% FLA.

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 23 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND RESET PROCEDURES
6. Manually operate the Pre-rotation Vanes by press- SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS
ing the OPEN and CLOSE keys as required to
The chiller could be equipped with either of two dif-
achieve a motor current equivalent to 105% FLA
ferent YORK Solid State Starters. New production
as indicated by the clamp-on Ammeter. The 105%
chillers after October 1999 are equipped with the
LED on the CM-2 Module should illuminate.
Mod “B” serial data interface Liquid Cooled Solid
If the calibration verification does not perform as State Starter (LCSSS). Earlier vintage chillers, such as
above, the following Calibration procedure will have those encountered in retrofit applications are equipped
to be performed: with the Style “A” multiplexed data interface LCSSS.
Microboard Program Jumper JP39 must be positioned
Calibration to invoke the appropriate Microboard/Program opera-
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level tion for the starter applied (Refer to Microboard 031-
using access code 1 3 8 0 . 01730-000 Program Jumpers on page 28). A de-
scription of these starters is contained in SECTION 12
2. Select MOTOR Screen and set Current Limit and - SOLID STATE STARTERS of this manual. The proce-
Pulldown Demand Limit Setpoints to 100% FLA. dures for both starters are listed below.
3. Select COMPRESSOR Screen.
MOD “B” SERIAL DATA INTERFACE LIQUID
4. Run chiller and read compressor motor current in COOLED SOLID STATE STARTER
Phase A, B and C using a clamp-on Ammeter. Ap-
Complete details of the operation of this starter are
ply Ammeter to highest Phase.
contained in Solid State Starter (Mod “B”) – Opera-
5. Manually operate the Slide Valve by pressing the tion and Maintenance (Form 160.00-O2).
LOAD and UNLOAD Keypad keys as required
to achieve a motor current equivalent to 100% 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
FLA as indicated by the clamp-on Ammeter. The using access code 1 3 8 0 .
voltage across Variable Resistors (RES) should be 2. Select MOTOR Screen.
0.90 to 1.05VDC. Measure this voltage by con-
necting a Voltmeter at CM-2 Board J1-2 (+) to J1- 3. Enter the following Setpoints using procedures
1(-). If necessary, adjust RES to achieve this val- below:
ue. Figure 36 contains formulas to calculate the
Full Load Amps
resistance of RES required to achieve this voltage.
Adjust both resistors equally such that the com- This is the Full Load Amps (FLA) of the chiller as list-
bined resistance equals the calculated value. ed on the Sales Order Screen. The Microboard uses the
programmed value to perform Current Limit functions
6. Manually operate the Slide Valve by pressing the and display compressor motor current in terms of %
LOAD, UNLOAD and HOLD Keypad keys, as FLA.
required, to achieve a motor current equivalent to
105% FLA as indicated by the clamp-on Amme- 1. Press FULL LOAD AMPS key.
ter. Loosen locking nut on Potentiometer R8 on 2. Use numeric keypad keys to enter correct value.
CM-2 and adjust until the CM-2 Module 105%
LED illuminates. Counterclockwise increases 3. Press ENTER () key.
signal level; Clockwise decreases signal level.
Tighten locking nut. Start Current
The Logic/Trigger Board will limit compressor motor
7. Manually operate the Slide Valve by pressing
current to this value during starting. The correct value
the LOAD and UNLOAD Keypad keys, as re-
is (0.45 x Delta Locked Rotor amps), as listed on the
quired, to achieve a motor current equivalent to
SALES ORDER Screen.
100% FLA as indicated by the clamp-on Amme-
ter. Loose locking nut on Potentiometer R34 on 1. Press STARTING CURRENT key.
CM-2 and adjust until the motor current value
2. Use numeric keypad keys to enter correct value.
on the Display indicates 100% FLA. Clockwise
increases the signal level; Counterclockwise de- 3. Press ENTER () key.
creases the signal level. Tighten locking nut.

FORM 160.80-M1
Voltage Range MOD “A” MULTIPLEXED DATA INTERFACE

This is the compressor motor AC Power line applica- LIQUID COOLED SOLID STATE STARTER
tion. Selections are: 200-208, 220-240, 380, 400, 415, If the chiller is equipped with this model starter, the
440-480, 550-600 and Disabled. The Microboard uses Starter Logic Board is located in the Control Center.
the programmed value to determine the overvoltage and Operation of this board and overall starter operation are
under voltage shutdown thresholds for LCSSS - HIGH detailed in Solid State Starter (Mod “A”) – Operation
SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE and LCSSS - LOW SUP- and Maintenance (Form 160.46-OM3.1). The follow-
PLY LINE VOLTAGE cycling shutdowns as described ing procedures can be used to verify the calibration and
in YS Mod E – Operation and Maintenance (Form perform the calibration if necessary. If the Logic Board
160.80-O1). If DISABLED is selected, the thresholds is field replaced, field calibration is necessary using
will be ignored and these shutdowns will not occur. the procedure below. Logic Board Program Jumper J5
This check should not be arbitrarily disabled. (300V/600V) must be placed in the appropriate posi-
tion per the Compressor Motor AC Power Supply.
1. Press VOLTAGE RANGE key.
2. Use the ◄ and ► keys to scroll to desired value. Logic Board Program Jumper
3. Press ENTER () key. Place Jumper J5 (300V/600V) in appropriate position

per the Compressor Motor AC Power Line application
Open SCR Enable/Disable as follows:
This allows the Open SCR safety check, performed 600V - Place over pins 1 and 2 for 380/400/415,
by the Logic/Trigger board, to be disabled. This must 440/460/480 or 550/575/600VAC applications.
NEVER be disabled unless advised by the YORK Fac-
300V - Place over pins 2 and 3 for 200/208 or
tory.
220/230/240VAC applications.
1. Press OPEN SCR key. Setpoints
2. Use the ◄ and ► keys to scroll to desired value. 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
using access code 1 3 8 0 .
3. Press ENTER () key.
2. Select MOTOR Screen.
Shorted SCR Enable/Disable 3. Enter the following Setpoints using procedures
(Flash Memory Card version C.MLM.03.01 or later) below:
This allows the shorted SCR safety check, performed Full Load Amps
by the Logic/Trigger Board, to be disabled. This must
This is the Full Load Amps (FLA) of the chiller as listed
NEVER be disabled unless advised by the YORK Fac-
on the Sales Order Screen. The Microboard uses the pro-
tory.
grammed value to perform Current Limit functions and
1. Press SHORTED SCR key. display compressor motor current in terms of % FLA.
1. Press FULL LOAD AMPS key. 23
2. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Dis-
able. 2. Use numeric keypad keys to enter correct value.
3. Press ENTER () key. 3. Press ENTER () key.
Kilowatt Hours (KWH) Voltage Range

This allows the KWH to be set to a desired starting This is the AC Power line voltage applied to the Com-
value in the event the BRAM has to be field replaced. pressor Motor. Selections are: 200-208, 220-240,
This must never be arbitrarily performed. 380,400, 415, 440-480, 550-600 and Supply Volt-
age Range Disabled. The Microboard uses the pro-
1. Press kwh reset key. grammed selection to determine the overvoltage and
2. Use the ◄ and ► keys to scroll to desired value. undervoltage thresholds for Starter High Supply Line
Voltage and Starter Low Supply Line Voltage cycling
3. Press ENTER () key. shutdowns as described in YS Mod E – Operation and
Maintenance (Form 160.80-O1). If Supply Voltage

FORM 160.80-M1
Range Disabled is selected, the thresholds will be ig- 3. Overload -

nored and these shutdowns will not occur. This check
A. Select COMPRESSOR Screen.
should not be arbitrarily disabled.
B. Run chiller and monitor Compressor Motor
1. Press VOLTAGE RANGE key. current on the COMPRESSOR Screen.
2. Use the ◄ and ► keys to scroll to desired value. C. Manually operate the Slide Valve by press-
ing the load, unload and HOLD keys, as
required, until the highest phase indicates a
Current Unbalance Check Enable/Disable current equivalent to 105% FLA.
While the chiller is running, if the compressor Motor D. The Display should indicate 105% and the
current in phase A, B and C becomes unbalanced, a 105% LED on the Solid State Starter Log-
Safety shutdown is performed. Refer to YS Mod E – Op- ic Board should illuminate when the 105%
eration and Maintenance (Form 160.80-O1) for com- FLA value is reached.
plete description of this check. This Setpoint allows the
check to be enabled or disabled. If enabled, the check is If the calibration verification does not perform as
performed; if disabled, the check is not performed. above, one or both of the following Calibration proce-
dures will have to be performed:
1. Press CURRENT UNBALANCE key.
Calibration
2. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Dis-
able. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level using
access code 1 3 8 0 .
1. Start Current -
Calibration Verification
At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level using
B. Loosen locking nut on Solid State Starter
access code 1 3 8 0 .
Logic Board Potentiometer R38.
1. Compressor Motor current display accuracy - C. Start chiller and monitor Compressor Motor
A. Run chiller. starting current in Phase A, B and C on the
COMPRESSOR Screen.
B. Select COMPRESSOR Screen.
D. While chiller is starting, adjust START CUR-
C. Use the Slide Valve HOLD keypad key to RENT potentiometer (R38) on Solid State
stabilize the Compressor Motor current. Starter Logic Board to achieve the proper
starting current of (0.45 x Delta Locked ro-
D. Measure phase A, B and C Compressor Mo-
tor Amps) on the highest phase. Turning R38
tor current with a clamp-on ammeter. Com-
Clockwise increases current; Counterclock-
pare the Ammeter values with displayed mo-
wise decreases current. Multiple starts could
tor current values. If displayed values are
be required to achieve the correct calibration.
not within +5% of Ammeter values, refer to
Tighten locking nut.
Solid State Starter (Mod “A”) – Operation
and Maintenance (Form 160.46-OM3.1) to 2. Overload -
troubleshoot Starter.
2. Start Current - Proper starting current is (45% x B. Run Chiller and monitor Compressor Motor
Delta locked Rotor amps). current on the COMPRESSOR Screen.
A. Select COMPRESSOR Screen. C. Manually operate the Slide Valve by press-
ing the load unload and HOLD keypad keys,
B. Start chiller and monitor Compressor Motor
as required, until the highest phase indicates
starting current in phase A, B and C on the
a current equivalent to 105% FLA. Adjust
Compressor Screen.
OVERLOAD potentiometer (R44) on Solid
Highest phase should be equivalent to (45% State Starter Logic Board until the 105%
x Delta Locked rotor amps). FLA LED illuminates. Clockwise increases

FORM 160.80-M1
signal level; Counterclockwise decreases The calibration procedure can be terminated

signal level. Tighten locking nut. at any time during the procedure by pressing
the CANCEL CALIB key. If the Slide Valve
SLIDE VALVE POSITION was previously calibrated successfully, it
will revert to using the previous calibration
Potentiometer Calibration
values. If they were not previously calibrated
To assure accuracy in the Slide Valve position display, successfully, the message WARNING SLIDE
a calibration procedure must be performed for the Slide VALVE UNCALIBRATED is issued.
Valve position potentiometer. The Slide Valve position
will be displayed as “XXX” until this procedure is per- HIGH CONDENSER PRESSURE WARNING
formed. The procedure can be performed whether the THRESHOLD
chiller is running or not. If performed while running,
the Slide Valve is automatically driven to the full closed The condenser pressure at which a High Pressure warn-
and full open positions as described below. However, ing message is displayed and the Pre-rotation Vanes are
if the procedure is performed while the chiller is not inhibited from further opening, is programmable over
running, oil will have to be manually pumped into the the range of 44.9 to 251.3 PSIG. The Default value is
Slide Valve assembly, since there will be no oil pres- 251.3 PSIG. The Warning message will clear and the
sure to move the Slide valve. PRV inhibit is removed when the pressure decreases to
5 PSIG below the programmed value. Proceed as fol-
In the following, the Slide Valve potentiometer feed- lows to enter this value:
back voltage is measured at the Microboard J8-1 to
Microboard TP1 (Gnd). 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
using access code 1 3 8 0 .
1. Remove Slide Valve potentiometer cover plate. 2. Select Condenser Screen.
2. With chiller running, go to SLIDE VALVE CALI- 3. On the Condenser Screen, press HIGH PRES-
BRATION Screen from COMPRESSOR Screen. SURE WARNING THRESHOLD key.
3. Press Start Calibration key. Slide Valve will be 4. Using numeric keypad keys, enter desired value.
driven to the fully closed position. Monitor Slide
Valve potentiometer rotation. When potentiom- 5. Press ENTER () key.
eter stops rotating, valve is fully closed.
BRINE LOW EVAPORATOR PRESSURE
4. When valve is fully closed, press Set 0% Position CUTOUT
key. The potentiometer feedback voltage is stored
in memory as the 0% position. If potentiometer On Brine cooling applications, the Low Evaporator
feedback voltage is not within 0.04 to 0.12VDC Pressure safety shutdown threshold is programmable
range, SLIDE VALVE CALIBRATION FAILED over the range of 25.0 to 54.3 PSIG (Default 54.3
is displayed. PSIG) for R22 Refrigerant and 6.0 to 25.0 PSIG (De-
fault 25.0 PSIG) for R134a Refrigerant. The actual per-
5. The Slide Valve will be driven to the fully open centage of Brine solution determines this threshold. It
position. Monitor Slide Valve potentiometer rota- is calculated at the YORK Factory and programmed at
23
tion. When potentiometer stops rotating, valve is the time of manufacture. If the BRAM memory device
fully open. on the Microboard is replaced, the threshold will have
6. When valve is fully open, press Set 100% Posi- to be programmed in the field. The threshold is logged
tion key. If the feedback voltage at this position on an adhesive label attached to the inside of the Con-
is 0.122VDC greater than the feedback voltage at trol Center door. Proceed as follows to enter this value:
the 0% position, SLIDE VALVE CALIBRATION
SUCCESSFUL is displayed. Otherwise, SLIDE 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
VALVE CALIBRATION UNSUCCESSFUL is using access code 1 3 8 0 .
displayed. 2. Select EVAPORATOR Screen.
7. If calibration is successful, the calibration is com- 3. On the EVAPORATOR Screen, press the BRINE
plete. Otherwise, correct the problem and repeat LOW EVAPORATOR CUTOUT key.
the calibration procedure. 4. Using numeric keypad keys, enter desired value.
8. Install Slide Valve potentiometer cover plate. 5. Press ENTER () key.

FORM 160.80-M1
SMART FREEZE PROTECTION of 25 to 150 PSIG (R22); 15 to 110 PSIG (R134a) as

follows. The default value is 25 PSIG for either refrig-
This feature is described in SECTION 19 - SMART
erant application.
FREEZE PROTECTION of this manual. When turned
on, it allows the Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
Setpoint to be as low as 36°F for water cooling appli- using Password 1 3 8 0.
cations. Along with this feature is a correspondingly
lower Low Water Temperature Cycling Shutdown 2. From the CONDENSER Screen, select VARI-
threshold and Low Evaporator Pressure Safety Shut- ABLE ORIFICE Screen.
down threshold. The Smart Freeze Protection feature 3. On the VARIABLE ORIFICE Screen, press DEL-
can be turned ON or OFF using the following proce- TA P setpoint key.
dure:
4. Using numeric keypad keys, enter desired value.
1. Shutdown the chiller and wait for completion of
SHUTDOWN. 5. Press ENTER () key.
2. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level HOT GAS BYPASS CONTROL
using access code 1 3 8 0 . A complete description of the optional Hot Gas Bypass
3. Select EVAPORATOR Screen. control and the Setpoints that affect the operation is in
4. Press SMART FREEZE key. the SECTION 18 - HOT GAS BYPASS of this manual.
If the chiller is equipped with this option, Hot Gas op-
5. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select ON or OFF. eration must be enabled and the setpoints programmed
6. Press ENTER () key. using the procedure below. Otherwise, it must be dis-
abled.
EVAPORATOR REFRIGERANT
TEMPERATURE Enable/Disable
If the chiller is equipped with an Evaporator Refriger- If the chiller is equipped with the optional Hot Gas By-
ant Temperature sensor, the feature must be Enabled pass control, operation must be enabled. Otherwise, it
with the procedure below. If not equipped with this must be disabled. Use the following procedure:
sensor, it must be Disabled. If enabled, this tempera-
1. Shut down chiller and place COMPRESSOR
ture is displayed on the EVAPORATOR Screen, and is
Start/Stop Switch in the Stop-Reset (O) position.
also used in the Smart Freeze protection Low Evapo-
rator Pressure Safety Shutdown threshold calculation, 2. At the keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
as explained in SECTION 19 - SMART FREEZE PRO- using Password 1 3 8 0.
TECTION of this manual.
3. Select SETPOINTS Screen. From SETPOINTS
Use the following procedure to Enable or Disable this Screen, select SETUP Screen. From SETUP
feature: Screen, select OPERATIONS Screen.
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level 4. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Dis-
using access code 1 3 8 0 . able.
2. Select EVAPORATOR Screen. 5. Press ENTER () key.
3. Press REFRIGERANT key. Setpoints
4. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select Enabled or Dis- The following are the setpoints and range of program-
abled. mable values. The Default value is shown in parenthe-
5. Press ENTER () key. sis. Enter the value that will provide the desired opera-
tion. Use procedure below.
VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL
A. On Setpoint – 1.0 to 10.0°F (1.0)
This feature and associated setpoint is described in
SECTION 13 - VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL of B. Off Setpoint – 2.0 to 15°F (2.0)
this manual. The variable orifice is controlled by the 1. At the keypad, log in at SERVICE access level,
DELTA P setpoint. It is programmed over the range using Password 1 3 8 0.

FORM 160.80-M1
2. From COMPRESSOR Screen, select HOT GAS grammed “Maximum Load FLA” setpoint value (60%
BYPASS Screen. to 100%, default 100%) whenever the Leaving Chilled
Liquid temperature is ≥ the programmed “Maximum
3. On the HOT GAS BYPASS Screen, press the
Load Temperature” setpoint value (50°F to 70°F, de-
appropriate key to select the setpoint to be pro-
fault 70). Whenever the slide valve loading is being in-
grammed. Using the numeric keypad keys, enter
hibited by this feature, “Maximum Load – Load Limit”
the desired value.
is displayed on the System Details Line of the Display.
4. Press ENTER () key. Normally, this feature is not required and should be
disabled by setting both setpoints to the default values.
TRANSDUCER AUTO ZERO ENABLE/DISABLE However, when using certain compressor/chiller com-
A complete description of Pressure Transducer Auto binations under special operating conditions, separator
Zeroing is in SECTION 15 - PRESSURE TRANSDUC- overload could occur resulting in oil loss under high
ERS of this manual. Normally, Auto Zeroing should load conditions. Consult YORK Factory for require-
be enabled. However, certain local conditions, as de- ment. Program setpoints as follows:
scribed in SECTION 15 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
of this manual, can require the Auto Zeroing be dis- using password 1 3 8 0.
abled. Use the following procedure.
2. Select COMPRESSOR Screen.
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
using password 1 3 8 0. 3. Press MAXIMUM LOAD TEMPERATURE key.
Using numeric keypad keys, enter desired value.
2. Select OIL SUMP Screen. Press ENTER () key.
3. Press AUTO ZERO key. 4. Press MAXIMUM LOAD FLA key. Using nu-
4. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select ENABLE or meric keypad keys, enter desired value. Press EN-
DISABLE. TER () key.
5. Press ENTER () key. MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL SOURCE
SEAL OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER The Minimum Load Control feature prevents the Slide
ENABLE/DISABLE Valve from unloading to a position that will not allow
sufficient oil transfer to the Oil Separator while the
All new production chillers are equipped with Seal chiller is running. If the Slide valve is permitted to un-
Oil Pressure Transducers. On these chillers, the Seal load too far, there will not be enough oil transfer to the
Oil Pressure Transducer operation must be Enabled. Oil Separator and a OIL SEPARATOR – LOW LEVEL
Earlier vintage chillers, such as those encountered in Safety shutdown will result. There are two selectable
Control Center retrofits, are not equipped with this methods of setting the minimum allowed Slide Valve
transducer. If the chiller is not equipped with this trans- position:
ducer, the Seal Oil Pressure Transducer operation must
be disabled. Use the following procedure. 1. Slide Valve – This method limits the minimum 23
Slide Valve position to 15% (based on the posi-
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level tion feedback potentiometer) after the chiller has
using password 1 3 8 0. been running for 3 minutes. When the Slide Valve
2. Select OIL SUMP Screen. unloads to 15%, no more unload pulses will be
applied. If it decreases to < 15%, a 1 second load
3. Press SEAL PRESSURE key. pulse is applied every 3 seconds until the Slide
4. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select ENABLE or DIS- Valve position is > 15%.
ABLE. 2. Motor FLA – This method limits the Slide Valve
5. Press ENTER () key. minimum position to one that will maintain the
compressor motor current above the programmed
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMIT Minimum Load FLA (15% to 70% FLA) Setpoint
after the chiller has been running for 3 minutes.
After the chiller has been running for >3 minutes, this
When the Slide Valve unloads to the point where
feature limits the compressor motor current to the pro-

FORM 160.80-M1
the motor current decreases to the Minimum Load Freeze Warning Time Delay
FLA Setpoint, no more unload pulses will be ap-
If the standby chiller freeze protection is enabled us-
plied. If it unloads to the point where the motor
ing procedure above, a Freeze Warning Delay Time of
current is < Minimum Load FLA Setpoint, a 1
30 to 60 minutes (default 30) must be programmed as
second load pulse is applied every 3 seconds until
follows:
the motor current is ≥ the Minimum Load FLA
Setpoint. 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
using Password 1 3 8 0.
Regardless of which method is selected, MINIMUM
LOAD – LOAD LIMIT is displayed on the System De- 2. Select CONDENSER Screen.
tails line of the Display while the slide valve position
3. Press FREEZE TIME key.
is being limited.
Select the method that performs best in the application.
The operating point at which low separator oil level 5. Press ENTER () key.
will occur can be found by manually unloading the
Slide Valve while observing system conditions. LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SENSITIVITY
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
This setpoint adjusts the Slide Valve unloading re-
using password 1 3 8 0.
sponse to changes in Leaving Chilled Liquid Tempera-
2. Select COMPRESSOR Screen. ture. Normally, it is desired to have equal loading and
unloading response. However, in applications where
3. Press MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL SOURCE
the load is quickly removed from the chiller, faster un-
key.
loading might be required. There are two selections as
4. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select either Motor FLA follows:
or Slide Valve. If Slide Valve is selected, proceed
to step 7. NORMAL – Provides standard Slide Valve control. A
Load or Unload pulse is applied, as required. This se-
5. Press MINIMUM LOAD FLA key. lection will provide proper operation in most applica-
tions.
7. Press ENTER () key. 2X – Provides fast unload Slide Valve operation. Op-
eration is same as NORMAL, except all Unload pulses
STANDBY CHILLER FREEZE PROTECTION are twice as long as they would be in NORMAL opera-
tion. This provides for faster unloading.
A complete description of this feature is contained in
SECTION 20 - STANDBY CHILLER FREEZE PRO- 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
TECTION of this manual. If this feature is desired, it using Password 1 3 8 0.
must be Enabled using the procedure below. Other-
wise, it must be Disabled. If the feature is Enabled, 2. Select EVAPORATOR Screen.
the Freeze Warning Delay Time Setpoint must be pro- 3. Press SENSITIVITY key.
grammed per the procedure below.
4. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select NORMAL or 2X.
Enable/Disable 5. Press ENTER () key.
1. At the Keypad, log in at Service access level using
Password 1 3 8 0. ICE STORAGE MODE
2. Select CONDENSER Screen. A complete description of this feature is contained in

the YS Mod E – Operation and Maintenance (Form
3. Press FREEZE WARNING key. 160.80-O1). This feature can only be used in Brine
4. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select Enable or Dis- mode (Microboard Program Jumper JP35 out). If this
able. feature is desired, it must be turned ON. Otherwise it
must be turned OFF. Use procedure following.

FORM 160.80-M1
Turn On/Turn Off Field 3 – Local service phone number label. Default
If the Ice Storage feature is desired, it must be turned value is blank.
ON. Otherwise, it must be turned OFF. Field 4 – Local service phone number. Default value
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level is blank.
using Password 1 3 8 0. Use the following procedure to change any of the
2. Select EVAPORATOR Screen. fields:
3. Press ICE STORAGE key. 1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
using access code 1 3 8 0.
4. Use the ◄ and ► keys, select ON or OFF.
5. Press ENTER () key. 2. Select OPERATIONS Screen.
3. Press EDIT PHONE NUMBERS Key.
MANUAL SLIDE VALVE CONTROL
4. Use the ◄ and ► keys to move green selection
The Slide Valve can be manually controlled from the
box to the desired field to be changed.
Keypad as follows:
5. Press the ENTER () key.
1. At the keypad, log in at SERVICE access level
using Password 1 3 8 0. 6. In the Dialog box that appears, a red box appears
over the first changeable value. Use the ◄ and
2. Select COMPRESSOR Screen. ► keys to position the red box over the number/
3. Pressing the following keys applies the following character to be changed or entered. Use the ◄
signals to the Slide Valve Actuator: and ► keys to scroll sequentially through num-
bers, alphabet characters and punctuation marks
LOAD – Applies a continuous load signal.
to select the desired value. When the desired value
UNLOAD – Applies a continuous unload signal. displayed, use the ◄ and ► keys to move the red
HOLD – Applies neither a load nor unload signal. box to the next value to be changed. The numeric
keypad keys can also be used to enter numbers.
AUTO – Places the Slide Valve under Program Continue this process until all desired values have
control (automatic operation). been entered.
SERVICE PHONE NUMBERS 7. After all desired values have been entered in pre-
(Flash Memory card version C.MLM.03.02.xxx and vious step, press ENTER () key.
later) CHILLER STARTS AND OPERATING HOURS
Two service phone numbers (Regional and Local), RESET
with labels, can be displayed on the OPERATIONS The Number of Starts and the Operating Hours can be
Screen. The Default value for the Regional number is reset to zero or preset to a desired number. However,
the “Johnson Controls North American Parts Center this should never be arbitrarily performed. Use the fol- 23
Toll Free Number 1-800-861-1001". However, the la- lowing procedure:
bel and number can be changed to any desired value.
The Default value for the Local label and number is 1. At the keypad, log in at ADMIN access level.
blank. The Service Technician enters the Local phone This password changes daily. Contact your local
number and label. YORK Service Office.
The entry format consists of 4 fields (rows), vertically 2. Select OPERATIONS screen.
from the top. Up to 40 characters/numbers can be en- 3. Press NUMBER of STARTS or OPERATING
tered for each field. HOURS key as appropriate.
Field 1 – Regional phone number label. Default value 4. Using numeric keypad keys, enter desired num-
is “Johnson Controls North American Parts ber.
Center Toll Free Number”
5. Press ENTER key () key.
Field 2 –
Regional phone number. Default value is
1-800-861-1001.

FORM 160.80-M1
SALES ORDER DATA 3. If logged in at SERVICE Access level, press SET

ORDER INFO key to enter Commissioning date,
All of the Sales Order Data, except the “Chiller Com-
Job Name or Location and proceed to step 4. If
missioning Date” is entered at the YORK Factory at
logged in at ADMIN or TEST OP level, Press SE-
the time of chiller manufacture. The Service Techni-
LECT key to select the data category (ORDER, DE-
cian must enter the Chiller Commissioning Date and
SIGN, NAMEPLATE, SYSTEM) to be entered.
modify the Job Name or Job Location if necessary
at the completion of commissioning. Normally, the 4. Press CHANGE key. The first changeable area in
remainder of the Sales Order Data should never be the selected category will be outlined in a green
modified. However, if there is a change to the chiller selection box. The procedure can be terminated
design, in the field, this data can be modified. If the anytime after this by pressing the CANCEL (x)
BRAM battery-backed memory device (U52) fails and key.
requires field replacement, all of the data will be lost
5. Use the ◄ and ► keys to move the green selec-
and will have to be manually programmed.
tion box to the desired value to be changed, within
There are three different Passwords used, depending the category selected.
on the circumstances, to change the Sales Order Data 6. Press ENTER () key.
as follows:
7. Enter the appropriate data. Use the numeric key-
• Chiller Commissioning - Service Technician must pad keys to enter numbers. Use the • key to enter
use password 1 3 8 0 to enter the Commissioning a decimal point. Use the ◄ and ► keys to scroll
Date and modify Job Name and Job Location if sequentially up and down through the alphabet
necessary. to enter letters or a comma (,), slash (/) or minus
• Modifying Sales Order Data - Service Technician sign (-). Each time the ► key is pressed, the next
must use the ADMIN password. This password higher sequential alphabet letter is displayed.
changes daily. Contact your local YORK Service Each time the ▼ key is pressed, the next lower
Office. alphabet letter is displayed. The comma, slash and
minus sign can be selected after scrolling through
• BRAM Replacement - If the BRAM (U52) is field the entire alphabet. During the entry process, the
replaced, the Service Technician must use pass- ◄ key can be used to backspace and the ► key
word 0 2 2 8 to enter all Sales Order Data into a can be used to forward space.
new blank BRAM. When logged in at this level,
the ACCESS LEVEL shown will be TEST OP. 8. Press ENTER () key.
This password only works with a blank BRAM. 9. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select another value
When using this password to enter data to be changed within the same category or press
into a new blank BRAM, the FINISH CANCEL (X) key to exit and allow selection of
PANEL SETUP procedure (listed at the another category.
end of the entry procedure below) must be
10. EXTREMELY IMPORTANT! If the procedure
performed after all data has been entered.
above was performed using password 0 2 2 8 to
Failure to perform this procedure will
enter data into a new blank BRAM, the following
result in unreliable Control Center opera‑
procedure must be performed after all the desired
tion! If this procedure is performed prior
data is entered. If the following procedure is per-
to entering all data, the ability to enter
formed prior to entering all of the data, the abil-
more data will be terminated.
ity to enter more data will be terminated. Failure
Use the following procedure to enter data: to perform this procedure after all data has been
entered will result in unreliable Control Center
1. At the keypad, log in using the appropriate pass- Operation!
word as described above.
A. On SALES ORDER screen, press FINISH
2. From the SETPOINTS Screen, select SETUP PANEL SETUP key.
SCREEN. From the SETUP Screen, select SALES
ORDER Screen. B. Use the ◄ and ► keys to select YES.
C. Press ENTER () key.

FORM 160.80-M1
CUSTOM USER ID AND PASSWORDS ID used to make the change are stored. The Security
Log Screen and the Security Log Details Screen dis-
When logging in, the user is requested to enter a User
play levels of this information.
ID, followed by a Password. The universal and Default
User ID is zero (0). The universal Password to log in On the Security Log Screen, accessible from the His-
at OPERATOR access level is 9 6 7 5 . The universal tory Screen, the Setpoint, Setpoint Category and new
Password to log in at SERVICE access level is 1 3 8 0 . Setpoint value are listed and numbered in reverse order
No log in is required for VIEW access level. However, in which they were changed. The most recent is listed
if desired, the service technician can establish up to as number 1; the next most recent as number 2, etc.
four custom User IDs and Passwords that can be used A PRINT key allows printing this entire list. Since 15
by Operations personnel to log in at VIEW, OPERA- changes can be displayed at one time, multiple pages
TOR, or SERVICE level. could be necessary to display all the changes. PAGE-
UP and PAGE-DOWN keys are provided to view the
Up to four Custom Users can be established with User
entire list. If it is desired to view the details of a par-
ID’s from 1 to 9999. Each user can be assigned a Pass-
ticular Setpoint change, select the Setpoint change
word of 0 to 9999 and an access level of VIEW, OP-
number with the LOG ENTRY key and then press the
ERATOR or SERVICE.
VIEW DETAILS key. This moves to the Security Log
Use the following procedure to establish Custom Details Screen.
Users:
The Security Log Details Screen displays the follow-
1. At the Keypad, log in at SERVICE access level ing Setpoint change details. The Setpoint is selected
using 1 3 8 0. from the list on the Security Log Screen as explained
in the previous paragraph.
2. From the SETPOINTS Screen, select SETUP
Screen. From SETUP Screen, select USER • Setpoint Category
Screen. • Setpoint
3. Press CHANGE USER ATTRIBUTES key. The • Date and time of change
first changeable area is outlined in a green selec-
• Access Level and User ID used to make the change
tion box.
• Old Value
4. Use the ◄ , ► , ▲ or ▼ keys to move the green
selection box to the desired value to be changed. • New Value
5. Press the ENTER () key. The following Setpoint changes are not logged:
6. U
sing numeric Keypad keys, enter desired pa- • Clock Mode
rameter as follows: • Custom Screen slot numbers
User ID – 1 to 9999 (numbers cannot be dupli- • Advanced Diagnostics communication port tests
cated for more than one user) • Advanced Diagnostics secondary multiplexer freeze
Password – 0 to 9999 • Soft shutdown initiated by operator 23
Access Level – 0 = View, 1 = Operator, • System language
2 = Service • Display units
• Any Print report
7. Press ENTER () key. • Cancel any print report
8. After all values have been entered, press CAN- • Schedule clear
CEL key (X) to exit. • Schedule repeat exception days
• Schedule start and stop times
RECORD SETPOINT CHANGES • Log in/log out
(Flash memory Card version C.MLM.03.03.xxx and • User attributes for ID, Password and Level
later) • Trend start/stop
• Trend slot numbers, minimums and maximums
This feature provides a record of the last 75 Setpoint • Trend trigger data
changes. The date and time the Setpoint was changed, • Trend print mode
the new Setpoint value and the Access Level and User • Trend view mode

FORM 160.80-M1
View the Setpoint changes as follows: HIGH CONDENSER PRESSURE FAULT

WHILE SHUTDOWN – RESET PROCEDURE
1. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE Access Level
using access code 1 3 8 0. (Software version C.MLM.03.xx.xxx (and later)
or C.OPT.03.xx.xxx (and later))
2. From the HISTORY Screen, select SECURITY
LOG Screen to view the complete list of setpoint High temperature condenser water flowing through the
changes. condenser while the chiller is shutdown can cause a
condenser high pressure condition in the condenser re-
To view the details of a particular setpoint change, se- sulting in loss of refrigerant. This anticipatory safety
lect it with the LOG ENTRY key, then press VIEW fault annunciates condenser high pressure conditions
DETAILS key. This causes a jump to the SECURITY when the chiller is not running as follows:
LOG DETAILS Screen where the setpoint change de-
tails are displayed. While the chiller is stopped, if the condenser pressure
exceeds 245.0 PSIG, a safety fault occurs and CON-
MICROBOARD 031-02430-000 DENSER – HIGH PRESSURE - STOPPED is dis-
SETUP/CONFIGURATION played.
The following functions are programmed as Setpoints The chiller can be started after the condenser pressure
on the 031-02430-00 microboard. Refer to SECTION decreases to less than 245.0, and a special reset proce-
4 - MICROBOARD 031-02430-000 for explanation of dure is performed as follows:
each setpoint.
1. Place the COMPRESSOR switch in the Stop-re-
• Chilled Liquid Pump Operation set position.
• Motor Drive Type 2. At the keypad, login at Service access level using
• Anti-recycle code 1 3 8 0.
• Power Failure Restart 3. Select COMPRESSOR screen.
Program the above setpoints as follows: 4. Press the FAULT ACKNOWLEDGE key on the
COMPRESSOR Screen. A dialog box appears
1. At the Keypad, login at SERVICE access level displaying “Enter Password to Clear Fault”.
using access code 1 3 8 0. (“Power Failure Re-
start” only requires OPERATOR access level 9 6 5. Enter 1 3 9 7 and press the ENTER key ().
7 5). (“Motor Drive Type” requires chiller to be This anticipatory fault is only performed while the
stopped with Compressor Switch in the Stop-Re- chiller is stopped. If a CONDENSER – HIGH PRES-
set position). SURE fault is detected while the chiller is in Pre-lube,
2. Select SETUP Screen from SETPOINTS Screen. System Run or Coastdown, the fault is handled in the
normal way and does not require the special reset pro-
3. Press CHANGE SETTINGS key. cedure.
4. A green box will appear around the first change-
able setpoint. Use ▲▼ keys to place the box
around the setpoint to be changed.
5. Press  key. A dialog box will appear with the
range of settings.
6. Use ◄► keys to scroll to desired setting.
7. Press the ENTER key ().

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 24 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
The problems that could be encountered in the Control C. Ensure the Compressor motor current is 0%
Center are in the following categories: FLA.
• Keypad D. Log in at SERVICE access level using access
code 1 3 8 0.
• Display
E. Move Microboard Program Switch SW1‑4 to
• Serial Input/Output (I/O) the ON position. A Watchdog reset will occur
• Digital Input/Output (I/O) and the Boot‑up process will commence. At
the completion of the Boot‑up process, the
• Analog Inputs Diagnostics Main Screen will appear. (Note:
There is a Diagnostic and associated Troubleshooting If SWI‑4 is moved to the ON position before
procedure for each category. They are described on the step 4 above is performed, the LOG IN key
following pages. Each Diagnostic is accessed from the will be displayed and Logging in at SER-
Diagnostics Main Screen, which is entered using the VICE access level must be performed before
procedure below. If there is a Control Center problem, the Main Screen is displayed.
determine the category of the problem. Then perform 2. Not shown. Available when logged in at SER-
the applicable Diagnostic. If the Diagnostic reveals a VICE access level, whether the chiller is running
malfunction, perform the Troubleshooting procedure or not. Accessed from the SETUP screen via the
to locate the defective component. SETPOINTS screen. There are two screens avail-
There are several documents that must be referred to able that allow the Analog Inputs voltage levels
while performing the Diagnostics and Troubleshooting and Digital I/O states to be monitored. These
procedures. Each procedure references the Section and screens are preceded by a general screen that pro-
figures of this manual that describe the operation of the vides the installed software versions.
component being tested. Also, the applicable Control
SOFTWARE VERSION
Center wiring diagram must be used as follows: Wir-
ing Diagram – Unit With Electro-Mechanical Starter Controls ‑ FLASH Memory Card on Microboard
(Form 160.80‑PW1) or Wiring Diagram – Unit With BIOS ‑ BIOS EPROM on Microboard
Mod “B” Solid State Starter (Form 160.80‑PW2).
Kernel ‑ Software that is part of FLASH Memory Card
There are two versions of the Diagnostics screens
available as follows: GUI ‑ Software that is part of FLASH Memory Card
1. Shown in Figure 46 on page 158 through Figure SIO ‑ Software that is part of FLASH Memory Card
52. These screens are used during the Diagnostics
and Troubleshooting process. They allow output GPIC ‑ EPROM in E-Link Gateway
states to be changed. Access the Diagnostics Main
Screen as follows:
A. The chiller must be stopped. 24
B. Place Compressor Start/Stop switch in the
Stop‑Reset position (O).

FORM 160.80-M1
MAIN DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN
00211VIP
Figure 46 - MAIN DIAGNOSTICS SCREEN
Each of the Diagnostics is accessed from this screen. Main Screen

Press the appropriate key to select the desired diagnos- ‑ Keypad test
tic. After each diagnostic is performed, return to this
MAIN Screen, from which the next diagnostic can be ‑ Display test
selected. ‑ Bit patterns test
Some of the diagnostics have sub‑screens that are ‑ All red
accessed from the selected diagnostic screen. The
sub‑screens are shown indented: ‑ All green
‑ All blue
‑ All white
‑ All black
‑ Serial 1/0 test
‑ Digital 1/0 test
‑ Analog Inputs
The ADVANCED SECURITY key is used during the
manufacturing process and has no field service use.

FORM 160.80-M1
KEYPAD TEST SCREEN
00212VIP
Figure 47 - KEYPAD TEST SCREEN
This diagnostic is used to verify Keypad operation and C. In the Keypad connector, locate the pins of
the Microboard’s ability to respond to a pressed key. the row/column coordinate of the key of the
Refer to description of Keypad operation in SECTION key to be tested.
9 - KEYPAD of this manual.
D. Insert the leads of an Ohmmeter into the pins
PROCEDURE identified in step “c” above.
1. Press each keypad key. As the key is pressed, an E. Press the key to be tested. If the contact resis-
illuminated LED is displayed corresponding to tance is >100 Ohms, the Keypad is defective.
the key location on the keypad. F. Release the key. If the contact resistance is <
2. Press the DIAGNOSTICS key to return to the 1 Meg Ohm, the Keypad is defective.
MAIN DIAGNOSTICS Screen. 2. Ribbon Cable
TROUBLESHOOTING Using an Ohmmeter, perform a continuity test on
If an LED is not displayed when a key is pressed, the all conductors in the ribbon cable. An open circuit
Keypad, Keypad ribbon cable or Microboard could be would indicate the ribbon Cable is defective. 24
defective. Use the following procedure to locate the 3. Microboard
defective component.
There are no checks or measurements to be made
1. Keypad on the Microboard. If the Keypad and Ribbon
A. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the Key- Cable check OK per the above procedures, the
pad. Microboard is most likely the cause of the problem.
B. Identify row/column coordinate of the key to

be tested. Refer to Figure 33 on page 78.

FORM 160.80-M1
DISPLAY TEST SCREEN
00213VIP
Figure 48 - DISPLAY TEST SCREEN
Each of the Display Diagnostics is accessed from this stalled display or the Microboard Display control-
screen. After each diagnostic is performed, return to ler is defective. Refer to Figure 50 on page 164.
this screen, from which the next diagnostic can be
• All Red ‑ This test verifies the operation of all of
selected. Refer to description of Display operation in
the red pixels. All of the red pixels are turned on
Sections 6 through 8 of this manual.
to create a completely red screen. Any red pixels
PROCEDURE that do not turn on will appear as black dots on the
display. If any black dots appear, first ascertain it
1. Press the appropriate keypad key to perform the is not caused by dirt that is lodged between the
desired test from the list below. display surface and the protective plastic cover. It
2. Press the CANCEL (X) or ENTER () key to ter- is normal for a small number of randomly spaced
minate test and return to DISPLAY TEST MAIN pixels to not illuminate. It is not necessary to re-
Screen, from which another test can be selected. place the display if a small number of black dots
appear. They will not be visible on the normal
3. When all the desired tests have been performed, screens displayed outside of this diagnostic mode.
press the DIAGNOSTICS key to return to the However, large black areas would be indicative of
MAIN DIAGNOSTICS Screen. a defective display.
• Bit Patterns ‑ This test is used to detect jitter and • All Green ‑ This test verifies the operation of all
alignment defects. It verifies proper operation and of the green pixels. All of the green pixels are
compatibility of the Microboard Display Control- turned on to create a completely green screen. Re-
ler with the display. Four vertical bars of green, fer to description of “All Red” test above.
dark blue, light blue and yellow, outlined by a red
border are displayed. If the vertical bars are not • All Blue ‑ This test verifies the operation of all of
stable or straight, or the red border is not complete- the blue pixels. All of the blue pixels are turned
ly visible, then either the Microboard Program on to create a completely blue screen. Refer to de-
Jumpers are not configured correctly for the in- scription of “All Red” test above.

FORM 160.80-M1
• All White ‑ This test verifies the display’s ability

to turn on all pixels to display a completely white
screen. Any pixel that does not turn on will appear
as a black dot. Refer to description of “All Red”
test above.
• All Black ‑ This test verifies the display’s ability
to turn off all pixels to display a completely black
screen. Any pixel that does not turn off will ap-
pear as a red, green, blue or white dot. Refer to
description “All Red” test above.
24

FORM 160.80-M1
BIT PATTERNS TEST SCREEN
00214VIP
Figure 49 - BIT PATTERNS TEST SCREEN
TROUBLESHOOTING 1. Display Ribbon Cable

If any of the above tests do not perform correctly as Using an Ohmmeter, perform a continuity test on
described above, perform the applicable procedure be- all conductors in the ribbon cable. An open circuit
low: would indicate the ribbon cable is defective.
Test Failed 2. Display Interface Board
Bit Patterns ‑ If the vertical bars are not straight or Using an Ohmmeter, perform a continuity test on
if the red border is not completely visible, either the all conductors of the Interface Board. An open cir-
Microboard Program Jumpers are not configured cor- cuit would indicate the Interface Board is defec-
rectly or for the installed Display or the Microboard is tive.
defective. 3. Microboard
All Red, All Green, All Blue, All White or All A. With the “All Red” test selected, the voltage
Black at Microboard J5‑6 through J5‑11 (Red driv-
If these tests do not produce appropriate solid color ers bits 0‑5), as measured to Gnd, should be
screens, the Display Ribbon Cable, Display Interface > 3.0VDC. If not, the Microboard is defec-
Board, Microboard or Display could be defective. To tive.
locate the defective component perform tests in the fol- B. With the “All Green” test selected, the volt-
lowing order: age at Microboard J5‑13 through J5‑18
(Green drivers bits 0‑5), as measured to Gnd,
should be >3.0VDC. If not, the Microboard
is defective.

FORM 160.80-M1
C. With the “All Blue” test selected, the volt- Display

age at Microboard J5‑20 through J5‑25 (Blue If the Display Ribbon Cable, Display Interface
drivers bits 0‑5), as measured to Grid, should Board and Microboard check OK per the above
be >3.0VDC. If not, the Microboard is defec- procedures, the Display is most likely the cause
tive. of the problem.
D. With the “All White” test selected, the volt-
age at Microboard J5‑6 through J5‑11, J5‑13
through J5‑18 and J5‑20 through J5‑25
should be >3.0VDC. If not, the Microboard
is defective.
E. With “All Black” selected, the voltage
at Microboard J5‑6 through J5‑11, J5‑13
through J5-18 and J5-20 through J5-25
should be <1.0VDC. If not, the Microboard
is defective.
24

FORM 160.80-M1
SERIAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TESTS SCREEN
00215VIP
Figure 50 - SERIAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TESTS SCREEN
This diagnostic is used to verify correct operation of From To

the Serial Data Ports. There is a test for each of the COM 1 J2‑4 (TX) J2‑3 (RX)
five Serial Data Ports. Each RS‑232 port (COM 1, 2 J2‑5 (DTR) J2‑2 (DSR)
and 4b) is tested by transmitting serial test data from
outputs to inputs of each port. Both the transmit and From To
receive functions as well as the control lines are tested. COM 2 J13‑5 (TX) J13‑3 (RX)
The RS‑485 ports (COM 3 and 4a) are tested by trans- J13‑7 (DTR) J13‑1(DCD) and J13‑2(DSR)
mitting serial test data from one RS‑485 port to an- J13‑4 (RTS) J13‑6 (CTS) and J13‑8 (RI)
other. The TX/RX opto‑coupled port (COM 5) is tested RS‑485 From To
by transmitting serial test data from the TX output to (COM J12‑3 (+) J11‑3 (+)
the RX input. If the received data matches the transmit- 3 and 4a) J12‑2 (‑) J11‑2 (‑)
ted data, PASS is displayed, indicating the serial port
is OK. Otherwise, FAIL is displayed, indicating the Microboard Program Jumper JP27 must be installed
serial port is defective. Prior to performing each test, in position 1 and 2.
the Service Technician must install a wire loop‑back
From To
connection as described below. Refer to SECTION 3 -
COM 4b J2-7 (GTX) J2-6 (GRX)
MICROBOARD 031-01730-000 and Figure 9 on page
32 of this manual for description of the Serial data Microboard Program Jumper JP27 must be installed
Ports. in position 2 and 3.
PROCEDURE From To
COM 5 J15-1 (TX) J15-4
1. Using small gauge wire, fabricate loop‑back con-
J15-2 (RX) J15-5
nections and install as follows for each port to be
J15-3 (Common) J15-6
tested. Failure to install the loop‑back connection
or configure the Microboard Program jumper as
noted will result in a FAIL outcome for the test.

FORM 160.80-M1
Make individual wire connections or use YORK loop- COM 2 – Three tests are performed. Test data
around diagnostic connector 025-33778-000 as de- is sent from TX (J13-5) to RX (J13-3) at 19200
picted in Figure 51 on page 165. This connector is Baud. DTR (J13-7) is set to a Logic High and
available from the Baltimore Parts Center. read at DSR (J13-2) and DCD (J13-1). RTS
(J13-4) is set to a Logic High and read at CTS
2. After connecting appropriate loop-back connec- (J13-6) and R1 (J13-8). If any test fails, COM 2
tions above, press the appropriate key to initiate tests are terminated.
the desired test. An LED will illuminate indicat-
ing the test is in progress. If it is desired to termi- RS-485 (COM 3 and 4a) – Test data is sent from
nate the test, press the CANCEL TEST key. Test COM 3 RS-485 port to COM 4a RS-485 Port at
data is sent from an output to an input as described 19200 Baud. Test data is then sent from COM 4a
below. At the completion of each test, if the data to COM 3 at the same rate. If either test fails, RS-
received matches the data sent, the Serial Port op- 485 tests are terminated.
erates properly and PASS is displayed. Otherwise, COM 4b – Test data is sent from GTX (J2-7) to
FAIL is displayed, indicating the Serial Port is GRX (J2-6) at 19200 Baud.
defective. A FAIL result would be indicative of a
defective Microboard. The following is a descrip- COM 5 – Test data is sent from TX (J15-1) to
tion of each test. J15-4 at 1200 Baud. This output turns the Mi-
croboard’s loop-around test Transistor on and
COM 1 – Two tests are performed. Test data is off, applying 0/+5VDC pulses from J15-5 to RX
sent from TX (J2-4) to RX (J2-3) at 9600 Baud (J15-2) input.
and DTR (J2-5) is set to a Logic High level and
read at DSR (J2-2). If any test fails, COM 1 tests 3. After all desired tests have been performed, press
are terminated. the DIAGNOSTICS key to return to the MAIN
DIAGNOSTICS Screen.
TRANSMIT
J15
TX
1 1
RX
2 2
COMMON
3 3
IN
4 4
RECEIVE OUT
5 5
6 6
+5VDC
LOOP-AROUND DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR

YORK PIN 025-33778-000
INSTALL TO PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC
+5VDC 24
LOOP-AROUND TEST
LD04250
Figure 51 - MICROBOARD - COM 5 SERIAL DATA PORT

FORM 160.80-M1
DIGITAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TESTS SCREEN
00216VIP
Figure 52 - DIGITAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS TESTS SCREEN
This diagnostic is used to analyze the digital inputs and PROCEDURE

outputs of the Microboard. Refer to description of I/O
Digital Inputs
Board in SECTION 5 - I/O BOARD of this manual.
1. The Digital Inputs are listed on this screen accord-
The state of each Microboard Digital Input, Program ing to a.) Terminal number on the I/O Board and
Jumper and Program DIP Switch, as interpreted by the b.) Microboard Program Jumpers and Program
Microboard, is depicted by an LED. If the Microboard DIP Switches. Figure 18 on page 55 shows the
interprets its input as being at a Logic Low (<1.0VDC) devices connected to these terminals. Microboard
level, the LED is illuminated. If interpreted as being 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers on page 28
at a Logic High (>4.0VDC) level, the LED is extin- and Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Switch-
guished. es on page 30 list the functions of the Program
The state of the Microboard’s intended drive signals Jumpers and Switches.
to each of the Relays on the I/O Board is depicted by 2. With 115VAC applied to a particular I/O Board
an LED. If the intended output is a Logic Low level Digital Input, the applicable LED should be illu-
(<1.0VDC), the LED is illuminated. If the intended minated. If the LED is not illuminated, perform
output is a Logic High level (>10.0VDC), the LED appropriate Troubleshooting procedure below.
is extinguished. Logic Low outputs energize the Re-
lays. Logic High outputs de‑energize the Relays. The 3. With 0VAC applied to a particular I/O Board
state of any output can be manually set to either the Digital Input, the applicable LED should be extin-
ENABLED (Logic Low) or DISABLED (Logic High) guished. If the LED is not extinguished, perform
state. appropriate Troubleshooting procedure below.
4. If a Program Jumper is present, the applicable
LED should be extinguished. If the LED is not
extinguished, the Microboard is defective.

FORM 160.80-M1
5. If a Program Jumper is not present, the applicable is selected, it will turn off, de‑energizing the de-
LED should be illuminated. If the LED is not il- vice it is connected to. If relay does not de‑ener-
luminated, the Microboard is defective. gize or triac does not turn off, perform appropriate
troubleshooting procedure below.
6. If a Program Switch (DIP) is in the ON position,
the applicable LED should be illuminated. If the 7. When all desired tests have been performed, press
LED is not illuminated, the Microboard is defec- DIAGNOSTICS key to return to the MAIN DI-
tive. AGNOSTICS Screen.
7. If the Program Switch (DIP) is in the OFF posi- 8. Install Motor Controller connection from TB6‑I to
tion, the applicable LED should be extinguished. TB6‑53 removed in step 1.
If the LED is not extinguished, the Microboard is
defective. Digital Inputs Troubleshooting
If any of the Digital Inputs tests fail to perform as de-
8. When all desired tests have been performed, press
scribed above, perform the following steps in sequence.
DIAGNOSTICS key to return to MAIN DIAG-
Refer to Figure 18 on page 55 and applicable wiring
NOSTICS Screen.
diagram referenced at the beginning of SECTION 23 -
Digital Outputs SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND
RESET PROCEDURES. If a defective component is
1. IMPORTANT! ‑ The following steps cannot be
found during any of the following steps, replace the
performed until the Motor Controller connection
component as instructed and repeat the digital Inputs
between TB6‑1 and TB6‑53 has been removed.
Procedure above to determine if the problem has been
This connection could be a jumper or it could be
resolved.
a connection from external devices in the start-
er. The Program will prevent manual control of 1. Remove 1/0 Board ribbon cable. Using an Ohm-
Digital Output devices until this connection is re- meter, perform a continuity check on I/O Board
moved. ribbon cable J1‑21 to J19‑21, J1‑22 to J19‑22 and
2. The Digital Outputs are listed on this Screen ac- applicable output pin of function that failed in
cording to Relay and Triac number (KI, Q3, etc.). Procedure above. If an open circuit is detected, re-
Figure 15 shows the external devices that are con- place ribbon cable. Otherwise, install ribbon cable
nected to these Relays and Triacs and the func- and proceed to next step.
tions of each one. 2. Measure the +5VDC supply voltage to the 1/0
3. Press SELECT key. An arrow will appear adjacent Board on 1/0 Board between J1‑21 and J1‑22. If
to Relay KO. >4.5VDC, proceed to next step. If < 4.5VDC, dis-
connect ribbon cable at I/O Board J1 and repeat
4. Select a relay or triac for manual control by using the measurement at J1. If <4.5VDC, replace the
the ▲ and ▼ keys to place the arrow adjacent to Microboard. Re‑install the ribbon cable.
the desired device.
3. With 115VAC (± 10%) applied to the I/O Board
5. Press the ENABLE OUTPUT key to enable the digital input that failed in Procedure above, the
selected output. The LED adjacent to the selected applicable I/O Board output at J1 should be at a
output should illuminate. If it does not, perform Logic low level (<1.0VDC). If it is >1.0VDC, re-
KEYPAD Diagnostics test. If a relay is selected, place the I/O Board. If the output is at a Logic 24
it should energize, closing its contacts. If a triac Low level, the applicable LED should be illumi-
is selected, it will turn on, energizing the device nated. If the LED is not illuminated, replace the
it is connected to. If the relay does not energize or Microboard.
triac does not turn on, perform appropriate trou-
bleshooting procedure below. 4. With 0VAC applied to the I/O Board digital in-
put that failed in Procedure above, the applicable
6. Press the DISABLE OUTPUT key to disable the I/O Board output at J1 should be at a Logic High
selected output. The LED adjacent to the selected level (>4.OVDC). If it is <4.OVDC, replace the
output should extinguish. If it does not, perform 1/0 Board. If the output is at a Logic High level,
KEYPAD diagnostic test. If a relay is selected, it the applicable LED should be extinguished. If it is
should de‑energize, opening its contacts. If a triac not extinguished, replace the Microboard.

FORM 160.80-M1
Digital Outputs Troubleshooting 5. Press DISABLE OUTPUT key. The LED adja-
If any of the Digital outputs tests fail to perform as de- cent to the selected output will extinguish.
scribed above, perform the following steps in sequence. A. If a Relay is selected as the output, the ap-
Refer to Figure 21 on page 57 and applicable wiring propriate Microboard output pin at J19 for
diagram referenced at the beginning of SECTION 23 - the selected output should be at a Logic
SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND High (>10.0VDC) level. With the output at
RESET PROCEDURES. If a defective component is a Logic High level, the relay contacts should
found during any of the steps, replace the component be open. If they are not open, replace the I/O
as instructed and repeat the Procedure above to deter- Board. If it is <10.0VDC, remove the ribbon
mine if the problem has been resolved. cable from J1 of the I/O Board. On the I/O
Board, measure the resistance from J1‑26 to
1. Remove I/O Board ribbon cable. Using an Ohm-
the appropriate pin of J1 on the I/O Board for
meter, perform a continuity test on the cable J1‑25
the selected relay. If the resistance is >100
to J19‑25, J1‑26 to J19‑26 and applicable output
Ohms, replace the I/O Board. If the resis-
pin of function that failed in Procedure above. If
tance is <100 Ohms, replace the Microboard.
an open circuit is detected, replace ribbon cable.
Otherwise, install ribbon cable and proceed to B. If a Triac is selected as the output, the ap-
next step. propriate Microboard output pin at J19 for
the selected output should be at a Logic High
2. Measure the +12VDC supply voltage to the I/O
(>10.0VDC) level. If it is <10.0VDC, re-
Board on I/O Board between J1‑26 (+12VDC)
place the Microboard. With the output at a
and J1‑25 (Gnd). If >11.0VDC, proceed to next
Logic High level, the Triac should be turned
step. If <11.0VDC, disconnects ribbon cable at
off. If the Triac has not turned off, replace the
I/O Board J1 and repeat measurement at JI. If
I/O Board. See note 1 below for Triac testing.
<11.0VDC, replace the Microboard. Reinstall the
ribbon cable. Notes
3. Using the Digital Outputs Procedure above, select 1. The load (actuator) must be connected across the
the output that failed the digital Output test above. Triac to determine the on/off state of the Triac.
The on/off state of the Triac can be determined by
4. Press ENABLE OUTPUT key. The LED adja-
measuring across the device (for example, TB1‑3
cent to the selected output will illuminate. The
to TB1‑59 or TB1‑58 to TB1‑59) with an AC Volt-
appropriate Microboard output pin at J19 for
meter. If the Triac is turned on, the voltage will
the selected output should be at a Logic Low
be <10VAC. If the Triac is turned off, the voltage
level (<1.0VDC). If it is >1.0VDC, replace the
will be >100VAC (Slide Valve actuator).
Microboard. With the output at a Logic Low, the
following should occur:
A. If a Relay is selected as the output, the con-
tacts of the relay should be closed. If they are
not closed, replace the I/O Board.
B. If a Triac is selected as the output, the Triac
should be turned on. If the Triac has not
turned on, replace the I/O Board. See note 1
below for Triac testing.

FORM 160.80-M1
ANALOG INPUTS TEST SCREEN
00217VIP
Figure 53 - ANALOG INPUTS TEST SCREEN
This diagnostic is used to analyze the Analog Inputs Channel

to the Microboard. The voltage level of each Analog 0 ‑ +2.5VDC Analog supply voltage reference.
input, as interpreted by the Microboard, is displayed. Microboard TP6.
The “Counts” listed for each parameter is the Ana-
log‑to‑Digital (A/D) converter value and is for manu- 1 ‑ Not Used
facturing and engineering use only.
2 ‑ Return Chilled Liquid Temperature
If the chiller is shutting down on an Analog Safety or
is prevented from starting because of an Analog in- 3 ‑ Leaving Condenser Liquid Temperature
put, there is probably an Analog Input problem. This 4 ‑ Return Condenser Liquid Temperature
Screen can be used in the investigation of this problem.
5 ‑ Not Used
Important! This test does not apply to the Leaving
Chilled Liquid Temperature analog input or a 0‑10VDC 6 ‑ Discharge Temperature
Remote Setpoint input at channels 27 and 28.
7 ‑ Oil Temperature
The following is a list of the Analog inputs displayed. 24
8 ‑ Evaporator Refrigerant Temperature
Refer to the appropriate Section of this manual for an
explanation of each: SECTION 11 - CURRENT MOD- 9 ‑ Condenser Pressure
ULE (CM-2), SECTION 12 - SOLID STATE START-
ERS, SECTION 15 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS and 10 ‑ Evaporator Pressure
SECTION 16 - TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS. 11 ‑ Filter Oil Pressure
12 ‑ Oil Pressure
13 ‑ Not Used
14 ‑ Seal Oil Pressure

FORM 160.80-M1
15 ‑ Mod “A” Solid State Starter/CM‑2 MUX output 2. Refer to Wiring Diagrams listed in front of this
Channel 0 section to identify the device that performs this
function and the jack and pin connection to the
16 ‑ Mod “A” Solid State Starter/CM‑2 MUX output Microboard.
Channel 1
3. Channel 0
17 ‑ Mod “A” Solid State Starter/CM‑2 MUX output
Channel 2 Using a Voltmeter, measure the voltage between
Microboard TP6 (+2.5VDC) and TP1 (Gnd).
Channel 3 Compare this measured value to the displayed
value. If the value is not within ±10%, replace the
19 ‑ Mod “A” Solid State Starter/CM‑2 MUX output Microboard.
Channel 4
All channels except 0, 1, 15‑22
Using a Voltmeter, measure the analog input to
Channel 5
the Microboard. Make the measurement between
21 ‑ Mod “A” Solid State Starter/CM‑2 MUX output the device output and Ground connection to the
Channel 6 device. For example, measure the output of the
Evaporator Transducer at Microboard J8‑18 (sig-
22 ‑ Mod “A” Solid State Starter/CM‑2 MUX output nal) to J8‑9 (Gnd).
Channel 7
Channels 15‑22
23 ‑ Not Used
Select the desired channel by pressing the SE-
24 ‑ Slide Valve Potentiometer LECT CHANNEL key and using the ▲ and ▼
keys to place the arrow head next to the desired
25 ‑ Not Used channel. Then, freeze the address of that channel
26 ‑ Not Used to the Mod “A” Solid State Starter or CM‑2 Mux.
Then measure MUX output at Microboard J10‑6
27 ‑ Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature (signal) to J10‑5 (Gnd). When completed, press
Setpoint (0‑20mA or 4‑20mA) CANCEL FREEZE key.
28 ‑ Remote Current Limit Setpoint (0‑20mA or Channels 27,28
4‑20mA)
IMPORTANT! This procedure only applies to
29 ‑ Not Used 4‑20mA inputs. It does not apply to 0‑10VDC
inputs. Using a Voltmeter, measure the Remote
30 ‑ Not Used Current Limit setpoint input at J22‑2 (signal) or
Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature set-
Procedure
point input at J22‑4 (signal) to J22‑5 (Gnd).
1. From the chart above, select the analog input that
is malfunctioning. All inputs except channel 0, 15 4. Compare the measured value in the previous step
through 22, 27 and 28 are sensors that connect di- with the value displayed on the Analog Inputs
rectly to the Microboard via shielded cable. Chan- Screen for that value.
nel 0 is a reference voltage for the Analog circuits
5. If the measured value is not within ±15% of the
on the Microboard. Channels 15 through 22 are
displayed value, replace the Microboard. Other-
multiplexed outputs from the Mod “A” Solid
wise, proceed to the troubleshooting procedure
State Starter (Solid Sate Starter applications) or
below to find the cause of the problem.
CM‑2 Current Module (Electro-Mechanical Start-
er applications). Channels 27 and 28 are Remote 6. When all desired tests have been performed, press
Setpoint inputs used in Analog Remote mode. DIAGNOSTICS key to return the MAIN DIAG-
NOSTICS Screen.

FORM 160.80-M1
Troubleshooting 3. Using a Voltmeter, measure the +5VDC supply

voltage to the Solid State Starter Logic Board or
All Channels except 0, 1, 15‑22, 27, 28
CM‑2 Board. Make measurement at Microboard
1. Disconnect both ends of the cable of the Analog J10‑4(+5VDC) to J10‑5 (Gnd). If voltage is
input that is malfunctioning. Using an Ohmmeter, <4.5VDC, replace the Microboard.
perform a continuity test on all conductors in the
cable. An open circuit would indicate the cable is 4. Using a Voltmeter, verify the correct address is
defective. being sent from the Microboard to the Mod “A”
Solid State Starter Logic Board or CM‑2 Board.
2. Using a Voltmeter, measure the +12VDC supply Freeze address as described above. If the address
voltage input at the Microboard J1‑3 (+12VDC) is correct, the Solid State Starter Logic Board or
to J1‑2 (Gnd). If voltage is < 11.5VDC, check wir- CM‑2 Board or input devices to these boards is
ing to Power Supply. If wiring is OK, the Power most likely the cause of the problem. If address
supply is most likely defective. is not correct, the Microboard is most likely the
cause of the problem.
3. Using a Voltmeter, measure the supply voltage
(+5VDC, +1 2VDC or +24VDC) to the sensor. If 5. Press CANCEL FREEZE key.
voltage is not within ±10% of specified voltage,
disconnect J7, J8 and J9 from the Microboard. Channels 27, 28
This disconnects all analog devices from the
1. Refer to Microboard 031-01730-000 Program
Microboard. If the voltage increases to the cor-
Jumpers on page 28 and verify Program Jump-
rect level, a Thermistor or Transducer is shorted.
ers JP23 and JP24 are configured correctly for the
Locate the shorted device and replace. If, after
type of input (0‑10VDC or 4‑20mA).
disconnecting the connectors the supply voltage
is still not within 10% of the specified value, the 2. Disconnect both ends of the cable of the remote
voltage supply source (Microboard or Power Sup- input that is malfunctioning. Using an Ohmmeter,
ply) is most likely defective. perform a continuity check on all conductors in
the cable. An open circuit would indicate the cable
4. Verify sensor accuracy using appropriate test de- is defective.
vice. Replace sensor if necessary.
3. If steps are OK, problem most likely is in the re-
Channels 15 ‑ 22 mote device that supplies the remote signal.
1. Disconnect both ends of ribbon cable connected
to Microboard J10. Using an Ohmmeter, perform
a continuity test on all conductors in the cable. An
open circuit would indicate the cable is defective.
2. Using a Voltmeter, measure the +12VDC supply
voltage input at the Microboard J1‑3 (+12VDC)
to J1‑2 (Gnd). If voltage is <11.5VDC, check wir-
ing to Power Supply. If wiring is OK, the Power
Supply is most likely defective.
24

FORM 160.80-M1

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 25 - SYSTEM COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST
Use the following checklist during commissioning to ____

Brine Low Evaporator Pressure Cutout
assure all Setpoints have been programmed to the de- threshold* (160.80-M1)
sired value and all calibrations have been performed.
____ Ice Storage Mode On/Off (160.80-O1)
The programming of some of the Setpoints require
a SERVICE access level. To assure access to all ____ Smart Freeze Protection On/Off
Setpoints, log in at SERVICE access level before be- (160.80-M1)
ginning. The Setpoints are grouped under the Display
____
Refrigerant Temp sensor Enable/Disable
Screen in which they appear. The indented screens are
(160.80-M1)
subscreens of the numbered screens and are accessed
from the numbered screens. An explanation of each 3. CONDENSER Screen (160.80-M1)
setpoint or Calibration Procedure below is contained in
the reference document listed in parenthesis adjacent to ____
Enter the High Pressure Limit/Warning
each item. If any of the Setpoints have to be changed, threshold Setpoint
use the standard programming procedures in YS Mod ____ Freeze Warning (standby chiller freeze pro-
E – Operation and Maintenance (Form 160.80-O1). tection) - Enable/Disable (160.80-M1)
Thresholds, values and calibrations of items marked
with an asterisk “*” have been determined and entered/ ____ Freeze Warning Time Delay (160.80-M1)
set at the YORK Factory at the time of manufacture. VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL
1. PROGRAM JUMPERS/SWITCHES ____ Enter the Delta P Setpoint.
(160.80-M1)
4. COMPRESSOR Screen (160.80-M1)
____ Verify Microboard Program Jumpers and
____ Maximum Load
Program Switches are configured appropriately. If
equipped with Microboard 031-01730-000, refer ____ Maximum Load Temperature
to Microboard 031-01730-000 Program Jumpers
on page 28 and Microboard 031-01730-000 ____ Maximum Load FLA
Program Switches on page 30. If equipped with ____ Select Minimum Load Control Source (Slide
Microboard 031-02430-000, refer to Microboard Valve or Motor FLA).
031-02430-000 Program Jumpers on page 44
and Microboard 031-02430-000 Program Jump- ____ If Motor FLA selected, enter Minimum
ers on page 44. Load FLA
2. EVAPORATOR Screen (160.80-O1) HOT GAS BYPASS Screen (160.80-M1)

Enter the following Setpoints: If chiller is equipped with optional Hot Gas By-
pass, enable operation on the OPERATIONS
____ Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp (except BAS
screen and enter the following setpoints:
(ISN) Remote mode)
____ On Setpoint
____ Remote Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Set-
point Range (except BAS (ISN) Remote ____ Off Setpoint
mode)
SLIDE VALVE CALIBRATE Screen
____ Low Chilled Liquid Temp cycling shutdown
temperature ____ Perform Slide Valve calibration 25
____ Low Chilled Liquid Temp cycling shutdown 5. OIL SUMP (SEPARATOR) Screen (160.80-M1)
Restart temperature ____ Auto Zero Enable/Disable
____
Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Control
____ Seal Pressure Enable/Disable
Sensitivity (160.80-M1)

FORM 160.80-M1
____
Oil Recovery Enable or Disable (Flash ____ Verify slide bar resistor “RES” setting*
Memory Card version C.MLM.03.03.xxx
____ Verify 105% FLA calibration*
and later). Should only be enabled if oil re-
covery is required. ____ Verify 100% FLA display*
7. SETPOINTS Screen (160.80-O1)
6. MOTOR Screen (160.80-O1)
The setpoints listed on the SETPOINTS Screen
____ Local Motor Current Limit
have already been programmed above on Previous
____ Pulldown Demand Limit Screens. The values shown reflect the previously pro-
grammed values. However, the setpoints listed here
____ Pulldown Demand Time can be changed on this screen if desired. This screen
Solid State Starter applications (160.80-M1) is used primarily as a central location from which
Mod “B” Solid State Starter most setpoints can be programmed. If it is not desired
to change any of the listed setpoints, proceed to the
Verify the following Setpoints have been SETUP Screen below.
programmed:
____ Full Load Amps* SETUP Screen
____ Enable Clock
____ Start Current*
____ Enter CLOCK Time and Date
____ Supply Voltage Range*
____ Select 12 or 24 hour display mode
____ Enable Open SCR Detection
____ Enable Shorted SCR Detection (Flash Mem- Microboard 031-01730-000
ory Card version C.MLM.03.01 or later) ____ The state of Program Jumpers/Switches that
affect chiller operation are displayed. These
____ KWH Reset
were configured in step 1 above. Confirm
Mod “A” Solid State Starter they are correct. (160.80-M1 Section 3)
Verify the following Setpoints have been Microboard 031-02430-000
programmed:
____ The state of Program Switches SW1-1 (Re-
____ Full Load Amps* frigerant Selection) and SW1-2 (Liquid
Type) is displayed. These were configured
____ Supply Voltage Range*
in step 1 above. Confirm they are correct.
____ Current Unbalance Check - Enable/Disable* (160.80-M1)
Logic Board Enter the following Setpoints: (160.80-M1)

____ Verify location of 300V/600V Jumper* ____ Chilled Liquid Pump Operation
____ Verify Start Current calibration* ____ Motor Drive Type
____ Verify 105% FLA calibration* ____ Anti-Recycle
Electro-Mechanical Starter applications ____ Power Failure Restart

(160.80-M1)
SCHEDULE Screen
Current Module ____ Enable or Disable Daily start/stop schedule
____ Verify Switch S1 (Y-delta/57% or all others) as required.
setting*
____
Enter chiller START/STOP schedule if
____ Verify Pot R16 (LRA/FLA ratio) setting* required.

FORM 160.80-M1
USER Screen PRINTER Screen

____ Select desired Display language If Printer is connected to Microboard serial ports, enter
the following:
____ Select desired Display units; ENGLISH or
METRIC ____ Automatic print logging Enable/disable
____ If desired, establish custom USER IDs and ____ Automatic printer logging start time
PASSWORDS (160.80-M1)
____ Automatic print logging interval
COMMS Screen ____ Printer type
If Modem and or Printer is connected to the Microboard
Serial data ports, enter the following parameters as re- ____Report type; STATUS, SETPOINTS,
quired for each device connected: SCHEDULE or SALES ORDER
____ Baud rate SALES ORDER Screen

____ Enter system commissioning date
____ Number of data bits
____ Number of stop bits OPERATIONS Screen
____
Select desired Control Source (operating
____ Parity
mode); LOCAL, BAS (ISN) Remote, DIGI-
Enter appropriate number for Modem, Printer or BAS TAL Remote or ANALOG Remote
(ISN) Remote application:
____ Hot Gas Bypass Control (optional) Enable/
____ Chiller ID (identification) Disable
____
Edit regional phone number if necessary
(Flash memory Card version C.MLM.03.02.
xxx and later)
____ Enter Local phone number (Flash memory
Card version C.MLM.03.02.xxx and later)
25

FORM 160.80-M1

FORM 160.80-M1
SECTION 26 - SERVICE INFORMATION LETTERS / BULLETINS

SI0007 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MAY 2001
GENERAL This feature is a valuable troubleshooting tool for Ser-

Beginning May 2001, an enhanced Flash Memory vice technicians. It allows an event that occurs during
Card will be supplied with new production Nema 1-4 unattended hours to be captured for viewing at a later
and CE chillers. New features are outlined below and time. The trigger event results in a screen of frozen
are also included in YS Mod E – Operation and Main- trend data that will remain on the screen until manually
tenance (Form 160.80-O1). cleared.
Flash Memory Card versions and part numbers are ap- DISPLAY OF SERVICE PHONE NUMBERS
plied as follows: Two service phone numbers (Regional and Local),
with labels, can be displayed on the OPERATIONS
• N
ema 1-4 Chillers
Screen. The Default value for the Regional number is
C.MLM.03.02A.101 (031-02005-001)
the North American Toll Free number. However, the
• CE Chillers label and number can be changed to any desired value.
C.MLM.03.02A.201 (031-02005-002) The Local label and number can also be entered.
The enhanced flash cards are also available from the “EVAPORATOR-TRANSDUCER OR
Baltimore Parts Distribution Center for retrofit to ex- TEMPERATURE SENSOR” SAFETY
isting chillers. SHUTDOWN
TREND SCREEN – TRIGGERED CHART In Previous Flash Memory Card versions, the condi-
tions for this safety shutdown were checked after the
A TRIGGERED chart can now be created. This is in
first 10 minutes of chiller run. Under certain operating
addition to the ONE SCREEN and CONTINUOUS
conditions this would result in unnecessary shutdowns.
chart types that can be created in previous Flash Mem-
In this version, in addition to the previous criteria, the
ory Card versions. With the TRIGGERED chart type,
shutdown conditions are not checked unless Smart
data collection can be set to START or STOP based
Freeze is enabled and the Evaporator Refrigerant Tem-
upon the status of up to two Operator selected condi-
perature RT7 (if enabled) or Evaporator Saturation
tions (TRIGGERS) and a selected TRIGGER DELAY.
Temperature (derived from the evaporator pressure
If START is selected, data collection will not begin
transducer) is < 32º F.
until all triggers have been satisfied and any selected
TRIGGER DELAY has elapsed. Data collection will
stop at the completion of one screen of data. If STOP is
selected, data collection will begin when manually ini-
tiated, and will stop when all triggers have been satis-
fied and any selected TRIGGER DELAY has elapsed.
26

FORM 160.80-M1
SI0024 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MARCH 2002
GENERAL as number 1; the next most recent as number 2, etc.

A PRINT key allows printing this entire list. Since 15
Beginning March 2002, an enhanced Flash Memory
changes can be displayed at one time, multiple pages
Card will be supplied in new production YS Nema 1-4
could be necessary to display all the changes. PAGE-
and CE chillers. The new features are outlined below.
UP and PAGE-DOWN keys are provided to view the
The Flash Memory Card versions and part numbers are entire list. If it is desired to view the details of a par-
as follows: ticular Setpoint change, select the Setpoint change
number with the LOG ENTRY key and then press the
• N
ema 1-4 Chillers VIEW DETAILS key. This moves to the Security Log
C.MLM.03.03.100 (031-02005-001) details Screen.
• CE Chillers The Security Log Details Screen, accessible from the
C.MLM.03.03.200 (031-02005-002) Security Log Screen, displays the following Setpoint
These versions are also available from the Baltimore change details. The Setpoint is selected from the list
Parts Distribution Center for retrofit to existing chill- on the Security Log Screen as explained in the previ-
ers. ous paragraph. A PRINT key is provided to print this
information.
RECORD SETPOINT CHANGES
• Setpoint Category
This feature provides a record of the last 75 Setpoint
changes. The date and time the Setpoint was changed, • Setpoint
the new Setpoint value and the Access Level and User • Date and time of change
ID used to make the change are stored in the BRAM.
The Security Log Screen and the Security Log Details • Access Level and User ID used to make the change
Screen display levels of this information. Both screens • Old Value
are available in Service Access level or higher.
• New Value
On the Security Log Screen, accessible from the His-
tory Screen, the Setpoint, Setpoint Category and new
Setpoint value are listed and numbered in reverse order
in which they were changed. The most recent is listed

FORM 160.80-M1
SI0091 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MAY 2004
GENERAL This anticipatory fault is only performed while the

Beginning May 2004, enhanced software will be sup- chiller is stopped. If a CONDENSER – HIGH PRES-
plied in all new production YS chillers. It is backward SURE fault is detected while the chiller is in Start Se-
compatible to all previous YS chillers. The enhance- quence Initiated, System Run or Coastdown, the fault
ments are outlined below. is handled in the normal way and does not require the
special reset procedure.
The versions and part numbers for 031-01730-000 Mi-
croboards are: STYLE B SOLID STATE STARTER FAULTS
The following changes apply to faults detected by the
• NEMA 1-4 chillers
Style B Liquid Cooled Solid State Starter (LCSSS):
C.MLM.03.04.104 (p/n 031-02005-001)
• CE chillers Open SCR (Silicon Controlled Rectifier) Fault
C.MLM.03.04.204 (p/n 031-02005-002) When the Solid State Starter initiates a shutdown, the
The version and part number for 031-02430-000 Mi- fault data transferred to the OptiView Control Center
croboards is: is a function of the eprom (U16) in the starter Logic/
Trigger Board.
• NEMA 1-4 and CE Chillers
C.OPT.03.04.301 (p/n 031-02488-001) Previously, in starters equipped with eprom version
C.SSS.01.00 through C.SSS.01.02, when an Open
HIGH CONDENSER PRESSURE FAULT SCR fault occurred, the fault data returned from the
WHILE SHUTDOWN starter did not identify the phase in which the fault
High temperature condenser water flowing through the occurred. Therefore, the message displayed by the
condenser while the chiller is shutdown can cause a OptiView Control Center was “LCSSS – OPEN SCR”.
condenser high pressure condition resulting in loss of New version C.SSS.01.03 eprom now supplied in the
refrigerant. Therefore, an anticipatory safety fault has starter Logic/Trigger Board, returns fault data that
been created to annunciate condenser high pressure identifies the phase in which the Open SCR condition
conditions when the chiller is not running as follows: is detected.
While the chiller is stopped, if the condenser pressure This Flash Memory Card version interprets this fault
exceeds 245.0 PSIG, a safety fault occurs and “Con- data and displays a message that identifies the defec-
denser – High Pressure - Stopped” is displayed. tive phase. Therefore, when this Flash Memory Card
version is used with a starter Logic/Trigger Board
The chiller can be started after the condenser pressure equipped with version C.SSS.01.03 (and later) eprom,
decreases to less than 245.0 PSIG and a special reset “LCSSS – Phase X Open SCR” (X replaced by A, B or
procedure is performed as follows: C as appropriate) is displayed when the fault occurs.
1. Place the COMPRESSOR switch in the Stop-re- START INHIBIT FAULTS
set position.
The following Start Inhibit Faults are no longer logged
2. At the keypad, login at Service access level using on the History Screen. They will continue to be dis-
code 1 3 8 0. played on the System Details line of the display and
transferred to the E-Link Gateway.
3. Select COMPRESSOR screen.
4. Press the FAULT ACKNOWLEDGE key on the “LCSSS – Phase X Heatsink Temperature – Stopped”
COMPRESSOR Screen. A dialog box appears (X replaced by A, B or C as appropriate)
displaying “Enter Password to Clear Fault”.
Diagnostics Screen
5. Enter 1 3 9 7 and press the ENTER key (). The communications error counters now count up to 26
65535 (was 255).

FORM 160.80-M1
SI0091 - SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS EFFECTIVE MARCH 2004 (CONT'D)
Invalid System Details Messages E-Link Gateway Interface

In previous Flash Memory Card versions, there have This version uses Yorktalk 3 version 6.0. This version
certain operating conditions that could cause messages transfers Start Inhibit and Modified Run codes into the
on the System Details line of the display to become correct E-Link Gateway slots. In previous versions,
“stuck”. The most prevalent one was “Motor – High these were transferred into cycling and safety shut-
Current Limit”. This has been corrected in this version. down slots. This caused the third-party device to inter-
pret these events as safety or cycling events.
E-Link Gateway Induced Reboots
The BAS (ISN) number conversion routine has been
With previous Flash Memory Card versions, E-Link
modified to correctly interpret Leaving Chilled Liquid
Gateway communications could cause the Microboard
Temperature Setpoint resets from the E-Link Gateway
to randomly reboot. This has been corrected in this ver-
in metric mode. Setpoints of 1.6 to 1.9 ºC were not
sion.
interpreted correctly.
History Data Storage
The data capture has been modified to assure that all
data is that which is valid at the instant of the event.

FORM 160.80-M1
NOTES

P.O. Box 1592, York, Pennsylvania USA 17405-1592 800-861-1001 Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2014 www.johnsoncontrols.com ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Form 160.80-M1 (114)
Issue Date: January 31, 2014
Supersedes: 160.80-M1 (911)

160.80-m1.pdf SERVICIO YS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

160.80-m1.pdf SERVICIO YS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

160.80-m1.pdf SERVICIO YS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What safety guidelines must operating/service personnel follow?

What safety guidelines must operating/service personnel follow?

What are the different safety symbols used in the document?

What are the different safety symbols used in the document?

ROTARY SCREW LIQUID CHILLERS

SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS Supersedes: 160.80-M1 (911) Form 160.80-M1 (114)

OPTIVIEW™ CONTROL CENTER

371-02459-101 (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER - NEMA 1)

Indicates a possible hazardous situation Identifies a hazard which could lead to

Indicates a potentially hazardous situa‑ Highlights additional information useful

CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT

DESIGN LEVEL (E)

CONDENSER CODE CM 5CI

SECTION 2 - SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE............................................................................................................... 11

SECTION 3 - MICROBOARD 031-01730-000.........................................................................................................19

SECTION 4 - MICROBOARD 031-02430-000.........................................................................................................35

SECTION 5 - I/O BOARD........................................................................................................................................51

SECTION 6 - LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY.............................................................................................................61

SECTION 7 - DISPLAY INTERFACE BOARD.........................................................................................................69

SECTION 8 - DISPLAY BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD.....................................................................................73

SECTION 10 - POWER SUPPLY.............................................................................................................................79

SECTION 11 - CURRENT MODULE (CM-2)...........................................................................................................81

SECTION 12 - SOLID STATE STARTERS..............................................................................................................85

SECTION 13 - VARIABLE ORIFICE CONTROL.....................................................................................................93

SECTION 14 - E-LINK GATEWAY...........................................................................................................................95

SECTION 15 - PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS.........................................................................................................97

SECTION 16 - TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS.................................................................................................101

SECTION 17 - REMOTE SETPOINTS................................................................................................................... 119

SECTION 18 - HOT GAS BYPASS.......................................................................................................................125

SECTION 19 - SMART FREEZE PROTECTION...................................................................................................127

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)

SECTION 20 - STANDBY CHILLER FREEZE PROTECTION..............................................................................129

SECTION 21 - OIL RECOVERY FEATURE...........................................................................................................131

SECTION 22 - YS MOD E WITH HEAT PUMP......................................................................................................133

SECTION 23 - SYSTEM CALIBRATION, SERVICE SETPOINTS AND RESET PROCEDURES........................ 145

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D)

Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Control Sensitivity................................................................................ 152

SECTION 24 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................................157

SECTION 25 - SYSTEM COMMISSIONING CHECKLIST....................................................................................173

SECTION 26 - SERVICE INFORMATION LETTERS / BULLETINS.....................................................................177

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

SECTION 2 - SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

+12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER

REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT LIMIT + 24 VDC

KEYPAD COLUMN OUT

REMOTE CYCLING STATUS / ALARM

Figure 1 - CONTROL CENTER - ELECTRO-MECHANICAL STARTER APPLICATIONS

SLIDE VALVE CONTROL

+12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER

SLIDE VALVE POSITION

REMOTE LEAVING CHILLED WATER TEMP & CURRENT LIMIT + 24 VDC

REMOTE CYCLING STATUS / ALARM

Figure 2 - CONTROL CENTER - MOD “A” SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS

SLIDE VALVE CONTROL

+12 / -12 / +5 VDC POWER

REMOTE CYCLING STATUS / ALARM

Figure 3 - CONTROL CENTER - MOD “B” SOLID STATE STARTER APPLICATIONS

SLIDE VALVE CONTROL

Figure 4 - OPERATION SEQUENCE TIMING DIAGRAM (ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AND SOLID STATE

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.